[go: up one dir, main page]

WO2004018999A2 - Compositions, kits, and methods for identification, assessment, prevention, and therapy of cervical cancer - Google Patents

Compositions, kits, and methods for identification, assessment, prevention, and therapy of cervical cancer Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2004018999A2
WO2004018999A2 PCT/US2003/026184 US0326184W WO2004018999A2 WO 2004018999 A2 WO2004018999 A2 WO 2004018999A2 US 0326184 W US0326184 W US 0326184W WO 2004018999 A2 WO2004018999 A2 WO 2004018999A2
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
ofthe
marker
expression
patient
protein
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/US2003/026184
Other languages
French (fr)
Other versions
WO2004018999A3 (en
Inventor
John E. Monahan
Xumei Zhao
Yan Chen
Karen Glatt
Shubhangi Kamatkar
Original Assignee
Millenium Pharmaceuticals, Inc.
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by Millenium Pharmaceuticals, Inc. filed Critical Millenium Pharmaceuticals, Inc.
Priority to AU2003265556A priority Critical patent/AU2003265556A1/en
Priority to EP03793217A priority patent/EP1565581B1/en
Priority to CN03824456XA priority patent/CN101044247B/en
Priority to JP2004529772A priority patent/JP2006514823A/en
Priority to AT03793217T priority patent/ATE519862T1/en
Priority to CA002496272A priority patent/CA2496272A1/en
Publication of WO2004018999A2 publication Critical patent/WO2004018999A2/en
Publication of WO2004018999A3 publication Critical patent/WO2004018999A3/en

Links

Classifications

    • G—PHYSICS
    • G01—MEASURING; TESTING
    • G01N—INVESTIGATING OR ANALYSING MATERIALS BY DETERMINING THEIR CHEMICAL OR PHYSICAL PROPERTIES
    • G01N33/00—Investigating or analysing materials by specific methods not covered by groups G01N1/00 - G01N31/00
    • G01N33/48—Biological material, e.g. blood, urine; Haemocytometers
    • G01N33/50—Chemical analysis of biological material, e.g. blood, urine; Testing involving biospecific ligand binding methods; Immunological testing
    • G01N33/53—Immunoassay; Biospecific binding assay; Materials therefor
    • G01N33/574—Immunoassay; Biospecific binding assay; Materials therefor for cancer
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07K—PEPTIDES
    • C07K14/00—Peptides having more than 20 amino acids; Gastrins; Somatostatins; Melanotropins; Derivatives thereof
    • C07K14/435—Peptides having more than 20 amino acids; Gastrins; Somatostatins; Melanotropins; Derivatives thereof from animals; from humans
    • C07K14/46—Peptides having more than 20 amino acids; Gastrins; Somatostatins; Melanotropins; Derivatives thereof from animals; from humans from vertebrates
    • C07K14/47—Peptides having more than 20 amino acids; Gastrins; Somatostatins; Melanotropins; Derivatives thereof from animals; from humans from vertebrates from mammals
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P35/00—Antineoplastic agents
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C12—BIOCHEMISTRY; BEER; SPIRITS; WINE; VINEGAR; MICROBIOLOGY; ENZYMOLOGY; MUTATION OR GENETIC ENGINEERING
    • C12Q—MEASURING OR TESTING PROCESSES INVOLVING ENZYMES, NUCLEIC ACIDS OR MICROORGANISMS; COMPOSITIONS OR TEST PAPERS THEREFOR; PROCESSES OF PREPARING SUCH COMPOSITIONS; CONDITION-RESPONSIVE CONTROL IN MICROBIOLOGICAL OR ENZYMOLOGICAL PROCESSES
    • C12Q1/00—Measuring or testing processes involving enzymes, nucleic acids or microorganisms; Compositions therefor; Processes of preparing such compositions
    • C12Q1/68—Measuring or testing processes involving enzymes, nucleic acids or microorganisms; Compositions therefor; Processes of preparing such compositions involving nucleic acids
    • C12Q1/6876—Nucleic acid products used in the analysis of nucleic acids, e.g. primers or probes
    • C12Q1/6883—Nucleic acid products used in the analysis of nucleic acids, e.g. primers or probes for diseases caused by alterations of genetic material
    • C12Q1/6886—Nucleic acid products used in the analysis of nucleic acids, e.g. primers or probes for diseases caused by alterations of genetic material for cancer
    • G—PHYSICS
    • G01—MEASURING; TESTING
    • G01N—INVESTIGATING OR ANALYSING MATERIALS BY DETERMINING THEIR CHEMICAL OR PHYSICAL PROPERTIES
    • G01N33/00—Investigating or analysing materials by specific methods not covered by groups G01N1/00 - G01N31/00
    • G01N33/48—Biological material, e.g. blood, urine; Haemocytometers
    • G01N33/50—Chemical analysis of biological material, e.g. blood, urine; Testing involving biospecific ligand binding methods; Immunological testing
    • G01N33/5005—Chemical analysis of biological material, e.g. blood, urine; Testing involving biospecific ligand binding methods; Immunological testing involving human or animal cells
    • G01N33/5008—Chemical analysis of biological material, e.g. blood, urine; Testing involving biospecific ligand binding methods; Immunological testing involving human or animal cells for testing or evaluating the effect of chemical or biological compounds, e.g. drugs, cosmetics
    • G01N33/5011—Chemical analysis of biological material, e.g. blood, urine; Testing involving biospecific ligand binding methods; Immunological testing involving human or animal cells for testing or evaluating the effect of chemical or biological compounds, e.g. drugs, cosmetics for testing antineoplastic activity
    • G—PHYSICS
    • G01—MEASURING; TESTING
    • G01N—INVESTIGATING OR ANALYSING MATERIALS BY DETERMINING THEIR CHEMICAL OR PHYSICAL PROPERTIES
    • G01N33/00—Investigating or analysing materials by specific methods not covered by groups G01N1/00 - G01N31/00
    • G01N33/48—Biological material, e.g. blood, urine; Haemocytometers
    • G01N33/50—Chemical analysis of biological material, e.g. blood, urine; Testing involving biospecific ligand binding methods; Immunological testing
    • G01N33/53—Immunoassay; Biospecific binding assay; Materials therefor
    • G01N33/574—Immunoassay; Biospecific binding assay; Materials therefor for cancer
    • G01N33/57407—Specifically defined cancers
    • G01N33/57411—Specifically defined cancers of cervix
    • G—PHYSICS
    • G01—MEASURING; TESTING
    • G01N—INVESTIGATING OR ANALYSING MATERIALS BY DETERMINING THEIR CHEMICAL OR PHYSICAL PROPERTIES
    • G01N33/00—Investigating or analysing materials by specific methods not covered by groups G01N1/00 - G01N31/00
    • G01N33/48—Biological material, e.g. blood, urine; Haemocytometers
    • G01N33/50—Chemical analysis of biological material, e.g. blood, urine; Testing involving biospecific ligand binding methods; Immunological testing
    • G01N33/53—Immunoassay; Biospecific binding assay; Materials therefor
    • G01N33/574—Immunoassay; Biospecific binding assay; Materials therefor for cancer
    • G01N33/57484—Immunoassay; Biospecific binding assay; Materials therefor for cancer involving compounds serving as markers for tumor, cancer, neoplasia, e.g. cellular determinants, receptors, heat shock/stress proteins, A-protein, oligosaccharides, metabolites
    • G01N33/57488—Immunoassay; Biospecific binding assay; Materials therefor for cancer involving compounds serving as markers for tumor, cancer, neoplasia, e.g. cellular determinants, receptors, heat shock/stress proteins, A-protein, oligosaccharides, metabolites involving compounds identifable in body fluids
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C12—BIOCHEMISTRY; BEER; SPIRITS; WINE; VINEGAR; MICROBIOLOGY; ENZYMOLOGY; MUTATION OR GENETIC ENGINEERING
    • C12Q—MEASURING OR TESTING PROCESSES INVOLVING ENZYMES, NUCLEIC ACIDS OR MICROORGANISMS; COMPOSITIONS OR TEST PAPERS THEREFOR; PROCESSES OF PREPARING SUCH COMPOSITIONS; CONDITION-RESPONSIVE CONTROL IN MICROBIOLOGICAL OR ENZYMOLOGICAL PROCESSES
    • C12Q2600/00—Oligonucleotides characterized by their use
    • C12Q2600/106—Pharmacogenomics, i.e. genetic variability in individual responses to drugs and drug metabolism
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C12—BIOCHEMISTRY; BEER; SPIRITS; WINE; VINEGAR; MICROBIOLOGY; ENZYMOLOGY; MUTATION OR GENETIC ENGINEERING
    • C12Q—MEASURING OR TESTING PROCESSES INVOLVING ENZYMES, NUCLEIC ACIDS OR MICROORGANISMS; COMPOSITIONS OR TEST PAPERS THEREFOR; PROCESSES OF PREPARING SUCH COMPOSITIONS; CONDITION-RESPONSIVE CONTROL IN MICROBIOLOGICAL OR ENZYMOLOGICAL PROCESSES
    • C12Q2600/00—Oligonucleotides characterized by their use
    • C12Q2600/112—Disease subtyping, staging or classification
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C12—BIOCHEMISTRY; BEER; SPIRITS; WINE; VINEGAR; MICROBIOLOGY; ENZYMOLOGY; MUTATION OR GENETIC ENGINEERING
    • C12Q—MEASURING OR TESTING PROCESSES INVOLVING ENZYMES, NUCLEIC ACIDS OR MICROORGANISMS; COMPOSITIONS OR TEST PAPERS THEREFOR; PROCESSES OF PREPARING SUCH COMPOSITIONS; CONDITION-RESPONSIVE CONTROL IN MICROBIOLOGICAL OR ENZYMOLOGICAL PROCESSES
    • C12Q2600/00—Oligonucleotides characterized by their use
    • C12Q2600/136—Screening for pharmacological compounds
    • G—PHYSICS
    • G01—MEASURING; TESTING
    • G01N—INVESTIGATING OR ANALYSING MATERIALS BY DETERMINING THEIR CHEMICAL OR PHYSICAL PROPERTIES
    • G01N2800/00—Detection or diagnosis of diseases
    • G01N2800/50—Determining the risk of developing a disease
    • G—PHYSICS
    • G01—MEASURING; TESTING
    • G01N—INVESTIGATING OR ANALYSING MATERIALS BY DETERMINING THEIR CHEMICAL OR PHYSICAL PROPERTIES
    • G01N2800/00—Detection or diagnosis of diseases
    • G01N2800/52—Predicting or monitoring the response to treatment, e.g. for selection of therapy based on assay results in personalised medicine; Prognosis
    • G—PHYSICS
    • G01—MEASURING; TESTING
    • G01N—INVESTIGATING OR ANALYSING MATERIALS BY DETERMINING THEIR CHEMICAL OR PHYSICAL PROPERTIES
    • G01N2800/00—Detection or diagnosis of diseases
    • G01N2800/56—Staging of a disease; Further complications associated with the disease

Definitions

  • the field ofthe invention is cervical cancer, including diagnosis, characterization, management, and therapy of cervical cancer.
  • the abnormal morphologic changes of Pap tests described by The Bethesda System include ASCUS (atypical squamous cells of undetermined significance), AGUS (atypical glandular cells of undetermined significance), LSIL (low- grade squamous intraepithelial lesion), HSIL (high-grade squamous intraepithelial lesion), and squamous and adenocarcinoma (National Cancer Institute Workshop: The 1988 Bethesda System for reporting cervical/vaginal cytologic diagnosis. JAMA, 262(7): 931-934).
  • the success of Pap tests is attributed mostly to the diagnosis and treatment of precancerous lesions.
  • AGUS represents a much greater risk than ASCUS or LSIL because cytology is less sensitive for this condition and the disease progresses more rapidly (Anderson M.C., 1995, Baillieres Clin. Obstet. Gynecol. 9:105). It was found that 9- 54% of women with AGUS have biopsy-confirmed cervical intraepithelial neoplasias, 0- 8% have biopsy-confirmed adenocarcinoma in situ (AIS), and less than 1-9% have invasive carcinoma (Wright, T.C., et al, 2002, JAMA, 287(16): 2120-2129). Due to the greater risk, all patients with AGUS are referred to colposcopy (Wright, T.C., et al, 2002).
  • HPV human papillomavirus
  • the invention relates to cancer markers (hereinafter “markers” or
  • the invention provides nucleic acids and proteins that are encoded by or correspond to the markers (hereinafter “marker nucleic acids” and “marker proteins,” respectively).
  • Table 1 provides the sequence identifiers ofthe sequences of such marker nucleic acids and proteins listed in the accompanying Sequence Listing (SEQ ID NOs: 1-44).
  • Table 2 lists newly-identified nucleotide and amino acid sequences.
  • Table 3 lists newly-identified nucleotide sequences.
  • Tables 1-3 provide the sequence identifier numbers ofthe sequences of such marker nucleic acids and proteins listed in the accompanying Sequence Listing, and the gene names ofthe markers.
  • the invention further provides antibodies, antibody derivatives and antibody fragments which bind specifically with such proteins and/or fragments ofthe proteins.
  • the invention also relates to various methods, reagents and kits for diagnosing, staging, prognosing, monitoring and treating cervical cancer.
  • "Cervical cancer” as used herein includes carcinomas, (e.g., carcinoma in situ, invasive carcinoma, metastatic carcinoma) and pre-malignant conditions, (e.g., dysplasia, including CIN or SIL).
  • the invention provides a diagnostic method of assessing whether a patient has cervical cancer or has higher than normal risk for developing cervical cancer, comprising the steps of comparing the level of expression of a marker of the invention in a patient sample and the normal level of expression ofthe marker in a control, e.g., a sample from a patient without cervical cancer.
  • the markers are selected such that the positive predictive value ofthe methods ofthe invention is at least about 10%, preferably about 25%o, more preferably about 50% and most preferably about 90%.
  • stage 0 cervical cancer patients stage I cervical cancer patients, stage II cervical cancer patients, stage III cervical cancer patients, stage IV cervical cancer patients, grade I cervical cancer patients, grade II cervical cancer patients
  • the present invention provides a diagnostic method of assessing whether a patient is afflicted with cervical cancer (e.g., new detection ("screening"), detection of recurrence, reflex testing), the method comprises comparing: a) the level of expression of a marker ofthe invention in a patient sample, and b) the normal level of expression ofthe marker in a control non-cervical cancer sample.
  • new detection e.g., new detection ("screening"), detection of recurrence, reflex testing
  • a significantly higher level of expression ofthe marker in the patient sample as compared to the normal level is an indication that the patient is afflicted with cervical cancer.
  • the invention provides a diagnostic method of assessing whether a patient is afflicted with cervical cancer (e.g., new detection ("screening"), detection of recurrence, reflex testing), the method comprises comparing: a) the level of expression of a marker set ofthe invention in a patient sample, and b) the normal level of expression ofthe marker set in a control non- cervical cancer sample. A significantly higher level of expression ofthe marker set in the patient sample as compared to the normal level is an indication that the patient is afflicted with cervical cancer.
  • new detection screening
  • the invention also provides diagnostic methods for assessing the efficacy of a therapy for inhibiting cervical cancer in a patient. Such methods comprise comparing: a) expression of a marker ofthe invention in a first sample obtained from the patient prior to providing at least a portion ofthe therapy to the patient, and b) expression ofthe marker in a second sample obtained from the patient following provision ofthe portion ofthe therapy. A significantly lower level of expression ofthe marker in the second sample relative to that in the first sample is an indication that the therapy is efficacious for inhibiting cervical cancer in the patient.
  • the "therapy” may be any therapy for treating cervical cancer including, but not limited to, chemotherapy, radiation therapy, surgical removal of tumor tissue, gene therapy and biologic therapy such as the administering of antibodies and chemokines.
  • the methods ofthe invention may be used to evaluate a patient before, during and after therapy, for example, to evaluate the reduction in tumor burden.
  • the diagnostic methods are directed to therapy using a chemical or biologic agent. These methods comprise comparing: a) expression of a marker ofthe invention in a first sample obtained from the patient and maintained in the presence ofthe chemical or biologic agent, and b) expression ofthe marker in a second sample obtained from the patient and maintained in the absence ofthe agent.
  • a significantly lower level of expression ofthe marker in the second sample relative to that in the first sample is an indication that the agent is efficacious for inhibiting cervical cancer, in the patient.
  • the first and second samples can be portions of a single sample obtained from the patient or portions of pooled samples obtained from the patient.
  • the invention additionally provides a monitoring method for assessing the progression of cervical cancer in a patient, the method comprising: a) detecting in a patient sample at a first time point, the expression of a marker ofthe invention; b) repeating step a) at a subsequent time point in time; and c) comparing the level of expression detected in steps a) and b), and therefrom monitoring the progression of cervical cancer in the patient.
  • a significantly higher level of expression ofthe marker in the sample at the subsequent time point from that of the sample at the first time point is an indication that the cervical cancer has progressed, whereas a significantly lower level of expression is an indication that the cervical cancer has regressed.
  • the invention further provides a diagnostic method for determining whether cervical cancer has metastasized or is likely to metastasize in the future, the method comprising comparing: a) the level of expression of a marker ofthe invention in a patient sample, and b) the normal level (or non-metastatic level) of expression ofthe marker in a control sample.
  • a significantly higher level of expression in the patient sample as compared to the normal level (or non-metastatic level) is an indication that the cervical cancer has metastasized or is likely to metastasize in the future.
  • the invention moreover provides a test method for selecting a composition for inhibiting cervical cancer in a patient.
  • This method comprises the steps of: a) obtaining a sample comprising cancer cells from the patient; b) separately maintaining aliquots ofthe sample in the presence of a plurality of test compositions; c) comparing expression of a marker ofthe invention in each ofthe aliquots; and d) selecting one ofthe test compositions which significantly reduces the level of expression ofthe marker in the aliquot containing that test composition, relative to the levels of expression ofthe marker in the presence ofthe other test compositions.
  • the invention additionally provides a test method of assessing the cervical carcinogenic potential of a compound.
  • This method comprises the steps of: a) maintaining separate aliquots of cervical cells in the presence and absence ofthe compound; and b) comparing expression of a marker of the invention in each of the aliquots.
  • the invention further provides a method of inhibiting cervical cancer in a patient.
  • This method comprises the steps of: a) obtaining a sample comprising cancer cells from the patient; b) separately maintaining aliquots ofthe sample in the presence of a plurality of compositions; c) comparing expression of a marker ofthe invention in each ofthe aliquots; and d) administering to the patient at least one ofthe compositions which significantly lowers the level of expression ofthe marker in the aliquot containing that composition, relative to the levels of expression ofthe marker in the presence of the other compositions.
  • the samples or patient samples comprise cells obtained from the patient.
  • the cells may be found in a cervical smear collected, for example, by a cervical brush.
  • the sample is a body fluid.
  • Such fluids include, for example, blood fluids, lymph, ascitic fluids, gynecological fluids, urine, and fluids collected by vaginal rinsing.
  • the patient sample is in vivo.
  • the level of expression of a marker ofthe invention in a sample can be assessed, for example, by detecting the presence in the sample of: • the corresponding marker protein (e.g. , a protein having one of the sequences set forth as "SEQ ID NO (AAs)" in Table 1, or a fragment ofthe protein (e.g. by using a reagent, such as an antibody, an antibody derivative, an antibody fragment or single-chain antibody, which binds specifically with the protein or protein fragment)
  • a reagent such as an antibody, an antibody derivative, an antibody fragment or single-chain antibody, which binds specifically with the protein or protein fragment
  • the corresponding marker nucleic acid e.g. a nucleotide transcript having one ofthe nucleic acid sequences set forth as "SEQ ID NO (nts)" in Table 1, or a complement thereof
  • a fragment of the nucleic acid e.g. by contacting transcribed polynucleotides obtained from the sample with a substrate having affixed thereto one or more nucleic acids having the entire or a segment ofthe nucleic acid sequence of any of the SEQ ID NO (nts), or a complement thereof
  • a metabolite which is produced directly (i. e. , catalyzed) or indirectly by the corresponding marker protein.
  • any ofthe aforementioned methods may be performed using a plurality (e.g. 2, 3, 5, or 10 or more) of cervical cancer markers, including cervical cancer markers known in the art.
  • the level of expression in the sample of each of a plurality of markers, at least one of which is a marker ofthe invention is compared with the normal level of expression of each ofthe plurality of markers in samples of the same type obtained from control humans not afflicted with cervical cancer.
  • a significantly altered (i.e., increased or decreased as specified in the above-described methods using a single marker) level of expression in the sample of one or more markers of the invention, or some combination thereof, relative to that marker's corresponding normal or control level, is an indication that the patient is afflicted with cervical cancer.
  • the marker(s) are preferably selected such that the positive predictive value ofthe method is at least about 10%.
  • the invention provides an antibody, an antibody derivative, or an antibody fragment, which binds specifically with a marker protein (e.g., a protein having one ofthe amino acid sequences set forth in the Sequence Listing) or a fragment ofthe protein.
  • a marker protein e.g., a protein having one ofthe amino acid sequences set forth in the Sequence Listing
  • the invention also provides methods for making such antibody, antibody derivative, and antibody fragment.
  • Such methods may comprise immunizing a mammal with a protein or peptide comprising the entirety, or a segment of 10 or more amino acids, of a marker protein (e.g., a protein having one ofthe amino acid sequences set forth in the Sequence Listing), wherein the protein or peptide may be obtained from a cell or by chemical synthesis.
  • a marker protein e.g., a protein having one ofthe amino acid sequences set forth in the Sequence Listing
  • the methods ofthe invention also encompass producing monoclonal and single-chain antibodies, which would further comprise isolating splenocytes from the immunized mammal, fusing the isolated splenocytes with an immortalized cell line to form hybridomas, and screening individual hybridomas for those that produce an antibody that binds specifically with a marker protein or a fragment ofthe protein.
  • the invention in another aspect, relates to various diagnostic and test kits.
  • the invention provides a kit for assessing whether a patient is afflicted with cervical cancer.
  • the kit comprises a reagent for assessing expression of a marker ofthe invention.
  • the invention provides a kit for assessing the suitability of a chemical or biologic agent for inhibiting cervical cancer in a patient.
  • Such a kit comprises a reagent for assessing expression of a marker ofthe invention, and may also comprise one or more of such agents.
  • the invention provides kits for assessing the presence of cervical cancer cells or treating cervical cancers.
  • Such kits comprise an antibody, an antibody derivative, or an antibody fragment, which binds specifically with a marker protein, or a fragment ofthe protein.
  • Such kits may also comprise a plurality of antibodies, antibody derivatives, or antibody fragments wherein the plurality of such antibody agents binds specifically with a marker protein, or a fragment ofthe protein.
  • the invention also provides a kit for assessing the presence of cervical cancer cells, wherein the kit comprises a nucleic acid probe that binds specifically with a marker nucleic acid or a fragment ofthe nucleic acid.
  • the kit may also comprise a plurality of probes, wherein each ofthe probes binds specifically with a marker nucleic acid, or a fragment ofthe nucleic acid.
  • the invention relates to methods for treating a patient afflicted with cervical cancer or at risk of developing cervical cancer. Such methods may comprise reducing the expression and/or interfering with the biological function of a marker ofthe invention.
  • the method comprises providing to the patient an antisense oligonucleotide or polynucleotide complementary to a marker nucleic acid, or a segment thereof.
  • an antisense polynucleotide may be provided to the patient through the delivery of a vector that expresses an anti-sense polynucleotide of a marker nucleic acid or a fragment thereof.
  • the method comprises providing to the patient an antibody, an antibody derivative, or antibody fragment, which binds specifically with a marker protein or a fragment ofthe protein.
  • the antibody, antibody derivative or antibody fragment binds specifically with a protein having one ofthe amino acid sequences set forth in the Sequence Listing, or a fragment ofthe protein.
  • the methods and kits ofthe present invention may also include known cancer markers including known cervical cancer markers. It will further be appreciated that the methods and kits may be used to identify cancers other than cervical cancer.
  • Figure 1 depicts a cluster diagram of cervical tissue samples.
  • Dendrogram was created from hierarchical clustering ofthe transcriptional profiles of 34 normal, LSIL, HSIL and cancerous cervical tissue samples. Each sample was labeled by its tissue type and an Id number.
  • the abbreviations in Figure 1 are defined as follows: N ect0 : normal ectocervix; N end0 : normal endocervix; LSIL: low-grade squamous intraepithelial lesion; HSIL: high-grade squamous intraepithelial lesion; T scc : squamous cell carcinoma; T aca : adenocarcinoma.
  • the dashed line divides the 34 samples into two major groups: control group and diseased group. Filled circles indicate inco ⁇ ectly clustered samples.
  • Figure 2 depicts transcriptional profiles (TP) of MCM6 and Claudin 1 in normal, dysplastic and cancerous cervical tissues by cDNA microa ⁇ ay hybridization. Each data point represents the average of duplicate microarray hybridizations. The TP intensity was normalized by the median intensity of all spots on the array.
  • the abbreviations in Figure 2 are defined as follows: Endo: normal endocervical tissue; Ecto no ⁇ nal ectocervical tissue; LSIL: low-grade squamous intraepithelial lesion; HSIL high-grade squamous intraepithelial lesion; SCC: squamous cell carcinoma; AC A adenocarcinoma.
  • the invention relates to newly discovered cancer markers set forth in Table 1, associated with the cancerous state of cervical cells. It has been discovered that the higher than normal level of expression of any of these markers or combination of these markers co ⁇ elates with the presence of cervical cancer including pre-malignant conditions such as dysplasia, in a patient. Methods are provided for detecting the
  • Table 1 lists the markers ofthe invention, which are over-expressed in cervical cancer cells compared to normal (i.e., non-cancerous) cervical cells and comprises markers listed in Tables 2-13.
  • Table 1 provides the sequence listing identifiers ofthe cDNA sequence of a nucleotide transcript and the amino acid sequence of a protein encoded by or co ⁇ esponding to each marker, as well as the location ofthe protein coding sequence within the cDNA sequence.
  • Table 2 lists newly-identified nucleotide and amino acid sequences.
  • Table 3 lists newly-identified nucleotide sequences.
  • Table 4 identifies markers ofthe present invention which were selected by transcription profiling experiments and their marker scores in SCC, ACA and HSIL.
  • Table 5 identifies markers ofthe present invention that are overexpressed in cervical cancer by in situ hybridization and indicates the location of marker expression.
  • Table 6 identifies markers ofthe present invention and the frequency of their expression using a cervical tissue microa ⁇ ay.
  • Table 7 identifies gene specific primers.
  • Table 8 sets forth the scoring on a scale of 0-5 of ethidium bromide agarose gel pictures ofthe end-point PCR on the tissue panel.
  • Tables 9 -13 set forth expression ofthe target gene in each of the tissues tested.
  • a “marker” is a gene whose altered level of expression in a tissue or cell from its expression level in normal or healthy tissue or cell is associated with a disease state, such as cancer.
  • a “marker nucleic acid” is a nucleic acid (e.g., mRNA, cDNA) encoded by or co ⁇ esponding to a marker ofthe invention.
  • Such marker nucleic acids include DNA (e.g., cDNA) comprising the entire or a partial sequence of any ofthe nucleic acid sequences set forth in the Sequence Listing or the complement of such a sequence.
  • the marker nucleic acids also include RNA comprising the entire or a partial sequence of any ofthe nucleic acid sequences set forth in the Sequence Listing or the complement of such a sequence, wherein all thymidine residues are replaced with uridine residues.
  • a "marker protein” is a protein encoded by or co ⁇ esponding to a marker ofthe invention.
  • a marker protein comprises the entire or a partial sequence of any ofthe sequences set forth in the Sequence Listing.
  • the terms "protein” and “polypeptide' are used interchangeably.
  • a "marker set” is a group of more than one marker.
  • probe refers to any molecule which is capable of selectively binding to a specifically intended target molecule, for example, a nucleotide transcript or protein encoded by or co ⁇ esponding to a marker. Probes can be either synthesized by one skilled in the art, or derived from appropriate biological preparations. For purposes of detection ofthe target molecule, probes may be specifically designed to be labeled, as described herein. Examples of molecules that can be utilized as probes include, but are not limited to, RNA, DNA, proteins, antibodies, and organic molecules.
  • cervical-associated body fluid is a fluid which, when in the body of a patient, contacts or passes through cervical cells or into which cells or proteins shed from cervical cells are capable of passing.
  • the cells may be found in a cervical smear collected, for example, by a cervical brush.
  • Exemplary cervical-associated body fluids include blood fluids, lymph, ascitic fluids, gynecological fluids, cystic fluid, urine, and fluids collected by vaginal rinsing.
  • the "normal” level of expression of a marker is the level of expression of the marker in cervical cells of a human subject or patient not afflicted with cervical cancer.
  • An “over-expression” or “significantly higher level of expression” of a marker refers to an expression level in a test sample that is greater than the standard e ⁇ or ofthe assay employed to assess expression, and is preferably at least twice, and more preferably three, four, five or ten times the expression level ofthe marker in a control sample (e.g., sample from a healthy subjects not having the marker associated disease) and preferably, the average expression level ofthe marker in several control samples.
  • a "significantly lower level of expression" of a marker refers to an expression level in a test sample that is at least twice, and more preferably three, four, five or ten times lower than the expression level ofthe marker in a control sample (e.g., sample from a healthy subject not having the marker associated disease) and preferably, the average expression level ofthe marker in several control samples.
  • promoter/regulatory sequence means a nucleic acid sequence which is required for expression of a gene product operably linked to the promoter/regulatory sequence.
  • this sequence may be the core promoter sequence and in other instances, this sequence may also include an enhancer sequence and other regulatory elements which are required for expression ofthe gene product.
  • the promoter/regulatory sequence may, for example, be one which expresses the gene product in a tissue-specific manner.
  • a “constitutive" promoter is a nucleotide sequence which, when operably linked with a polynucleotide which encodes or specifies a gene product, causes the gene product to be produced in a living human cell under most or all physiological conditions ofthe cell.
  • an “inducible" promoter is a nucleotide sequence which, when operably linked with a polynucleotide which encodes or specifies a gene product, causes the gene product to be produced in a living human cell substantially only when an inducer which co ⁇ esponds to the promoter is present in the cell.
  • a "tissue-specific" promoter is a nucleotide sequence which, when operably linked with a polynucleotide which encodes or specifies a gene product, causes the gene product to be produced in a living human cell substantially only if the cell is a cell ofthe tissue type co ⁇ esponding to the promoter.
  • a "transcribed polynucleotide” or “nucleotide transcript” is a polynucleotide (e.g. an mRNA, hnRNA, a cDNA, or an analog of such RNA or cDNA) which is complementary to or homologous with all or a portion of a mature mRNA made by transcription of a marker ofthe invention and normal post-transcriptional processing (e.g. splicing), if any, ofthe RNA transcript, and reverse transcription ofthe RNA transcript.
  • “Complementary” refers to the broad concept of sequence complementarity between regions of two nucleic acid strands or between two regions of the same nucleic acid strand. It is known that an adenine residue of a first nucleic acid region is capable of forming specific hydrogen bonds ("base pairing") with a residue of a second nucleic acid region which is antiparallel to the first region if the residue is thymine or uracil. Similarly, it is known that a cytosine residue of a first nucleic acid strand is capable of base pairing with a residue of a second nucleic acid strand which is antiparallel to the first strand if the residue is guanine.
  • a first region of a nucleic acid is complementary to a second region ofthe same or a different nucleic acid if, when the two regions are a ⁇ anged in an antiparallel fashion, at least one nucleotide residue ofthe first region is capable of base pairing with a residue ofthe second region.
  • the first region comprises a first portion and the second region comprises a second portion, whereby, when the first and second portions are a ⁇ anged in an antiparallel fashion, at least about 50%, and preferably at least about 75%, at least about 90%, or at least about 95% ofthe nucleotide residues ofthe first portion are capable of base pairing with nucleotide residues in the second portion. More preferably, all nucleotide residues ofthe first portion are capable of base pairing with nucleotide residues in the second portion.
  • “Homologous” as used herein refers to nucleotide sequence similarity between two regions ofthe same nucleic acid strand or between regions of two different nucleic acid strands. When a nucleotide residue position in both regions is occupied by the same nucleotide residue, then the regions are homologous at that position. A first region is homologous to a second region if at least one nucleotide residue position of each region is occupied by the same residue. Homology between two regions is expressed in terms ofthe proportion of nucleotide residue positions ofthe two regions that are occupied by the same nucleotide residue.
  • a region having the nucleotide sequence 5'-ATTGCC-3' and a region having the nucleotide sequence 5'- TATGGC-3 1 share 50% homology.
  • the first region comprises a first portion and the second region comprises a second portion, whereby, at least about 50%, and preferably at least about 75%, at least about 90%, or at least about 95% ofthe nucleotide residue positions of each ofthe portions are occupied by the same nucleotide residue. More preferably, all nucleotide residue positions of each ofthe portions are occupied by the same nucleotide residue.
  • a molecule is "fixed” or “affixed” to a substrate if it is covalently or non- covalently associated with the substrate such the substrate can be rinsed with a fluid (e.g. standard saline citrate, pH 7.4) without a substantial fraction ofthe molecule dissociating from the substrate.
  • a fluid e.g. standard saline citrate, pH 7.4
  • RNA or DNA molecule having a nucleotide sequence that occurs in an organism found in nature RNA or DNA molecule having a nucleotide sequence that occurs in an organism found in nature.
  • a cancer is "inhibited” if at least one symptom ofthe cancer is alleviated, terminated, slowed, or prevented.
  • cervical cancer is also “inhibited” if recu ⁇ ence or metastasis ofthe cancer is reduced, slowed, delayed, or prevented.
  • kits are any manufacture (e.g. a package or container) comprising at least one reagent, e.g. a probe, for specifically detecting the expression of a marker ofthe invention.
  • the kit may be promoted, distributed, or sold as a unit for performing the methods ofthe present invention.
  • Proteins ofthe invention encompass marker proteins and their fragments; variant marker proteins and their fragments; peptides and polypeptides comprising an at least 15 amino acid segment of a marker or variant marker protein; and fusion proteins comprising a marker or variant marker protein, or an at least 15 amino acid segment of a marker or variant marker protein.
  • antibodies broadly encompass naturally-occurring forms of antibodies (e.g., IgG, IgA, IgM, IgE) and recombinant antibodies such as single-chain antibodies, chimeric and humanized antibodies and multi-specific antibodies, as well as fragments and derivatives of all ofthe foregoing, which fragments and derivatives have at least an antigenic binding site.
  • Antibody derivatives may comprise a protein or chemical moiety conjugated to an antibody.
  • the present invention is based, in part, on newly identified markers which are over-expressed in cervical cancer cells as compared to their expression in normal (i.e. non-cancerous) cervical cells.
  • the enhanced expression of one or more of these markers in cervical cells is herein co ⁇ elated with the cancerous state ofthe tissue.
  • the invention provides compositions, kits, and methods for assessing the cancerous state of cervical cells (e.g. cells obtained from a human, cultured human cells, archived or preserved human cells and in vivo cells) as well as treating patients afflicted with cervical cancer.
  • compositions, kits, and methods ofthe invention have the following uses, among others:
  • the invention thus includes a method of assessing whether a patient is afflicted with cervical cancer which includes assessing whether the patient has pre- metastasized cervical cancer.
  • This method comprises comparing the level of expression of a marker ofthe invention (listed in Table 1) in a patient sample and the normal level of expression ofthe marker in a control, e.g., a non-cervical cancer sample.
  • a significantly higher level of expression ofthe marker in the patient sample as compared to the normal level is an indication that the patient is afflicted with cervical cancer.
  • Gene delivery vehicles, host cells and compositions (all described herein) containing nucleic acids comprising the entirety, or a segment of 15 or more nucleotides, of any ofthe nucleic acid sequences set forth in the Sequence Listing, or the complement of such sequences, and polypeptides comprising the entirety, or a segment of 10 or more amino acids, of any ofthe amino acid sequences set forth in the Sequence Listing, are also provided by this invention.
  • cervical cancer in patients is associated with an increased level of expression of one or more markers ofthe invention. While, as discussed above, some of these changes in expression level result from occu ⁇ ence ofthe cervical cancer, others of these changes induce, maintain, and promote the cancerous state of cervical cancer cells. Thus, cervical cancer characterized by an increase in the level of expression of one or more markers ofthe invention can be inhibited by reducing and/or interfering with the expression ofthe markers and/or function ofthe proteins encoded by those markers.
  • an antisense oligonucleotide can be provided to the cervical cancer cells in order to inhibit transcription, translation, or both, ofthe marker(s).
  • a polynucleotide encoding an antibody, an antibody derivative, or an antibody fragment which specifically binds a marker protein, and operably linked with an appropriate promoter/regulator region can be provided to the cell in order to generate intracellular antibodies which will inhibit the function or activity ofthe protein.
  • the expression and/or function of a marker may also be inhibited by treating the cervical cancer cell with an antibody, antibody derivative or antibody fragment that specifically binds a marker protein.
  • a variety of molecules can be screened in order to identify molecules which inhibit expression of a marker or inhibit the function of a marker protein.
  • the compound so identified can be provided to the patient in order to inhibit cervical cancer cells ofthe patient.
  • Any marker or combination of markers ofthe invention, as well as any known markers in combination with the markers ofthe invention, may be used in the compositions, kits, and methods ofthe present invention. In general, it is preferable to use markers for which the difference between the level of expression ofthe marker in cervical cancer cells and the level of expression ofthe same marker in normal cervical cells is as great as possible.
  • the difference can be as small as the limit of detection ofthe method for assessing expression ofthe marker, it is prefe ⁇ ed that the difference be at least greater than the standard e ⁇ or ofthe assessment method, and preferably a difference of at least 2-, 3-, 4-, 5-, 6-, 7-, 8-, 9-, 10-, 15-, 20-, 25-, 100-, 500-, 1000-fold or greater than the level of expression of the same marker in normal cervical tissue.
  • marker proteins are secreted from cervical cells (i.e. one or both of normal and cancerous cells) to the extracellular space su ⁇ ounding the cells. These markers are preferably used in certain embodiments ofthe compositions, kits, and methods ofthe invention, owing to the fact that the such marker proteins can be detected in a cervical-associated body fluid sample, which may be more easily collected from a human patient than a tissue biopsy sample.
  • prefe ⁇ ed in vivo techniques for detection of a marker protein include introducing into a subject a labeled antibody directed against the protein.
  • the antibody can be labeled with a radioactive marker whose presence and location in a subject can be detected by standard imaging techniques.
  • the marker protein is expressed in, for example, a mammalian cell, preferably a human cervical cell line, extracellular fluid is collected, and the presence or absence ofthe protein in the extracellular fluid is assessed (e.g. using a labeled antibody which binds specifically with the protein).
  • patient samples containing cervical cells may be used in the methods ofthe present invention.
  • the level of expression ofthe marker can be assessed by assessing the amount (e.g. absolute amount or concentration) ofthe marker in a cervical cell sample, e.g., cervical smear obtained from a patient.
  • the cell sample can, of course, be subjected to a variety of well-known post-collection preparative and storage techniques (e.g., nucleic acid and/or protein extraction, fixation, storage, freezing, ultrafiltration, concentration, evaporation, centrifugation, etc.) prior to assessing the amount ofthe marker in the sample.
  • cervical smears may also be subjected to post-collection preparative and storage techniques, e.g., fixation.
  • compositions, kits, and methods ofthe invention can be used to detect expression of marker proteins having at least one portion which is displayed on the surface of cells which express it. It is a simple matter for the skilled artisan to determine whether a marker protein, or a portion thereof, is exposed on the cell surface. For example, immunological methods may be used to detect such proteins on whole cells, or well known computer-based sequence analysis methods may be used to predict the presence of at least one extracellular domain (i.e. including both secreted proteins and proteins having at least one cell-surface domain). Expression of a marker protein having at least one portion which is displayed on the surface of a cell which expresses it may be detected without necessarily lysing the cell (e.g.
  • a marker ofthe invention may be assessed by any of a wide variety of well known methods for detecting expression of a transcribed nucleic acid or protein. Non-limiting examples of such methods include immunological methods for detection of secreted, cell-surface, cytoplasmic, or nuclear proteins, protein purification methods, protein function or activity assays, nucleic acid hybridization methods, nucleic acid reverse transcription methods, and nucleic acid amplification methods.
  • expression of a marker is assessed using an antibody (e.g. a radio-labeled, chromophore-labeled, fluorophore-labeled, or enzyme- labeled antibody), an antibody derivative (e.g. an antibody conjugated with a substrate or with the protein or ligand of a protein-ligand pair ⁇ e.g. biotin-streptavidin ⁇ ), or an antibody fragment (e.g. a single-chain antibody, an isolated antibody hypervariable domain, etc.) which binds specifically with a marker protein or fragment thereof, including a marker protein which has undergone all or a portion of its normal post- translational modification.
  • an antibody e.g. a radio-labeled, chromophore-labeled, fluorophore-labeled, or enzyme- labeled antibody
  • an antibody derivative e.g. an antibody conjugated with a substrate or with the protein or ligand of a protein-ligand pair ⁇ e.g. biot
  • expression of a marker is assessed by preparing mRNA/cDNA (i.e. a transcribed polynucleotide) from cells in a patient sample, and by hybridizing the mRNA/cDNA with a reference polynucleotide which is a complement of a marker nucleic acid, or a fragment thereof.
  • cDNA can, optionally, be amplified using any of a variety of polymerase chain reaction methods prior to hybridization with the reference polynucleotide; preferably, it is not amplified.
  • Expression of one or more markers can likewise be detected using quantitative PCR to assess the level of expression ofthe marker(s).
  • any ofthe many known methods of detecting mutations or variants (e.g. single nucleotide polymorphisms, deletions, etc.) of a marker ofthe invention may be used to detect occu ⁇ ence of a marker in a patient.
  • a mixture of transcribed polynucleotides obtained from the sample is contacted with a substrate having fixed thereto a polynucleotide complementary to or homologous with at least a portion (e.g. at least 7, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, 40, 50, 100, 500, or more nucleotide residues) of a marker nucleic acid. If polynucleotides complementary to or homologous with are differentially detectable on the substrate (e.g. detectable using different chromophores or fluorophores, or fixed to different selected positions), then the levels of expression of a plurality of markers can be assessed simultaneously using a single substrate (e.g.
  • compositions, kits, and methods ofthe invention rely on detection of a difference in expression levels of one or more markers ofthe invention, it is preferable that the level of expression ofthe marker is significantly greater than the minimum detection limit ofthe method used to assess expression in at least one of normal cervical cells and cancerous cervical cells.
  • the markers ofthe invention are over-expressed in cancers of various types, including specific cervical cancers, as well as other cancers such as breast cancer, ovarian cancer, etc.
  • some ofthe markers ofthe invention are over- expressed in most (i.e. 50% or more) or substantially all (i.e. 80% or more) of cervical cancer.
  • certain ofthe markers ofthe invention are associated with cervical cancer of various stages (i.e.
  • stage 0, 1, II, III, and IN cervical cancers as well as subclassifications LAI, IA2, IB, IB1, IB2, IIA, UB, IIIA, IIIB, IN A, and INB, using the FIGO Stage Grouping system for primary carcinoma ofthe cervix (see Gynecologic Oncology, 1991 , 41 : 199 and Cancer, 1992, 69:482)), and pre- malignant conditions (e.g., dysplasia including CI ⁇ or SIL), of various histologic subtypes (e.g.
  • squamous cell carcinomas and squamous cell carcinoma variants such as verrucous carcinoma, lymphoepithelioma-like carcinoma, papillary squamous neoplasm and spindle cell squamous cell carcinoma (see Cervical Cancer and Preinvasive Neoplasia, 1996, pp.
  • compositions, kits, and methods ofthe invention are thus useful for characterizing one or more ofthe stage, grade, histological type, and benign/malignant nature of cervical cancer in patients.
  • the marker or panel of markers ofthe invention is selected such that a positive result is obtained in at least about 20%, and preferably at least about 40%, 60%, or 80%, and more preferably in substantially all patients afflicted with a cervical cancer ofthe co ⁇ esponding stage, grade, histological type, or benign/malignant nature.
  • the marker or panel of markers ofthe invention is selected such that a positive predictive value (PPN) of greater than about 10%) is obtained for the general population (more preferably coupled with an assay specificity greater than 80%).
  • the level of expression of each marker in a patient sample can be compared with the normal level of expression of each ofthe plurality of markers in non-cancerous samples ofthe same type, either in a single reaction mixture (i.e. using reagents, such as different fluorescent probes, for each marker) or in individual reaction mixtures co ⁇ esponding to one or more ofthe markers.
  • a significantly increased level of expression of more than one ofthe plurality of markers in the sample, relative to the co ⁇ esponding normal levels is an indication that the patient is afflicted with cervical cancer.
  • it is prefe ⁇ ed that 2, 3, 4, 5, 8, 10, 12, 15, 20, 30, or 50 or more individual markers be used, wherein fewer markers are prefe ⁇ ed.
  • the marker ofthe invention used therein be a marker which has a restricted tissue distribution, e.g., normally not expressed in a non- cervical tissue.
  • markers are known to be associated with cervical cancer (e.g. bcl-2, 15A8 antigen, cdc6, Mcm5, and EGFR). These markers are not, of course, included among the markers ofthe invention, although they may be used together with one or more markers ofthe invention in a panel of markers, for example. It is well known that certain types of genes, such as oncogenes, tumor suppressor genes, growth factor-like genes, protease-like genes, and protein kinase-like genes are often involved with development of cancers of various types.
  • compositions, kits, and methods ofthe invention will be of particular utility to patients having an enhanced risk of developing cervical cancer and their medical advisors.
  • Patients recognized as having an enhanced risk of developing cervical cancer include, for example, patients having a familial history of cervical cancer, patients identified as having a mutant oncogene (i.e. at least one allele), and patients of advancing age (i.e. women older than about 50 or 60 years).
  • the level of expression of a marker in normal (i.e. non-cancerous) human cervical tissue can be assessed in a variety of ways.
  • this normal level of expression is assessed by assessing the level of expression ofthe marker in a portion of cervical cells which appears to be non-cancerous and by comparing this normal level of expression with the level of expression in a portion ofthe cervical cells which is suspected of being cancerous.
  • population-average values for normal expression ofthe markers ofthe invention may be used.
  • the 'normal' level of expression of a marker may be determined by assessing expression ofthe marker in a patient sample obtained from a non-cancer-afflicted patient, from a patient sample obtained from a patient before the suspected onset of cervical cancer in the patient, from archived patient samples, and the like.
  • the invention includes compositions, kits, and methods for assessing the presence of cervical cancer cells in a sample (e.g. an archived tissue sample or a sample obtained from a patient). These compositions, kits, and methods are substantially the same as those described above, except that, where necessary, the compositions, kits, and methods are adapted for use with samples other than patient samples.
  • the sample to be used is a parafinized, archived human tissue sample
  • Such methods are well known in the art and within the skill ofthe ordinary artisan.
  • the invention includes a kit for assessing the presence of cervical cancer cells (e.g. in a sample such as a patient sample).
  • the kit comprises a plurality of reagents, each of which is capable of binding specifically with a marker nucleic acid or protein.
  • Suitable reagents for binding with a marker protein include antibodies, antibody derivatives, antibody fragments, and the like.
  • Suitable reagents for binding with a marker nucleic acid include complementary nucleic acids.
  • the nucleic acid reagents may include oligonucleotides (labeled or non-labeled) fixed to a substrate, labeled oligonucleotides not bound with a substrate, pairs of PCR primers, molecular beacon probes, and the like.
  • the kit ofthe invention may optionally comprise additional components useful for performing the methods ofthe invention.
  • the kit may comprise fluids (e.g. SSC buffer) suitable for annealing complementary nucleic acids or for binding an antibody with a protein with which it specifically binds, one or more sample compartments, an instructional material which describes performance of a method ofthe invention, a sample of normal cervical cells, a sample of cervical cancer cells, and the like.
  • the invention also includes a method of making an isolated hybridoma which produces an antibody useful for assessing whether patient is afflicted with a cervical cancer.
  • a protein or peptide comprising the entirety or a segment of a marker protein is synthesized or isolated (e.g. by purification from a cell in which it is expressed or by transcription and translation of a nucleic acid encoding the protein or peptide in vivo or in vitro using known methods).
  • a vertebrate preferably a mammal such as a mouse, rat, rabbit, or sheep, is immunized using the protein or peptide.
  • the vertebrate may optionally (and preferably) be immunized at least one additional time with the protein or peptide, so that the vertebrate exhibits a robust immune response to the protein or peptide.
  • Splenocytes are isolated from the immunized vertebrate and fused with an immortalized cell line to form hybridomas, using any of a variety of methods well known in the art. Hybridomas formed in this manner are then screened using standard methods to identify one or more hybridomas which produce an antibody which specifically binds with the marker protein or a fragment thereof.
  • the invention also includes hybridomas made by this method and antibodies made using such hybridomas.
  • the invention also includes a method of assessing the efficacy of a test compound for inhibiting cervical cancer cells.
  • differences in the level of expression ofthe markers ofthe invention co ⁇ elate with the cancerous state of cervical cells.
  • changes in the levels of expression of certain ofthe markers ofthe invention likely result from the cancerous state of cervical cells
  • changes in the levels of expression of other ofthe markers ofthe invention induce, maintain, and promote the cancerous state of those cells.
  • compounds which inhibit a cervical cancer in a patient will cause the level of expression of one or more ofthe markers ofthe invention to change to a level nearer the normal level of expression for that marker (i.e. the level of expression for the marker in non-cancerous cervical cells).
  • This method thus comprises comparing expression of a marker in a first cervical cell sample and maintained in the presence ofthe test compound and expression ofthe marker in a second cervical cell sample and maintained in the absence ofthe test compound.
  • a significantly reduced expression of a marker ofthe invention in the presence ofthe test compound is an indication that the test compound inhibits cervical cancer.
  • the cervical cell samples may, for example, be aliquots of a single sample of normal cervical cells obtained from a patient, pooled samples of normal cervical cells obtained from a patient, cells of a normal cervical cell line, aliquots of a single sample of cervical cancer cells obtained from a patient, pooled samples of cervical cancer cells obtained from a patient, cells of a cervical cancer cell line, or the like.
  • the samples are cervical cancer cells obtained from a patient and a plurality of compounds known to be effective for inhibiting various cervical cancers are tested in order to identify the compound which is likely to best inhibit the cervical cancer in the patient.
  • This method may likewise be used to assess the efficacy of a therapy for inhibiting cervical cancer in a patient.
  • the level of expression of one or more markers of the invention in a pair of samples is assessed.
  • the therapy induces a significantly lower level of expression of a marker of the invention then the therapy is efficacious for inhibiting cervical cancer.
  • alternative therapies can be assessed in vitro in order to select a therapy most likely to be efficacious for inhibiting cervical cancer in the patient.
  • the invention includes a method for assessing the human cervical cell carcinogenic potential of a test compound. This method comprises maintaining separate aliquots of human cervical cells in the presence and absence ofthe test compound. Expression of a marker ofthe invention in each ofthe aliquots is compared. A significantly higher level of expression of a marker ofthe invention in the aliquot maintained in the presence ofthe test compound (relative to the aliquot maintained in the absence ofthe test compound) is an indication that the test compound possesses human cervical cell carcinogenic potential.
  • the relative carcinogenic potentials of various test compounds can be assessed by comparing the degree of enhancement or inhibition ofthe level of expression ofthe relevant markers, by comparing the number of markers for which the level of expression is enhanced or inhibited, or by comparing both.
  • Various aspects ofthe invention are described in further detail in the following subsections.
  • nucleic acid molecules including nucleic acids which encode a marker protein or a portion thereof.
  • isolated nucleic acids ofthe invention also include nucleic acid molecules sufficient for use as hybridization probes to identify marker nucleic acid molecules, and fragments of marker nucleic acid molecules, e.g., those suitable for use as PCR primers for the amplification or mutation of marker nucleic acid molecules.
  • nucleic acid molecule is intended to include DNA molecules (e.g., cDNA or genomic DNA) and RNA molecules (e.g., mRNA) and analogs ofthe DNA or RNA generated using nucleotide analogs.
  • the nucleic acid molecule can be single-stranded or double- stranded, but preferably is double-stranded DNA.
  • an “isolated” nucleic acid molecule is one which is separated from other nucleic acid molecules which are present in the natural source ofthe nucleic acid molecule.
  • an “isolated” nucleic acid molecule is free of sequences (preferably protein-encoding sequences) which naturally flank the nucleic acid (i.e., sequences located at the 5' and 3' ends ofthe nucleic acid) in the genomic DNA ofthe organism from which the nucleic acid is derived.
  • the isolated nucleic acid molecule can contain less than about 5 kB, 4 kB, 3 kB, 2 kB, 1 kB, 0.5 kB or 0.1 kB of nucleotide sequences which naturally flank the nucleic acid molecule in genomic DNA ofthe cell from which the nucleic acid is derived.
  • an "isolated" nucleic acid molecule such as a cDNA molecule, can be substantially free of other cellular material, or culture medium when produced by recombinant techniques, or substantially free of chemical precursors or other chemicals when chemically synthesized.
  • a nucleic acid molecule ofthe present invention can be isolated using standard molecular biology techniques and the sequence information in the database records described herein. Using all or a portion of such nucleic acid sequences, nucleic acid molecules ofthe invention can be isolated using standard hybridization and cloning techniques (e.g., as described in Sambrook et al, ed., Molecular Cloning: A Laboratory Manual, 2nd ed., Cold Spring Harbor Laboratory Press, Cold Spring Harbor, NY, 1989).
  • a nucleic acid molecule ofthe invention can be amplified using cDNA, mRNA, or genomic DNA as a template and appropriate oligonucleotide primers according to standard PCR amplification techniques.
  • the nucleic acid so amplified can be cloned into an appropriate vector and characterized by DNA sequence analysis.
  • nucleotides co ⁇ esponding to all or a portion of a nucleic acid molecule of the invention can be prepared by standard synthetic techniques, e.g., using an automated DNA synthesizer.
  • an isolated nucleic acid molecule ofthe invention comprises a nucleic acid molecule which has a nucleotide sequence complementary to the nucleotide sequence of a marker nucleic acid or to the nucleotide sequence of a nucleic acid encoding a marker protein.
  • a nucleic acid molecule which is complementary to a given nucleotide sequence is one which is sufficiently complementary to the given nucleotide sequence that it can hybridize to the given nucleotide sequence thereby forming a stable duplex.
  • a nucleic acid molecule ofthe invention can comprise only a portion of a nucleic acid sequence, wherein the full length nucleic acid sequence comprises a marker nucleic acid or which encodes a marker protein.
  • Such nucleic acids can be used, for example, as a probe or primer.
  • the probe/primer typically is used as one or more substantially purified oligonucleotides.
  • the oligonucleotide typically comprises a region of nucleotide sequence that hybridizes under stringent conditions to at least about 7, preferably about 15, more preferably about 25, 50, 75, 100, 125, 150, 175, 200, 250, 300, 350, or 400 or more consecutive nucleotides of a nucleic acid ofthe invention.
  • Probes based on the sequence of a nucleic acid molecule ofthe invention can be used to detect transcripts or genomic sequences co ⁇ esponding to one or more markers ofthe invention.
  • the probe comprises a label group attached thereto, e.g., a radioisotope, a fluorescent compound, an enzyme, or an enzyme co-factor.
  • Such probes can be used as part of a diagnostic test kit for identifying cells or tissues which mis- express the protein, such as by measuring levels of a nucleic acid molecule encoding the protein in a sample of cells from a subject, e.g., detecting mRNA levels or determining whether a gene encoding the protein has been mutated or deleted.
  • the invention further encompasses nucleic acid molecules that differ, due to degeneracy ofthe genetic code, from the nucleotide sequence of nucleic acids encoding a marker protein (e.g., a protein having one ofthe amino acid sequences set forth in the Sequence Listing), and thus encode the same protein.
  • a marker protein e.g., a protein having one ofthe amino acid sequences set forth in the Sequence Listing
  • DNA sequence polymorphisms that lead to changes in the amino acid sequence can exist within a population (e.g., the human population). Such genetic polymorphisms can exist among individuals within a population due to natural allelic variation. An allele is one of a group of genes which occur alternatively at a given genetic locus. In addition, it will be appreciated that DNA polymorphisms that affect RNA expression levels can also exist that may affect the overall expression level of that gene (e.g., by affecting regulation or degradation).
  • allelic variant refers to a nucleotide sequence which occurs at a given locus or to a polypeptide encoded by the nucleotide sequence.
  • gene and “recombinant gene” refer to nucleic acid molecules comprising an open reading frame encoding a polypeptide co ⁇ esponding to a marker ofthe invention.
  • allelic variations can typically result in 1-5% variance in the nucleotide sequence of a given gene.
  • Alternative alleles can be identified by sequencing the gene of interest in a number of different individuals. This can be readily carried out by using hybridization probes to identify the same genetic locus in a variety of individuals.
  • an isolated nucleic acid molecule ofthe invention is at least 7, 15, 20, 25, 30, 40, 60, 80, 100, 150, 200, 250, 300, 350, 400, 450, 550, 650, 700, 800, 900, 1000, 1200, 1400, 1600, 1800, 2000, 2200, 2400, 2600, 2800, 3000, 3500, 4000, 4500, or more nucleotides in length and hybridizes under stringent conditions to a marker nucleic acid or to a nucleic acid encoding a marker protein.
  • hybridizes under stringent conditions is intended to describe conditions for hybridization and washing under which nucleotide sequences at least 60% (65%, 70%, preferably 75%) identical to each other typically remain hybridized to each other.
  • stringent conditions are known to those skilled in the art and can be found in sections 6.3.1-6.3.6 of Current Protocols in Molecular Biology, John Wiley & Sons, N.Y. (1989).
  • a prefe ⁇ ed, non-limiting example of stringent hybridization conditions are hybridization in 6X sodium chloride/sodium citrate (SSC) at about 45°C, followed by one or more washes in 0.2X SSC, 0.1% SDS at 50-65°C.
  • SSC sodium chloride/sodium citrate
  • allelic variants of a nucleic acid molecule ofthe invention can exist in the population, the skilled artisan will further appreciate that sequence changes can be introduced by mutation thereby leading to changes in the amino acid sequence ofthe encoded protein, without altering the biological activity ofthe protein encoded thereby.
  • sequence changes can be introduced by mutation thereby leading to changes in the amino acid sequence ofthe encoded protein, without altering the biological activity ofthe protein encoded thereby.
  • a "non-essential” amino acid residue is a residue that can be altered from the wild-type sequence without altering the biological activity, whereas an "essential” amino acid residue is required for biological activity.
  • amino acid residues that are not conserved or only semi-conserved among homologs of various species may be non-essential for activity and thus would be likely targets for alteration.
  • amino acid residues that are conserved among the homologs of various species may be essential for activity and thus would not be likely targets for alteration.
  • nucleic acid molecules encoding a variant marker protein that contain changes in amino acid residues that are not essential for activity.
  • variant marker proteins differ in amino acid sequence from the naturally-occurring marker proteins, yet retain biological activity.
  • such a variant marker protein has an amino acid sequence that is at least about 40% identical, 50%, 60%, 70%, 80%, 90%, 95%, or 98% identical to the amino acid sequence of a marker protein.
  • An isolated nucleic acid molecule encoding a variant marker protein can be created by introducing one or more nucleotide substitutions, additions or deletions into the nucleotide sequence of marker nucleic acids, such that one or more amino acid residue substitutions, additions, or deletions are introduced into the encoded protein. Mutations can be introduced by standard techniques, such as site-directed mutagenesis and PCR-mediated mutagenesis. Preferably, conservative amino acid substitutions are made at one or more predicted non-essential amino acid residues. A "conservative amino acid substitution" is one in which the amino acid residue is replaced with an amino acid residue having a similar side chain. Families of amino acid residues having similar side chains have been defined in the art.
  • amino acids with basic side chains e.g., lysine, arginine, histidine
  • acidic side chains e.g., aspartic acid, glutamic acid
  • uncharged polar side chains e.g., glycine, asparagine, glutamine, serine, threonine, tyrosine, cysteine
  • non-polar side chains e.g., alanine, valine, leucine, isoleucine, proline, phenylalanine, methionine, tryptophan
  • beta-branched side chains e.g., threonine, valine, isoleucine
  • aromatic side chains e.g., tyrosine, phenylalanine, tryptophan, histidine
  • mutations can be introduced randomly along all or part ofthe coding sequence, such as by saturation mutagenesis, and the resultant mutants can be screened for biological activity to identify mutants that retain activity.
  • the encoded protein can be expressed recombinantly and the activity ofthe protein can be determined.
  • the present invention encompasses antisense nucleic acid molecules, i.e., molecules which are complementary to a sense nucleic acid ofthe invention, e.g., complementary to the coding strand of a double-stranded marker cDNA molecule or complementary to a marker mRNA sequence. Accordingly, an antisense nucleic acid of the invention can hydrogen bond to (i.e. anneal with) a sense nucleic acid ofthe invention.
  • the antisense nucleic acid can be complementary to an entire coding strand, or to only a portion thereof, e.g., all or part ofthe protein coding region (or open reading frame).
  • An antisense nucleic acid molecule can also be antisense to all or part of a non- coding region ofthe coding strand of a nucleotide sequence encoding a marker protein.
  • the non-coding regions (“5' and 3' untranslated regions") are the 5' and 3' sequences which flank the coding region and are not translated into amino acids.
  • An antisense oligonucleotide can be, for example, about 5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, or 50 or more nucleotides in length.
  • An antisense nucleic acid ofthe invention can be constructed using chemical synthesis and enzymatic ligation reactions using procedures known in the art.
  • an antisense nucleic acid e.g., an antisense oligonucleotide
  • an antisense nucleic acid can be chemically synthesized using naturally occurring nucleotides or variously modified nucleotides designed to increase the biological stability ofthe molecules or to increase the physical stability ofthe duplex formed between the antisense and sense nucleic acids, e.g., phosphorothioate derivatives and acridine substituted nucleotides can be used.
  • modified nucleotides which can be used to generate the antisense nucleic acid include 5-fluorouracil, 5-bromouracil, 5-chlorouracil, 5-iodouracil, hypoxanthine, xanthine, 4-acetylcytosine, 5- (carboxyhydroxylmethyl) uracil, 5-carboxymethylaminomethyl-2-thiouridine, 5- carboxymethylaminomethyluracil, dihydrouracil, beta-D-galactosylqueosine, inosine, N6-isopentenyladenine, 1-mefhylguanine, 1-methylinosine, 2,2-dimethylguanine, 2- methyladenine, 2-methylguanine, 3-methylcytosine, 5-methylcytosine, N6-adenine, 7- methylguanine, 5-methylaminomethyluracil, 5-methoxyaminomethyl-2-thiouracil, beta- D-mannosylqueosine, 5'
  • the antisense nucleic acid can be produced biologically using an expression vector into which a nucleic acid has been sub-cloned in an antisense orientation (i.e., RNA transcribed from the inserted nucleic acid will be of an antisense orientation to a target nucleic acid of interest, described further in the following subsection).
  • the antisense nucleic acid molecules ofthe invention are typically administered to a subject or generated in situ such that they hybridize with or bind to cellular mRNA and/or genomic DNA encoding a marker protein to thereby inhibit expression ofthe marker, e.g., by inhibiting transcription and/or translation.
  • the hybridization can be by conventional nucleotide complementarity to form a stable duplex, or, for example, in the case of an antisense nucleic acid molecule which binds to DNA duplexes, through specific interactions in the major groove ofthe double helix.
  • Examples of a route of administration of antisense nucleic acid molecules ofthe invention includes direct injection at a tissue site or infusion ofthe antisense nucleic acid into a cervical-associated body fluid.
  • antisense nucleic acid molecules can be modified to target selected cells and then administered systemically.
  • antisense molecules can be modified such that they specifically bind to receptors or antigens expressed on a selected cell surface, e.g., by linking the antisense nucleic acid molecules to peptides or antibodies which bind to cell surface receptors or antigens.
  • the antisense nucleic acid molecules can also be delivered to cells using the vectors described herein. To achieve sufficient intracellular concentrations ofthe antisense molecules, vector constructs in which the antisense nucleic acid molecule is placed under the control of a strong pol II or pol III promoter are prefe ⁇ ed.
  • An antisense nucleic acid molecule ofthe invention can be an ⁇ -anomeric nucleic acid molecule.
  • An ⁇ -anomeric nucleic acid molecule forms specific double- stranded hybrids with complementary RNA in which, contrary to the usual ⁇ -units, the strands run parallel to each other (Gaultier et al, 1987, Nucleic Acids Res. 15:6625- 6641).
  • the antisense nucleic acid molecule can also comprise a 2'-o- methylribonucleotide (Inoue et al, 1987, Nucleic Acids Res. 15:6131-6148) or a chimeric RNA-DNA analogue (Inoue et al, 1987, FEBSLett.
  • Ribozymes are catalytic RNA molecules with ribonuclease activity which are capable of cleaving a single- stranded nucleic acid, such as an mRNA, to which they have a complementary region.
  • ribozymes e.g., hammerhead ribozymes as described in Haselhoff and Gerlach, 1988, Nature 334:585-591
  • a ribozyme having specificity for a nucleic acid molecule encoding a marker protein can be designed based upon the nucleotide sequence of a cDNA co ⁇ esponding to the marker.
  • a derivative of a Tetrahymena L-19 IVS RNA can be constructed in which the nucleotide sequence ofthe active site is complementary to the nucleotide sequence to be cleaved (see Cech et al. U.S. Patent No. 4,987,071; and Cech et al. U.S. Patent No. 5,116,742).
  • an mRNA encoding a polypeptide ofthe invention can be used to select a catalytic RNA having a specific ribonuclease activity from a pool of RNA molecules (see, e.g., Bartel and Szostak, 1993, Science 261 :1411-1418).
  • the invention also encompasses nucleic acid molecules which form triple helical structures.
  • expression of a marker ofthe invention can be inhibited by targeting nucleotide sequences complementary to the regulatory region ofthe gene encoding the marker nucleic acid or protein (e.g., the promoter and/or enhancer) to form triple helical structures that prevent transcription ofthe gene in target cells. See generally Helene (1991) Anticancer Drug Des. 6(6):569-84; Helene (1992) Ann. N.Y. Acad. Sci. 660:27-36; and Maher ( 1992) Bioassays 14(12):807-15.
  • the nucleic acid molecules ofthe invention can be modified at the base moiety, sugar moiety or phosphate backbone to improve, e.g., the stability, hybridization, or solubility ofthe molecule.
  • the deoxyribose phosphate backbone ofthe nucleic acids can be modified to generate peptide nucleic acids (see Hyrup et al, 1996, Bioorganic & Medicinal Chemistry 4(1): 5-23).
  • peptide nucleic acids refer to nucleic acid mimics, e.g., DNA mimics, in which the deoxyribose phosphate backbone is replaced by a pseudopeptide backbone and only the four natural nucleobases are retained.
  • the neutral backbone of PNAs has been shown to allow for specific hybridization to DNA and RNA under conditions of low ionic strength.
  • the synthesis of PNA oligomers can be performed using standard solid phase peptide synthesis protocols as described in Hyrup ⁇ t al (1996), supra; Perry-O'Keefe et al. (1996) Proc. Natl Acad. Sci. USA 93:14670- 675.
  • PNAs can be used in therapeutic and diagnostic applications.
  • PNAs can be used as antisense or antigene agents for sequence-specific modulation of gene expression by, e.g., inducing transcription or translation a ⁇ est or inhibiting replication.
  • PNAs can also be used, e.g., in the analysis of single base pair mutations in a gene by, e.g. , PNA directed PCR clamping; as artificial restriction enzymes when used in combination with other enzymes, e.g., SI nucleases (Hyrup (1996), supra; or as probes or primers for DNA sequence and hybridization (Hyrup, 1996, supra; Perry-O'Keefe et al, 1996, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci.
  • PNAs can be modified, e.g., to enhance their stability or cellular uptake, by attaching lipophilic or other helper groups to PNA, by the formation of PNA-DNA chimeras, or by the use of liposomes or other techniques of drug delivery known in the art.
  • PNA-DNA chimeras can be generated which can combine the advantageous properties of PNA and DNA.
  • Such chimeras allow DNA recognition enzymes, e.g., RNase H and DNA polymerases, to interact with the DNA portion while the PNA portion would provide high binding affinity and specificity.
  • PNA-DNA chimeras can be linked using linkers of appropriate lengths selected in terms of base stacking, number of bonds between the nucleobases, and orientation (Hyrup, 1996, supra).
  • the synthesis of PNA-DNA chimeras can be performed as described in Hyrup (1996), supra, and Finn et al. (1996) Nucleic Acids Res. 24(17):3357-63.
  • a DNA chain can be synthesized on a solid support using standard phosphoramidite coupling chemistry and modified nucleoside analogs.
  • the oligonucleotide can include other appended groups such as peptides (e.g., for targeting host cell receptors in vivo), or agents facilitating transport across the cell membrane (see, e.g., Letsinger et al, 1989, Proc. Natl Acad. Sci. USA 86:6553-6556; Lemaitre et al, 1987, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 84:648-652; PCT Publication No. WO 88/09810) or the blood-brain barrier (see, e.g., PCT Publication No. WO 89/10134).
  • peptides e.g., for targeting host cell receptors in vivo
  • agents facilitating transport across the cell membrane see, e.g., Letsinger et al, 1989, Proc. Natl Acad. Sci. USA 86:6553-6556; Lemaitre et al, 1987, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci.
  • oligonucleotides can be modified with hybridization-triggered cleavage agents (see, e.g., Krol et al, 1988, Bio/Techniques 6:958-976) or intercalating agents (see, e.g., Zon, 1988, Pharm. Res. 5:539-549).
  • the oligonucleotide can be conjugated to another molecule, e.g., a peptide, hybridization triggered cross-linking agent, transport agent, hybridization-triggered cleavage agent, etc.
  • the invention also includes molecular beacon nucleic acids having at least one region which is complementary to a nucleic acid ofthe invention, such that the molecular beacon is useful for quantitating the presence ofthe nucleic acid ofthe invention in a sample.
  • a "molecular beacon" nucleic acid is a nucleic acid comprising a pair of complementary regions and having a fluorophore and a fluorescent quencher associated therewith. The fluorophore and quencher are associated with different portions ofthe nucleic acid in such an orientation that when the complementary regions are annealed with one another, fluorescence ofthe fluorophore is quenched by the quencher.
  • One aspect ofthe invention pertains to isolated marker proteins and biologically active portions thereof, as well as polypeptide fragments suitable for use as immunogens to raise antibodies directed against a marker protein or a fragment thereof.
  • the native marker protein can be isolated from cells or tissue sources by an appropriate purification scheme using standard protein purification techniques.
  • a protein or peptide comprising the whole or a segment ofthe marker protein is produced by recombinant DNA techniques.
  • Alternative to recombinant expression such protein or peptide can be synthesized chemically using standard peptide synthesis techniques.
  • an “isolated” or “purified” protein or biologically active portion thereof is substantially free of cellular material or other contaminating proteins from the cell or tissue source from which the protein is derived, or substantially free of chemical precursors or other chemicals when chemically synthesized.
  • the language “substantially free of cellular material” includes preparations of protein in which the protein is separated from cellular components ofthe cells from which it is isolated or recombinantly produced.
  • protein that is substantially free of cellular material includes preparations of protein having less than about 30%, 20%, 10%, or 5% (by dry weight) of heterologous protein (also refe ⁇ ed to herein as a "contaminating protein").
  • the protein or biologically active portion thereof is recombinantly produced, it is also preferably substantially free of culture medium, i.e., culture medium represents less than about 20%, 10%, or 5% ofthe volume ofthe protein preparation.
  • culture medium represents less than about 20%, 10%, or 5% ofthe volume ofthe protein preparation.
  • the protein is produced by chemical synthesis, it is preferably substantially free of chemical precursors or other chemicals, i.e., it is separated from chemical precursors or other chemicals which are involved in the synthesis ofthe protein. Accordingly such preparations ofthe protein have less than about 30%, 20%, 10%, 5% (by dry weight) of chemical precursors or compounds other than the polypeptide of interest.
  • Biologically active portions of a marker protein include polypeptides comprising amino acid sequences sufficiently identical to or derived from the amino acid sequence ofthe marker protein, which include fewer amino acids than the full length protein, and exhibit at least one activity ofthe co ⁇ esponding full-length protein.
  • biologically active portions comprise a domain or motif with at least one activity ofthe co ⁇ esponding full-length protein.
  • a biologically active portion of a marker protein ofthe invention can be a polypeptide which is, for example, 10, 25, 50, 100 or more amino acids in length.
  • other biologically active portions, in which other regions ofthe marker protein are deleted can be prepared by recombinant techniques and evaluated for one or more ofthe functional activities ofthe native form of the marker protein.
  • Prefe ⁇ ed marker proteins are encoded by nucleotide sequences comprising the sequence of any ofthe sequences set forth in the Sequence Listing.
  • Other useful proteins are substantially identical (e.g., at least about 40%, preferably 50%, 60%, 70%, 80%, 90%), 95%, or 99%) to one of these sequences and retain the functional activity ofthe co ⁇ esponding naturally-occurring marker protein yet differ in amino acid sequence due to natural allelic variation or mutagenesis.
  • the sequences are aligned for optimal comparison purposes (e.g., gaps can be introduced in the sequence of a first amino acid or nucleic acid sequence for optimal alignment with a second amino or nucleic acid sequence).
  • the amino acid residues or nucleotides at co ⁇ esponding amino acid positions or nucleotide positions are then compared.
  • a position in the first sequence is occupied by the same amino acid residue or nucleotide as the co ⁇ esponding position in the second sequence, then the molecules are identical at that position.
  • the determination of percent identity between two sequences can be accomplished using a mathematical algorithm.
  • a prefe ⁇ ed, non-limiting example of a mathematical algorithm utilized for the comparison of two sequences is the algorithm of Karlin and Altschul (1990) Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 87:2264-2268, modified as in Karlin and Altschul (1993) Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 90:5873-5877.
  • Such an algorithm is incorporated into the BLASTN and BLASTX programs of Altschul, et al. (1990) J. Mol. Biol. 215:403-410.
  • Gapped BLAST can be utilized as described in Altschul et al. (1997) Nucleic Acids Res. 25:3389-3402, which is able to perform gapped local alignments for the programs
  • BLASTN BLASTN
  • BLASTP BLASTP
  • BLASTX BLASTP
  • PSI-Blast can be used to perform an iterated search which detects distant relationships between molecules.
  • the default parameters ofthe respective programs e.g., BLASTX and BLASTN
  • Another prefe ⁇ ed, non-limiting example of a mathematical algorithm utilized for the comparison of sequences is the algorithm of Myers and Miller, (1988) CABIOS 4: 11-17. Such an algorithm is incorporated into the ALIGN program (version 2.0) which is part ofthe GCG sequence alignment software package.
  • a PAM120 weight residue table When utilizing the ALIGN program for comparing amino acid sequences, a PAM120 weight residue table, a gap length penalty of 12, and a gap penalty of 4 can be used. Yet another useful algorithm for identifying regions of local sequence similarity and alignment is the FASTA algorithm as described in Pearson and Lipman (1988) Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 85:2444-2448. When using the FASTA algorithm for comparing nucleotide or amino acid sequences, a PAM120 weight residue table can, for example, be used with a A-tuple value of 2.
  • the percent identity between two sequences can be determined using techniques similar to those described above, with or without allowing gaps. In calculating percent identity, only exact matches are counted.
  • the invention also provides chimeric or fusion proteins comprising a marker protein or a segment thereof.
  • a "chimeric protein” or “fusion protein” comprises all or part (preferably a biologically active part) of a marker protein operably linked to a heterologous polypeptide (i.e., a polypeptide other than the marker protein).
  • a heterologous polypeptide i.e., a polypeptide other than the marker protein.
  • the term "operably linked” is intended to indicate that the marker protein or segment thereof and the heterologous polypeptide are fused in-frame to each other.
  • the heterologous polypeptide can be fused to the amino- terminus or the carboxyl-terminus ofthe marker protein or segment.
  • One useful fusion protein is a GST fusion protein in which a marker protein or segment is fused to the carboxyl terminus of GST sequences. Such fusion proteins can facilitate the purification of a recombinant polypeptide ofthe invention.
  • the fusion protein contains a heterologous signal sequence at its amino terminus.
  • the native signal sequence of a marker protein can be removed and replaced with a signal sequence from another protein.
  • the gp67 secretory sequence ofthe baculovirus envelope protein can be used as a heterologous signal sequence (Ausubel et al, ed., Current Protocols in Molecular Biology, John Wiley & Sons, NY, 1992).
  • Other examples of eukaryotic heterologous signal sequences include the secretory sequences of melittin and human placental alkaline phosphatase (Stratagene; La Jolla, California).
  • useful prokaryotic heterologous signal sequences include the phoA secretory signal (Sambrook et al, supra) and the protein A secretory signal (Pharmacia Biotech; Piscataway, New Jersey).
  • the fusion protein is an immunoglobulin fusion protein in which all or part of a marker protein is fused to sequences derived from a member ofthe immunoglobulin protein family.
  • the immunoglobulin fusion proteins ofthe invention can be incorporated into pharmaceutical compositions and administered to a subject to inhibit an interaction between a ligand (soluble or membrane-bound) and a protein on the surface of a cell (receptor), to thereby suppress signal transduction in vivo.
  • the immunoglobulin fusion protein can be used to affect the bioavailability of a cognate ligand of a marker protein. Inhibition of ligand/receptor interaction can be useful therapeutically, both for treating proliferative and differentiative disorders and for modulating (e.g. promoting or inhibiting) cell survival.
  • the immunoglobulin fusion proteins ofthe invention can be used as immunogens to produce antibodies directed against a marker protein in a subject, to purify ligands and in screening assays to identify molecules which inhibit the interaction ofthe marker protein with ligands.
  • Chimeric and fusion proteins ofthe invention can be produced by standard recombinant DNA techniques.
  • the fusion gene can be synthesized by conventional techniques including automated DNA synthesizers.
  • PCR amplification of gene fragments can be carried out using anchor primers which give rise to complementary overhangs between two consecutive gene fragments which can subsequently be annealed and re-amplified to generate a chimeric gene sequence (see, e.g., Ausubel et al, supra).
  • anchor primers which give rise to complementary overhangs between two consecutive gene fragments which can subsequently be annealed and re-amplified to generate a chimeric gene sequence
  • many expression vectors are commercially available that already encode a fusion moiety (e.g., a GST polypeptide).
  • a nucleic acid encoding a polypeptide ofthe invention can be cloned into such an expression vector such that the fusion moiety is linked in-frame to the polypeptide ofthe invention.
  • a signal sequence can be used to facilitate secretion and isolation of marker proteins.
  • Signal sequences are typically characterized by a core of hydrophobic amino acids which are generally cleaved from the mature protein during secretion in one or more cleavage events. Such signal peptides contain processing sites that allow cleavage ofthe signal sequence from the mature proteins as they pass through the secretory pathway.
  • the invention pertains to marker proteins, fusion proteins or segments thereof having a signal sequence, as well as to such proteins from which the signal sequence has been proteolytically cleaved (i.e., the cleavage products).
  • a nucleic acid sequence encoding a signal sequence can be operably linked in an expression vector to a protein of interest, such as a marker protein or a segment thereof.
  • the signal sequence directs secretion ofthe protein, such as from a eukaryotic host into which the expression vector is transformed, and the signal sequence is subsequently or concu ⁇ ently cleaved.
  • the protein can then be readily purified from the extracellular medium by art recognized methods.
  • the signal sequence can be linked to the protein of interest using a sequence which facilitates purification, such as with a GST domain.
  • the present invention also pertains to variants ofthe marker proteins.
  • Such variants have an altered amino acid sequence which can function as either agonists (mimetics) or as antagonists.
  • Variants can be generated by mutagenesis, e.g., discrete point mutation or truncation.
  • An agonist can retain substantially the same, or a subset, ofthe biological activities ofthe naturally occurring form ofthe protein.
  • An antagonist of a protein can inhibit one or more ofthe activities ofthe naturally occurring form of the protein by, for example, competitively binding to a downstream or upstream member of a cellular signaling cascade which includes the protein of interest.
  • specific biological effects can be elicited by treatment with a variant of limited function.
  • Variants of a marker protein which function as either agonists (mimetics) or as antagonists can be identified by screening combinatorial libraries of mutants, e.g., truncation mutants, ofthe protein ofthe invention for agonist or antagonist activity.
  • a variegated library of variants is generated by combinatorial mutagenesis at the nucleic acid level and is encoded by a variegated gene library.
  • a variegated library of variants can be produced by, for example, enzymatically ligating a mixture of synthetic oligonucleotides into gene sequences such that a degenerate set of potential protein sequences is expressible as individual polypeptides, or alternatively, as a set of larger fusion proteins (e.g., for phage display).
  • methods which can be used to produce libraries of potential variants ofthe marker proteins from a degenerate oligonucleotide sequence. Methods for synthesizing degenerate oligonucleotides are known in the art (see, e.g., Narang, 1983, Tetrahedron 39:3; Itakura et al, 1984, Annu. Rev.
  • libraries of segments of a marker protein can be used to generate a variegated population of polypeptides for screening and subsequent selection of variant marker proteins or segments thereof.
  • a library of coding sequence fragments can be generated by treating a double stranded PCR fragment ofthe coding sequence of interest with a nuclease under conditions wherein nicking occurs only about once per molecule, denaturing the double stranded DNA, renaturing the DNA to form double stranded DNA which can include sense/antisense pairs from different nicked products, removing single stranded portions from reformed duplexes by treatment with SI nuclease, and ligating the resulting fragment library into an expression vector.
  • an expression library can be derived which encodes amino terminal and internal fragments of various sizes ofthe protein of interest.
  • REM Recursive ensemble mutagenesis
  • Another aspect ofthe invention pertains to antibodies directed against a protein ofthe invention.
  • the antibodies specifically bind a marker protein or a fragment thereof.
  • the terms "antibody” and “antibodies” as used interchangeably herein refer to immunoglobulin molecules as well as fragments and derivatives thereof that comprise an immuno logically active portion of an immunoglobulin molecule, (i.e., such a portion contains an antigen binding site which specifically binds an antigen, such as a marker protein, e.g. , eta epitope of a marker protein).
  • An antibody which specifically binds to a protein ofthe invention is an antibody which binds the protein, but does not substantially bind other molecules in a sample, e.g., a biological sample, which naturally contains the protein.
  • an immuno logically active portion of an immunoglobulin molecule include, but are not limited to, single-chain antibodies (scAb), F(ab) and F(ab') 2 fragments.
  • An isolated protein ofthe invention or a fragment thereof can be used as an immunogen to generate antibodies.
  • the full-length protein can be used or, alternatively, the invention provides antigenic peptide fragments for use as immunogens.
  • the antigenic peptide of a protein ofthe invention comprises at least 8 (preferably 10, 15, 20, or 30 or more) amino acid residues ofthe amino acid sequence of one ofthe proteins ofthe invention, and encompasses at least one epitope ofthe protein such that an antibody raised against the peptide forms a specific immune complex with the protein.
  • Prefe ⁇ ed epitopes encompassed by the antigenic peptide are regions that are located on the surface ofthe protein, e.g., hydrophilic regions.
  • Hydrophobicity sequence analysis, hydrophilicity sequence analysis, or similar analyses can be used to identify hydrophilic regions.
  • an isolated marker protein or fragment thereof is used as an immunogen.
  • An immunogen typically is used to prepare antibodies by immunizing a suitable (i.e. immunocompetent) subject such as a rabbit, goat, mouse, or other mammal or vertebrate.
  • An appropriate immunogenic preparation can contain, for example, recombinantly-expressed or chemically-synthesized protein or peptide.
  • the preparation can further include an adjuvant, such as Freund's complete or incomplete adjuvant, or a similar immunostimulatory agent.
  • Prefe ⁇ ed immunogen compositions are those that contain no other human proteins such as, for example, immunogen compositions made using a non-human host cell for recombinant expression of a protein ofthe invention. In such a manner, the resulting antibody compositions have reduced or no binding of human proteins other than a protein ofthe invention.
  • the invention provides polyclonal and monoclonal antibodies.
  • monoclonal antibody or “monoclonal antibody composition”, as used herein, refers to a population of antibody molecules that contain only one species of an antigen binding site capable of immunoreacting with a particular epitope.
  • Prefe ⁇ ed polyclonal and monoclonal antibody compositions are ones that have been selected for antibodies directed against a protein ofthe invention.
  • Particularly prefe ⁇ ed polyclonal and monoclonal antibody preparations are ones that contain only antibodies directed against a marker protein or fragment thereof.
  • Polyclonal antibodies can be prepared by immunizing a suitable subject with a protein ofthe invention as an immunogen
  • the antibody titer in the immunized subject can be monitored over time by standard techniques, such as with an enzyme linked immunosorbent assay (ELISA) using immobilized polypeptide.
  • ELISA enzyme linked immunosorbent assay
  • mAb monoclonal antibodies
  • standard techniques such as the hybridoma technique originally described by Kohler and Milstein (1975) Nature 256:495-497, the human B cell hybridoma technique (see Kozbor et al, 1983, Immunol.
  • Hybridoma cells producing a monoclonal antibody ofthe invention are detected by screening the hybridoma culture supematants for antibodies that bind the polypeptide of interest, e.g., using a standard ELISA assay.
  • a monoclonal antibody directed against a protein ofthe invention can be identified and isolated by screening a recombinant combinatorial immunoglobulin library (e.g., an antibody phage display library) with the polypeptide of interest.
  • Kits for generating and screening phage display libraries are commercially available (e.g., the Pharmacia Recombinant Phage Antibody System, Catalog No. 27-9400-01; and the Stratagene SurfZAP Phage Display Kit, Catalog No. 240612).
  • examples of methods and reagents particularly amenable for use in generating and screening antibody display library can be found in, for example, U.S. Patent No. 5,223,409; PCT Publication No.
  • the invention also provides recombinant antibodies that specifically bind a protein ofthe invention.
  • the recombinant antibodies specifically binds a marker protein or fragment thereof.
  • Recombinant antibodies include, but are not limited to, chimeric and humanized monoclonal antibodies, comprising both human and non-human portions, single-chain antibodies and multi- specific antibodies.
  • a chimeric antibody is a molecule in which different portions are derived from different animal species, such as those having a variable region derived from a murine mAb and a human immunoglobulin constant region. (See, e.g., Cabilly et al, U.S. Patent No.
  • Single-chain antibodies have an antigen binding site and consist of a single polypeptide. They can be produced by techniques known in the art, for example using methods described in Ladner et. al U.S. Pat. No.
  • Multi-specific antibodies are antibody molecules having at least two antigen-binding sites that specifically bind different antigens. Such molecules can be produced by techniques known in the art, for example using methods described in Segal, U.S. Patent No.
  • Humanized antibodies are antibody molecules from non-human species having one or more complementarity determining regions (CDRs) from the non-human species and a framework region from a human immunoglobulin molecule.
  • CDRs complementarity determining regions
  • Humanized monoclonal antibodies can be produced by recombinant DNA techniques known in the art, for example using methods described in PCT Publication No. WO 87/02671; European Patent Application 184,187; European Patent Application 171 ,496; European Patent Application 173,494; PCT Publication No. WO 86/01533; U.S. Patent No.
  • humanized antibodies can be produced, for example, using transgenic mice which are incapable of expressing endogenous immunoglobulin heavy and light chains genes, but which can express human heavy and light chain genes.
  • the transgenic mice are immunized in the normal fashion with a selected antigen, e.g., all or a portion of a polypeptide co ⁇ esponding to a marker ofthe invention.
  • Monoclonal antibodies directed against the antigen can be obtained using conventional hybridoma technology.
  • the human immunoglobulin transgenes harbored by the transgenic mice rearrange during B cell differentiation, and subsequently undergo class switching and somatic mutation. Thus, using such a technique, it is possible to produce therapeutically useful IgG, IgA and IgE antibodies.
  • Completely human antibodies which recognize a selected epitope can be generated using a technique refe ⁇ ed to as "guided selection.”
  • a selected non-human monoclonal antibody e.g., a murine antibody
  • a completely human antibody recognizing the same epitope Jespers et al, 1994, Bio/technology 12:899-903.
  • the antibodies ofthe invention can be isolated after production (e.g., from the blood or serum ofthe subject) or synthesis and further purified by well-known techniques.
  • IgG antibodies can be purified using protein A chromatography.
  • Antibodies specific for a protein ofthe invention can be selected or (e.g., partially purified) or purified by, e.g., affinity chromatography.
  • a recombinantly expressed and purified (or partially purified) protein ofthe invention is produced as described herein, and covalently or non-covalently coupled to a solid support such as, for example, a chromatography column.
  • the column can then be used to affinity purify antibodies specific for the proteins ofthe invention from a sample containing antibodies directed against a large number of different epitopes, thereby generating a substantially purified antibody composition, i.e., one that is substantially free of contaminating antibodies.
  • a substantially purified antibody composition is meant, in this context, that the antibody sample contains at most only 30% (by dry weight) of contaminating antibodies directed against epitopes other than those ofthe desired protein ofthe invention, and preferably at most 20%, yet more preferably at most 10%, and most preferably at most 5% (by dry weight) ofthe sample is contaminating antibodies.
  • a purified antibody composition means that at least 99% of the antibodies in the composition are directed against the desired protein ofthe invention.
  • the substantially purified antibodies ofthe invention may specifically bind to a signal peptide, a secreted sequence, an extracellular domain, a transmembrane or a cytoplasmic domain or cytoplasmic membrane of a protein ofthe invention.
  • the substantially purified antibodies ofthe invention specifically bind to a secreted sequence or an extracellular domain ofthe amino acid sequences of a protein ofthe invention.
  • the substantially purified antibodies ofthe invention specifically bind to a secreted sequence or an extracellular domain ofthe amino acid sequences of a marker protein.
  • An antibody directed against a protein ofthe invention can be used to isolate the protein by standard techniques, such as affinity chromatography or immunoprecipitation. Moreover, such an antibody can be used to detect the marker protein or fragment thereof (e.g., in a cellular lysate or cell supernatant) in order to evaluate the level and pattern of expression ofthe marker.
  • the antibodies can also be used diagnostically to monitor protein levels in tissues or body fluids (e.g. in a cervical- associated body fluid) as part of a clinical testing procedure, e.g., to, for example, determine the efficacy of a given treatment regimen. Detection can be facilitated by the use of an antibody derivative, which comprises an antibody ofthe invention coupled to a detectable substance.
  • detectable substances include various enzymes, prosthetic groups, fluorescent materials, luminescent materials, bioluminescent materials, and radioactive materials.
  • suitable enzymes include horseradish peroxidase, alkaline phosphatase, ⁇ -galactosidase, or acetylcholinesterase;
  • suitable prosthetic group complexes include streptavidin/biotin and avidin/biotin;
  • suitable fluorescent materials include umbelliferone, fluorescein, fluorescein isothiocyanate, rhodamine, dichlorotriazinylamine fluorescein, dansyl chloride or phycoerythrin;
  • an example of a luminescent material includes luminol;
  • bioluminescent materials include luciferase, luciferin, and aequorin, and
  • radioactive mate ⁇ al examples include I, I, S or H.
  • Antibodies ofthe invention may also be used as therapeutic agents in treating cancers.
  • completely human antibodies ofthe invention are used for therapeutic treatment of human cancer patients, particularly those having an cervical cancer.
  • antibodies that bind specifically to a marker protein or fragment thereof are used for therapeutic treatment.
  • therapeutic antibody may be an antibody derivative or immunotoxin comprising an antibody conjugated to a therapeutic moiety such as a cytotoxin, a therapeutic agent or a radioactive metal ion.
  • a cytotoxin or cytotoxic agent includes any agent that is detrimental to cells.
  • Examples include taxol, cytochalasin B, gramicidin D, ethidium bromide, emetine, mitomycin, etoposide, tenoposide, vincristine, vinblastine, colchicin, doxorubicin, daunorubicin, dihydroxy anthracin dione, mitoxantrone, mithramycin, actinomycin D, 1-dehydrotestosterone, glucocorticoids, procaine, tetracaine, lidocaine, propranolol, and puromycin and analogs or homologs thereof.
  • Therapeutic agents include, but are not limited to, antimetabolites (e.g., methotrexate, 6-mercaptopurine, 6-thioguanine, cytarabine, 5-fluorouracil decarbazine), alkylating agents (e.g., mechlorethamine, thioepa chlorambucil, melphalan, carmustine (BSNU) and lomustine (CCNU), cyclothosphamide, busulfan, dibromomannitol, streptozotocin, mitomycin C, and cis-dichlorodiamine platinum (II) (DDP) cisplatin), anthracyclines (e.g., daunorubicin (formerly daunomycin) and doxorubicin), antibiotics (e.g., dactinomycin (formerly actinomycin), bleomycin, mithramycin, and anthramycin (AMC)), and anti-mitotic agents (e.g.
  • the conjugated antibodies ofthe invention can be used for modifying a given biological response, for the drug moiety is not to be construed as limited to classical chemical therapeutic agents.
  • the drug moiety may be a protein or polypeptide possessing a desired biological activity.
  • proteins may include, for example, a toxin such as ribosome-inhibiting protein (see Better et al, U.S. Patent No. 6,146,631, the disclosure of which is inco ⁇ orated herein in its entirety), abrin, ricin A, pseudomonas exotoxin, or diphtheria toxin; a protein such as tumor necrosis factor, .alpha. -interferon, .beta.
  • IL-1 interleukin-1
  • IL-2 interleukin-2
  • IL-6 interleukin-6
  • GM-CSF granulocyte macrophase colony stimulating factor
  • G-CSF granulocyte colony stimulating factor
  • the invention provides substantially purified antibodies, antibody fragments and derivatives, all of which specifically bind to a protein ofthe invention and preferably, a marker protein.
  • the substantially purified antibodies ofthe invention, or fragments or derivatives thereof can be human, non-human, chimeric and/or humanized antibodies.
  • the invention provides non-human antibodies, antibody fragments and derivatives, all of which specifically bind to a protein ofthe invention and preferably, a marker protein.
  • Such non-human antibodies can be goat, mouse, sheep, horse, chicken, rabbit, or rat antibodies.
  • the non-human antibodies ofthe invention can be chimeric and or humanized antibodies.
  • non-human antibodies ofthe invention can be polyclonal antibodies or monoclonal antibodies.
  • the invention provides monoclonal antibodies, antibody fragments and derivatives, all of which specifically bind to a protein ofthe invention and preferably, a marker protein.
  • the monoclonal antibodies can be human, humanized, chimeric and/or non-human antibodies.
  • the invention also provides a kit containing an antibody ofthe invention conjugated to a detectable substance, and instructions for use.
  • Still another aspect ofthe invention is a pharmaceutical composition comprising an antibody ofthe invention.
  • the pharmaceutical composition comprises an antibody ofthe invention and a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier.
  • vectors preferably expression vectors, containing a nucleic acid encoding a marker protein (or a portion of such a protein).
  • vector refers to a nucleic acid molecule capable of transporting another nucleic acid to which it has been linked.
  • plasmid refers to a circular double stranded DNA loop into which additional DNA segments can be ligated.
  • viral vector is another type of vector, wherein additional DNA segments can be ligated into the viral genome.
  • vectors are capable of autonomous replication in a host cell into which they are introduced (e.g., bacterial vectors having a bacterial origin of replication and episomal mammalian vectors).
  • Other vectors e.g., non-episomal mammalian vectors
  • certain vectors namely expression vectors, are capable of directing the expression of genes to which they are operably linked.
  • expression vectors of utility in recombinant DNA techniques are often in the form of plasmids (vectors).
  • the invention is intended to include such other forms of expression vectors, such as viral vectors (e.g., replication defective retroviruses, adenoviruses and adeno-associated viruses), which serve equivalent functions.
  • the recombinant expression vectors ofthe invention comprise a nucleic acid ofthe invention in a form suitable for expression ofthe nucleic acid in a host cell.
  • the recombinant expression vectors include one or more regulatory sequences, selected on the basis ofthe host cells to be used for expression, which is operably linked to the nucleic acid sequence to be expressed.
  • "operably linked" is intended to mean that the nucleotide sequence of interest is linked to the regulatory sequence(s) in a manner which allows for expression ofthe nucleotide sequence (e.g., in an in vitro transcription/translation system or in a host cell when the vector is introduced into the host cell).
  • regulatory sequence is intended to include promoters, enhancers and other expression control elements (e.g., polyadenylation signals). Such regulatory sequences are described, for example, in Goeddel, Methods in Enzymology: Gene Expression Technology vol.185, Academic Press, San Diego, CA (1991). Regulatory sequences include those which direct constitutive expression of a nucleotide sequence in many types of host cell and those which direct expression ofthe nucleotide sequence only in certain host cells (e.g., tissue-specific regulatory sequences). It will be appreciated by those skilled in the art that the design ofthe expression vector can depend on such factors as the choice ofthe host cell to be transformed, the level of expression of protein desired, and the like.
  • the expression vectors ofthe invention can be introduced into host cells to thereby produce proteins or peptides, including fusion proteins or peptides, encoded by nucleic acids as described herein.
  • the recombinant expression vectors ofthe invention can be designed for expression of a marker protein or a segment thereof in prokaryotic (e.g., E. coli) or eukaryotic cells (e.g., insect cells ⁇ using baculovirus expression vectors ⁇ , yeast cells or mammalian cells). Suitable host cells are discussed further in Goeddel, supra.
  • prokaryotic e.g., E. coli
  • eukaryotic cells e.g., insect cells ⁇ using baculovirus expression vectors ⁇ , yeast cells or mammalian cells. Suitable host cells are discussed further in Goeddel, supra.
  • the recombinant expression vector can be transcribed and translated in vitro, for example using T7 promoter regulatory sequences and T7 polymerase.
  • Fusion vectors add a number of amino acids to a protein encoded therein, usually to the amino terminus ofthe recombinant protein.
  • Such fusion vectors typically serve three pu ⁇ oses: 1) to increase expression of recombinant protein; 2) to increase the solubility ofthe recombinant protein; and 3) to aid in the purification ofthe recombinant protein by acting as a ligand in affinity purification.
  • a proteolytic cleavage site is introduced at the junction ofthe fusion moiety and the recombinant protein to enable separation ofthe recombinant protein from the fusion moiety subsequent to purification ofthe fusion protein.
  • enzymes, and their cognate recognition sequences include Factor Xa, thrombin and enterokinase.
  • Typical fusion expression vectors include pGEX (Pharmacia Biotech Inc; Smith and Johnson, 1988, Gene 67:31-40), pMAL (New England Biolabs, Beverly, MA) and pRIT5 (Pharmacia, Piscataway, NJ) which fuse glutathione S-transferase (GST), maltose E binding protein, or protein A, respectively, to the target recombinant protein.
  • GST glutathione S-transferase
  • maltose E binding protein or protein A, respectively, to the target recombinant protein.
  • Suitable inducible non-fusion E. coli expression vectors include pTrc (Amann et al, 1988, Gene 69:301-315) and pET l id (Studier et al, p. 60- 89, In Gene Expression Technology: Methods in Enzymology vol.185, Academic Press, San Diego, CA, 1991).
  • Target gene expression from the pTrc vector relies on host RNA polymerase transcription from a hybrid t ⁇ -lac fusion promoter.
  • Target gene expression from the pET l id vector relies on transcription from a T7 gnlO-lac fusion promoter mediated by a co-expressed viral RNA polymerase (T7 gnl).
  • This viral polymerase is supplied by host strains BL21(DE3) or HMS174(DE3) from a resident prophage harboring a T7 gnl gene under the transcriptional control ofthe lacUV 5 promoter.
  • One strategy to maximize recombinant protein expression in E. coli is to express the protein in a host bacteria with an impaired capacity to proteolytically cleave the recombinant protein (Gottesman, p. 119-128, In Gene Expression Technology: Methods in Enzymology vol. 185, Academic Press, San Diego, CA, 1990.
  • Another strategy is to alter the nucleic acid sequence ofthe nucleic acid to be inserted into an expression vector so that the individual codons for each amino acid are those preferentially utilized in E. coli (Wada et al, 1992, Nucleic Acids Res. 20:2111-2118). Such alteration of nucleic acid sequences ofthe invention can be carried out by standard DNA synthesis techniques.
  • the expression vector is a yeast expression vector.
  • yeast expression vectors for expression in yeast S. cerevisiae include pYepSecl (Baldari et al, 1987, EMBOJ. 6:229-234), pMFa (Kurjan and Herskowitz, 1982, Cell 30:933-943), pJRY88 (Schultz et al, 1987, Gene 54:113-123), pYES2 (Invitrogen Co ⁇ oration, San Diego, CA), and pPicZ (Invitrogen Co ⁇ , San Diego, CA).
  • the expression vector is a baculovirus expression vector.
  • Baculovirus vectors available for expression of proteins in cultured insect cells include the pAc series (Smith et al, 1983, Mol. Cell Biol. 3:2156-2165) and the pVL series (Lucklow and Summers, 1989, Virology 170:31-39).
  • a nucleic acid ofthe invention is expressed in mammalian cells using a mammalian expression vector. Examples of mammalian expression vectors include pCDM8 (Seed, 1987, Nature 329:840) and pMT2PC (Kaufman et al, 1987, EMBO J. 6:187-195).
  • the expression vector's control functions are often provided by viral regulatory elements.
  • viral regulatory elements For example, commonly used promoters are derived from polyoma, Adenovirus 2, cytomegalovirus and Simian Virus 40.
  • promoters are derived from polyoma, Adenovirus 2, cytomegalovirus and Simian Virus 40.
  • suitable expression systems for both prokaryotic and eukaryotic cells see chapters 16 and 17 of Sambrook et al, supra.
  • the recombinant mammalian expression vector is capable of directing expression ofthe nucleic acid preferentially in a particular cell type (e.g., tissue-specific regulatory elements are used to express the nucleic acid).
  • tissue-specific regulatory elements are known in the art.
  • suitable tissue-specific promoters include the albumin promoter (liver-specific; Pinkert et al, 1987, Genes Dev. 1:268-277), lymphoid-specific promoters (Calame and Eaton, 1988, Adv. Immunol. 43:235-275), in particular promoters of T cell receptors (Winoto and Baltimore, 1989, EMBO J.
  • the invention further provides a recombinant expression vector comprising a DNA molecule ofthe invention cloned into the expression vector in an antisense orientation. That is, the DNA molecule is operably linked to a regulatory sequence in a manner which allows for expression (by transcription ofthe DNA molecule) of an RNA molecule which is antisense to the mRNA encoding a polypeptide ofthe invention.
  • Regulatory sequences operably linked to a nucleic acid cloned in the antisense orientation can be chosen which direct the continuous expression ofthe antisense RNA molecule in a variety of cell types, for instance viral promoters and/or enhancers, or regulatory sequences can be chosen which direct constitutive, tissue- specific or cell type specific expression of antisense RNA.
  • the antisense expression vector can be in the form of a recombinant plasmid, phagemid, or attenuated virus in which antisense nucleic acids are produced under the control of a high efficiency regulatory region, the activity of which can be determined by the cell type into which the vector is introduced.
  • host cell and "recombinant host cell” are used interchangeably herein. It is understood that such terms refer not only to the particular subject cell but to the progeny or potential progeny of such a cell. Because certain modifications may occur in succeeding generations due to either mutation or environmental influences, such progeny may not, in fact, be identical to the parent cell, but are still included within the scope ofthe term as used herein.
  • a host cell can be any prokaryotic (e.g., E. coli) or eukaryotic cell (e.g., insect cells, yeast or mammalian cells).
  • Vector DNA can be introduced into prokaryotic or eukaryotic cells via conventional transformation or transfection techniques.
  • transformation and “transfection” are intended to refer to a variety of art-recognized techniques for introducing foreign nucleic acid into a host cell, including calcium phosphate or calcium chloride co-precipitation, DEAE-dextran-mediated transfection, lipofection, or electroporation. Suitable methods for transforming or transfecting host cells can be found in Sambrook, et al. (supra), and other laboratory manuals.
  • a gene that encodes a selectable marker (e.g., for resistance to antibiotics) is generally introduced into the host cells along with the gene of interest.
  • selectable markers include those which confer resistance to drugs, such as G418, hygromycin and methotrexate.
  • Cells stably transfected with the introduced nucleic acid can be identified by drug selection (e.g., cells that have inco ⁇ orated the selectable marker will survive, while the other cells die).
  • a host cell ofthe invention such as a prokaryotic or eukaryotic host cell in culture, can be used to produce a marker protein or a segment thereof. Accordingly, the invention further provides methods for producing a marker protein or a segment thereof using the host cells ofthe invention.
  • the method comprises culturing the host cell ofthe invention (into which a recombinant expression vector encoding a marker protein or a segment thereof has been introduced) in a suitable medium such that the is produced.
  • the method further comprises isolating the marker protein or a segment thereof from the medium or the host cell.
  • the host cells ofthe invention can also be used to produce nonhuman transgenic animals.
  • a host cell ofthe invention is a fertilized oocyte or an embryonic stem cell into which a sequences encoding a marker protein or a segment thereof have been introduced.
  • Such host cells can then be used to create non-human transgenic animals in which exogenous sequences encoding a marker protein ofthe invention have been introduced into their genome or homologous recombinant animals in which endogenous gene(s) encoding a marker protein have been altered.
  • Such animals are useful for studying the function and/or activity ofthe marker protein and for identifying and/or evaluating modulators of marker protein.
  • a "transgenic animal” is a non-human animal, preferably a mammal, more preferably a rodent such as a rat or mouse, in which one or more ofthe cells ofthe animal includes a transgene.
  • Other examples of transgenic animals include non-human primates, sheep, dogs, cows, goats, chickens, amphibians, etc.
  • a transgene is exogenous DNA which is integrated into the genome of a cell from which a transgenic animal develops and which remains in the genome ofthe mature animal, thereby directing the expression of an encoded gene product in one or more cell types or tissues ofthe transgenic animal.
  • an "homologous recombinant animal” is a non- human animal, preferably a mammal, more preferably a mouse, in which an endogenous gene has been altered by homologous recombination between the endogenous gene and an exogenous DNA molecule introduced into a cell ofthe animal, e.g., an embryonic cell ofthe animal, prior to development ofthe animal.
  • a transgenic animal ofthe invention can be created by introducing a nucleic acid encoding a marker protein into the male pronuclei of a fertilized oocyte, e.g., by microinjection, retroviral infection, and allowing the oocyte to develop in a pseudopregnant female foster animal.
  • Intronic sequences and polyadenylation signals can also be included in the transgene to increase the efficiency of expression ofthe transgene.
  • a tissue-specific regulatory sequence(s) can be operably linked to the transgene to direct expression ofthe polypeptide ofthe invention to particular cells.
  • transgenic founder animal can be identified based upon the presence ofthe transgene in its genome and/or expression of mRNA encoding the transgene in tissues or cells ofthe animals. A transgenic founder animal can then be used to breed additional animals carrying the transgene. Moreover, transgenic animals carrying the transgene can further be bred to other transgenic animals carrying other transgenes.
  • a vector which contains at least a portion of a gene encoding a marker protein into which a deletion, addition or substitution has been introduced to thereby alter, e.g., functionally disrupt, the gene.
  • the vector is designed such that, upon homologous recombination, the endogenous gene is functionally disrupted (i.e., no longer encodes a functional protein; also refe ⁇ ed to as a "knock out" vector).
  • the vector can be designed such that, upon homologous recombination, the endogenous gene is mutated or otherwise altered but still encodes functional protein (e.g., the upstream regulatory region can be altered to thereby alter the expression ofthe endogenous protein).
  • the altered portion ofthe gene is flanked at its 5' and 3' ends by additional nucleic acid ofthe gene to allow for homologous recombination to occur between the exogenous gene carried by the vector and an endogenous gene in an embryonic stem cell.
  • the additional flanking nucleic acid sequences are of sufficient length for successful homologous recombination with the endogenous gene.
  • flanking DNA both at the 5' and 3' ends
  • flanking DNA both at the 5' and 3' ends
  • the vector is introduced into an embryonic stem cell line (e.g., by electroporation) and cells in which the introduced gene has homologously recombined with the endogenous gene are selected (see, e.g., Li et al, 1992, Cell 69:915).
  • the selected cells are then injected into a blastocyst of an animal (e.g., a mouse) to form aggregation chimeras (see, e.g., Bradley, Teratocarcinomas and Embryonic Stem Cells: A Practical Approach, Robertson, Ed., IRL, Oxford, 1987, pp. 113-152).
  • a chimeric embryo can then be implanted into a suitable pseudopregnant female foster animal and the embryo brought to term.
  • Progeny harboring the homologously recombined DNA in their germ cells can be used to breed animals in which all cells ofthe animal contain the homologously recombined DNA by germline transmission ofthe transgene.
  • transgenic non-human animals can be produced which contain selected systems which allow for regulated expression ofthe transgene.
  • a system is the cre/loxP recombinase system of bacteriophage PI .
  • cre/loxP recombinase system of bacteriophage PI .
  • the cre/loxP recombinase system see, e.g., Lakso et al. (1992) Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 89:6232-6236.
  • Another example of a recombinase system is the FLP recombinase system of Saccharomyces cerevisiae (O'Gorman et al, 1991, Science 251:1351-1355).
  • a cre/loxP recombinase system is used to regulate expression ofthe transgene
  • animals containing transgenes encoding both the Cre recombinase and a selected protein are required.
  • Such animals can be provided through the construction of "double" transgenic animals, e.g., by mating two transgenic animals, one containing a transgene encoding a selected protein and the other containing a transgene encoding a recombinase.
  • Clones ofthe non-human transgenic animals described herein can also be produced according to the methods described in Wilmut et al. (1997) Nature 385:810- 813 and PCT Publication NOS. WO 97/07668 and WO 97/07669.
  • compositions suitable for administration can be inco ⁇ orated into pharmaceutical compositions suitable for administration.
  • Such compositions typically comprise the nucleic acid molecule, protein, or antibody and a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier.
  • pharmaceutically acceptable carrier is intended to include any and all solvents, dispersion media, coatings, antibacterial and antifungal agents, isotonic and abso ⁇ tion delaying agents, and the like, compatible with pharmaceutical administration.
  • the use of such media and agents for pharmaceutically active substances is well known in the art. Except insofar as any conventional media or agent is incompatible with the active compound, use thereof in the compositions is contemplated. Supplementary active compounds can also be inco ⁇ orated into the compositions.
  • the invention includes methods for preparing pharmaceutical compositions for modulating the expression or activity of a marker nucleic acid or protein .
  • Such methods comprise formulating a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier with an agent which modulates expression or activity of a marker nucleic acid or protein.
  • Such compositions can further include additional active agents.
  • the invention further includes methods for preparing a pharmaceutical composition by formulating a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier with an agent which modulates expression or activity of a marker nucleic acid or protein and one or more additional active compounds.
  • the invention also provides methods (also refe ⁇ ed to herein as "screening assays") for identifying modulators, i.e., candidate or test compounds or agents (e.g., peptides, peptidomimetics, peptoids, small molecules or other drugs) which (a) bind to the marker, or (b) have a modulatory (e.g., stimulatory or inhibitory) effect on the activity ofthe marker or, more specifically, (c) have a modulatory effect on the interactions ofthe marker with one or more of its natural substrates (e.g., peptide, protein, hormone, co-factor, or nucleic acid), or (d) have a modulatory effect on the expression ofthe marker.
  • modulators i.e., candidate or test compounds or agents (e.g., peptides, peptidomimetics, peptoids, small molecules or other drugs) which (a) bind to the marker, or (b) have a modulatory (e.g., stimulatory or inhibitory)
  • test compounds ofthe present invention may be obtained from any available source, including systematic libraries of natural and or synthetic compounds.
  • Test compounds may also be obtained by any ofthe numerous approaches in combinatorial library methods known in the art, including: biological libraries; peptoid libraries (libraries of molecules having the functionalities of peptides, but with a novel, non-peptide backbone which are resistant to enzymatic degradation but which nevertheless remain bioactive; see, e.g., Zuckermann et al, 1994, J. Med. Chem. 37:2678-85); spatially addressable parallel solid phase or solution phase libraries; synthetic library methods requiring deconvolution; the 'one-bead one-compound' library method; and synthetic library methods using affinity chromatography selection.
  • the biological library and peptoid library approaches are limited to peptide libraries, while the other four approaches are applicable to peptide, non-peptide oligomer or small molecule libraries of compounds (Lam, 1997 ', Anticancer Drug Des. 12:145).
  • the invention provides assays for screening candidate or test compounds which are substrates of a protein encoded by or co ⁇ esponding to a marker or biologically active portion thereof. In another embodiment, the invention provides assays for screening candidate or test compounds which bind to a protein encoded by or co ⁇ esponding to a marker or biologically active portion thereof. Determining the ability ofthe test compound to directly bind to a protein can be accomplished, for example, by coupling the compound with a radioisotope or enzymatic label such that binding ofthe compound to the marker can be determined by detecting the labeled marker compound in a complex.
  • compounds e.g., marker substrates
  • compounds can be labeled with 125 1, 35 S, 14 C, or 3 H, either directly or indirectly, and the radioisotope detected by direct counting of radioemission or by scintillation counting.
  • assay components can be enzymatically labeled with, for example, horseradish peroxidase, alkaline phosphatase, or luciferase, and the enzymatic label detected by determination of conversion of an appropriate substrate to product.
  • the invention provides assays for screening candidate or test compounds which modulate the expression of a marker or the activity of a protein encoded by or co ⁇ esponding to a marker, or a biologically active portion thereof.
  • the protein encoded by or co ⁇ esponding to the marker can, in vivo, interact with one or more molecules, such as but not limited to, peptides, proteins, hormones, cofactors and nucleic acids.
  • binding partners or marker "substrate”.
  • One necessary embodiment ofthe invention in order to facilitate such screening is the use of a protein encoded by or co ⁇ esponding to marker to identify the protein's natural in vivo binding partners.
  • a protein encoded by or co ⁇ esponding to marker to identify the protein's natural in vivo binding partners.
  • the marker protein is used as "bait protein" in a two-hybrid assay or three-hybrid assay (see, e.g., U.S. Patent No. 5,283,317; Zervos et al, 1993, Cell 72:223-232; Madura et al, 1993, J. Biol. Chem.
  • marker binding partners are also likely to be involved in the propagation of signals by the marker protein or downstream elements of a marker protein-mediated signaling pathway.
  • marker protein binding partners may also be found to be inhibitors ofthe marker protein.
  • the two-hybrid system is based on the modular nature of most transcription factors, which consist of separable DNA-binding and activation domains.
  • the assay utilizes two different DNA constructs.
  • the gene that encodes a marker protein fused to a gene encoding the DNA binding domain of a known transcription factor (e.g., GAL-4).
  • a DNA sequence, from a library of DNA sequences, that encodes an unidentified protein (“prey” or “sample") is fused to a gene that codes for the activation domain ofthe known transcription factor. If the "bait” and the "prey” proteins are able to interact, in vivo, forming a marker- dependent complex, the DNA-binding and activation domains ofthe transcription factor are brought into close proximity.
  • reporter gene e.g., LacZ
  • a reporter gene e.g., LacZ
  • Expression ofthe reporter gene can be readily detected and cell colonies containing the functional transcription factor can be isolated and used to obtain the cloned gene which encodes the protein which interacts with the marker protein.
  • assays may be devised through the use ofthe invention for the pu ⁇ ose of identifying compounds which modulate (e.g., affect either positively or negatively) interactions between a marker protein and its substrates and/or binding partners.
  • identifying compounds can include, but are not limited to, molecules such as antibodies, peptides, hormones, oligonucleotides, nucleic acids, and analogs thereof.
  • Such compounds may also be obtained from any available source, including systematic libraries of natural and/or synthetic compounds.
  • the prefe ⁇ ed assay components for use in this embodiment is an cervical cancer marker protein identified herein, the known binding partner and/or substrate of same, and the test compound. Test compounds can be supplied from any source.
  • the basic principle ofthe assay systems used to identify compounds that interfere with the interaction between the marker protein and its binding partner involves preparing a reaction mixture containing the marker protein and its binding partner under conditions and for a time sufficient to allow the two products to interact and bind, thus forming a complex.
  • the reaction mixture is prepared in the presence and absence ofthe test compound.
  • the test compound can be initially included in the reaction mixture, or can be added at a time subsequent to the addition ofthe marker protein and its binding partner. Control reaction mixtures are incubated without the test compound or with a placebo. The formation of any complexes between the marker protein and its binding partner is then detected.
  • the formation of a complex in the control reaction indicates that the compound interferes with the interaction ofthe marker protein and its binding partner. Conversely, the formation of more complex in the presence of compound than in the control reaction indicates that the compound may enhance interaction ofthe marker protein and its binding partner.
  • the assay for compounds that interfere with the interaction ofthe marker protein with its binding partner may be conducted in a heterogeneous or homogeneous format. Heterogeneous assays involve anchoring either the marker protein or its binding partner onto a solid phase and detecting complexes anchored to the solid phase at the end ofthe reaction. In homogeneous assays, the entire reaction is carried out in a liquid phase.
  • test compounds that interfere with the interaction between the marker proteins and the binding partners can be identified by conducting the reaction in the presence ofthe test substance, i.e., by adding the test substance to the reaction mixture prior to or simultaneously with the marker and its interactive binding partner.
  • test compounds that disrupt preformed complexes e.g., compounds with higher binding constants that displace one ofthe components from the complex, can be tested by adding the test compound to the reaction mixture after complexes have been formed.
  • either the marker protein or its binding partner is anchored onto a solid surface or matrix, while the other co ⁇ esponding non- anchored component may be labeled, either directly or indirectly.
  • microtitre plates are often utilized for this approach.
  • the anchored species can be immobilized by a number of methods, either non-covalent or covalent, that are typically well known to one who practices the art. Non-covalent attachment can often be accomplished simply by coating the solid surface with a solution ofthe marker protein or its binding partner and drying. Alternatively, an immobilized antibody specific for the assay component to be anchored can be used for this pu ⁇ ose. Such surfaces can often be prepared in advance and stored.
  • a fusion protein can be provided which adds a domain that allows one or both ofthe assay components to be anchored to a matrix.
  • glutathione-S-transferase/marker fusion proteins or glutathione-S- transferase/binding partner can be adsorbed onto glutathione sepharose beads (Sigma Chemical, St. Louis, MO) or glutathione derivatized microtiter plates, which are then combined with the test compound or the test compound and either the non-adsorbed marker or its binding partner, and the mixture incubated under conditions conducive to complex formation (e.g., physiological conditions).
  • the beads or microtiter plate wells are washed to remove any unbound assay components, the immobilized complex assessed either directly or indirectly, for example, as described above.
  • the complexes can be dissociated from the matrix, and the level of marker binding or activity determined using standard techniques.
  • Other techniques for immobilizing proteins on matrices can also be used in the screening assays ofthe invention.
  • either a marker protein or a marker protein binding partner can be immobilized utilizing conjugation of biotin and streptavidin.
  • Biotinylated marker protein or target molecules can be prepared from biotin-NHS (N-hydroxy-succinimide) using techniques known in the art (e.g., biotinylation kit, Pierce Chemicals, Rockford, IL), and immobilized in the wells of streptavidin-coated 96 well plates (Pierce Chemical).
  • biotin-NHS N-hydroxy-succinimide
  • Pierce Chemicals Pierce Chemicals, Rockford, IL
  • immobilized in the wells of streptavidin-coated 96 well plates Piereptavidin-coated 96 well plates
  • the protein-immobilized surfaces can be prepared in advance and stored.
  • the co ⁇ esponding partner ofthe immobilized assay component is exposed to the coated surface with or without the test compound. After the reaction is complete, unreacted assay components are removed (e.g., by washing) and any complexes formed will remain immobilized on the solid surface.
  • the detection of complexes anchored on the solid surface can be accomplished in a number of ways. Where the non-immobilized component is pre-labeled, the detection of label immobilized on the surface indicates that complexes were formed.
  • an indirect label can be used to detect complexes anchored on the surface; e.g., using a labeled antibody specific for the initially non-immobilized species (the antibody, in turn, can be directly labeled or indirectly labeled with, e.g., a labeled anti-Ig antibody).
  • the antibody in turn, can be directly labeled or indirectly labeled with, e.g., a labeled anti-Ig antibody.
  • test compounds which modulate (inhibit or enhance) complex formation or which disrupt preformed complexes can be detected.
  • a homogeneous assay may be used. This is typically a reaction, analogous to those mentioned above, which is conducted in a liquid phase in the presence or absence ofthe test compound. The formed complexes are then separated from unreacted components, and the amount of complex formed is determined. As mentioned for heterogeneous assay systems, the order of addition of reactants to the liquid phase can yield information about which test compounds modulate (inhibit or enhance) complex formation and which disrupt preformed complexes. In such a homogeneous assay, the reaction products may be separated from unreacted assay components by any of a number of standard techniques, including but not limited to: differential centrifugation, chromatography, electrophoresis and immunoprecipitation.
  • complexes of molecules may be separated from uncomplexed molecules through a series of centrifugal steps, due to the different sedimentation equilibria of complexes based on their different sizes and densities (see, for example, Rivas, G., and Minton, A.P., Trends Biochem Sci 1993 Aug;18(8):284-7).
  • Standard chromatographic techniques may also be utilized to separate complexed molecules from uncomplexed ones. For example, gel filtration chromatography separates molecules based on size, and through the utilization of an appropriate gel filtration resin in a column format, for example, the relatively larger complex may be separated from the relatively smaller uncomplexed components.
  • the relatively different charge properties ofthe complex as compared to the uncomplexed molecules may be exploited to differentially separate the complex from the remaining individual reactants, for example through the use of ion-exchange chromatography resins.
  • ion-exchange chromatography resins Such resins and chromatographic techniques are well known to one skilled in the art (see, e.g., Heegaard, 1998, J Mol. Recognit. 11:141-148; Hage and Tweed, 1997, J. Chromatogr. B. Biomed. Sci. Appl, 699:499-525).
  • Gel electrophoresis may also be employed to separate complexed molecules from unbound species (see, e.g., Ausubel et al (eds.), In: Cu ⁇ ent Protocols in Molecular Biology, J.
  • the technique of fluorescence energy transfer may be utilized (see, e.g., Lakowicz et al, U.S. Patent No. 5,631,169; Stavrianopoulos et al, U.S. Patent No. 4,868,103).
  • this technique involves the addition of a fluorophore label on a first 'donor' molecule (e.g., marker or test compound) such that its emitted fluorescent energy will be absorbed by a fluorescent label on a second, 'acceptor' molecule (e.g., marker or test compound), which in turn is able to fluoresce due to the absorbed energy.
  • a fluorophore label on a first 'donor' molecule e.g., marker or test compound
  • the 'donor' protein molecule may simply utilize the natural fluorescent energy of tryptophan residues.
  • Labels are chosen that emit different wavelengths of light, such that the 'acceptor' molecule label may be differentiated from that ofthe 'donor'. Since the efficiency of energy transfer between the labels is related to the distance separating the molecules, spatial relationships between the molecules can be assessed.
  • the fluorescent emission ofthe 'acceptor' molecule label in the assay should be maximal.
  • An FET binding event can be conveniently measured through standard fluorometric detection means well known in the art (e.g., using a fluorimeter).
  • a test substance which either enhances or hinders participation of one ofthe species in the preformed complex will result in the generation of a signal variant to that of background. In this way, test substances that modulate interactions between a marker and its binding partner can be identified in controlled assays.
  • modulators of marker expression are identified in a method wherein a cell is contacted with a candidate compound and the expression of marker mRNA or protein in the cell, is determined.
  • the level of expression of marker mRNA or protein in the presence ofthe candidate compound is compared to the level of expression of marker mRNA or protein in the absence ofthe candidate compound.
  • the candidate compound can then be identified as a modulator of marker expression based on this comparison. For example, when expression of marker mRNA or protein is greater (statistically significantly greater) in the presence ofthe candidate compound than in its absence, the candidate compound is identified as a stimulator of marker mRNA or protein expression.
  • the candidate compound when expression of marker mRNA or protein is less (statistically significantly less) in the presence ofthe candidate compound than in its absence, the candidate compound is identified as an inhibitor of marker mRNA or protein expression.
  • the level of marker mRNA or protein expression in the cells can be determined by methods described herein for detecting marker mRNA or protein.
  • the invention pertains to a combination of two or more ofthe assays described herein.
  • a modulating agent can be identified using a cell-based or a cell free assay, and the ability ofthe agent to modulate the activity of a marker protein can be further confirmed in vivo, e.g., in a whole animal model for cellular transformation and/or tumorigenesis.
  • This invention further pertains to novel agents identified by the above- described screening assays. Accordingly, it is within the scope of this invention to further use an agent identified as described herein in an appropriate animal model.
  • an agent identified as described herein e.g., a marker modulating agent, an antisense marker nucleic acid molecule, a marker-specific antibody, or a marker-binding partner
  • an agent identified as described herein can be used in an animal model to determine the efficacy, toxicity, or side effects of treatment with such an agent.
  • an agent identified as described herein can be used in an animal model to determine the mechanism of action of such an agent.
  • this invention pertains to uses of novel agents identified by the above-described screening assays for treatments as described herein.
  • small molecule agents and protein or polypeptide agents depends upon a number of factors within the knowledge of the ordinarily skilled physician, veterinarian, or researcher.
  • the dose(s) of these agents will vary, for example, depending upon the identity, size, and condition ofthe subject or sample being treated, further depending upon the route by which the composition is to be administered, if applicable, and the effect which the practitioner desires the agent to have upon the nucleic acid or polypeptide ofthe invention.
  • Exemplary doses of a small molecule include milligram or microgram amounts per kilogram of subject or sample weight (e.g.
  • Exemplary doses of a protein or polypeptide include gram, milligram or microgram amounts per kilogram of subject or sample weight (e.g. about 1 microgram per kilogram to about 5 grams per kilogram, about 100 micrograms per kilogram to about 500 milligrams per kilogram, or about 1 milligram per kilogram to about 50 milligrams per kilogram). It is furthermore understood that appropriate doses of one of these agents depend upon the potency ofthe agent with respect to the expression or activity to be modulated. Such appropriate doses can be determined using the assays described herein.
  • a physician, veterinarian, or researcher can, for example, prescribe a relatively low dose at first, subsequently increasing the dose until an appropriate response is obtained.
  • the specific dose level for any particular animal subject will depend upon a variety of factors including the activity ofthe specific agent employed, the age, body weight, general health, gender, and diet ofthe subject, the time of administration, the route of administration, the rate of excretion, any drug combination, and the degree of expression or activity to be modulated.
  • a pharmaceutical composition ofthe invention is formulated to be compatible with its intended route of administration.
  • routes of administration include parenteral, e.g., intravenous, intradermal, subcutaneous, oral (e.g., inhalation), transdermal (topical), transmucosal, and rectal administration.
  • Solutions or suspensions used for parenteral, intradermal, or subcutaneous application can include the following components: a sterile diluent such as water for injection, saline solution, fixed oils, polyethylene glycols, glycerine, propylene glycol or other synthetic solvents; antibacterial agents such as benzyl alcohol or methyl parabens; antioxidants such as ascorbic acid or sodium bisulfite; chelating agents such as e hylenediamine- tetraacetic acid; buffers such as acetates, citrates or phosphates and agents for the adjustment of tonicity such as sodium chloride or dextrose. pH can be adjusted with acids or bases, such as hydrochloric acid or sodium hydroxide.
  • a sterile diluent such as water for injection, saline solution, fixed oils, polyethylene glycols, glycerine, propylene glycol or other synthetic solvents
  • antibacterial agents such as benzyl alcohol or methyl parab
  • compositions suitable for injectable use include sterile aqueous solutions (where water soluble) or dispersions and sterile powders for the extemporaneous preparation of sterile injectable solutions or dispersions.
  • suitable carriers include physiological saline, bacteriostatic water, Cremophor EL (BASF; Parsippany, NJ) or phosphate buffered saline (PBS). In all cases, the composition must be sterile and should be fluid to the extent that easy syringability exists.
  • the carrier can be a solvent or dispersion medium containing, for example, water, ethanol, polyol (for example, glycerol, propylene glycol, and liquid polyethylene glycol, and the like), and suitable mixtures thereof.
  • the proper fluidity can be maintained, for example, by the use of a coating such as lecithin, by the maintenance ofthe required particle size in the case of dispersion and by the use of surfactants.
  • Prevention ofthe action of microorganisms can be achieved by various antibacterial and antifungal agents, for example, parabens, chlorobutanol, phenol, ascorbic acid, thimerosal, and the like.
  • isotonic agents for example, sugars, polyalcohols such as mannitol, sorbitol, or sodium chloride in the composition.
  • Prolonged abso ⁇ tion ofthe injectable compositions can be brought about by including in the composition an agent which delays abso ⁇ tion, for example, aluminum monostearate and gelatin.
  • Sterile injectable solutions can be prepared by inco ⁇ orating the active compound (e.g., a polypeptide or antibody) in the required amount in an appropriate solvent with one or a combination of ingredients enumerated above, as required, followed by filtered sterilization.
  • the active compound e.g., a polypeptide or antibody
  • dispersions are prepared by inco ⁇ orating the active compound into a sterile vehicle which contains a basic dispersion medium, and then inco ⁇ orating the required other ingredients from those enumerated above.
  • the prefe ⁇ ed methods of preparation are vacuum drying and freeze-drying which yields a powder ofthe active ingredient plus any additional desired ingredient from a previously sterile-filtered solution thereof.
  • Oral compositions generally include an inert diluent or an edible carrier. They can be enclosed in gelatin capsules or compressed into tablets. For the pvupose of oral therapeutic administration, the active compound can be inco ⁇ orated with excipients and used in the form of tablets, troches, or capsules. Oral compositions can also be prepared using a fluid carrier for use as a mouthwash, wherein the compound in the fluid carrier is applied orally and swished and expectorated or swallowed.
  • compositions can be included as part ofthe composition.
  • the tablets, pills, capsules, troches, and the like can contain any ofthe following ingredients, or compounds of a similar nature: a binder such as microcrystalline cellulose, gum tragacanth or gelatin; an excipient such as starch or lactose, a disintegrating agent such as alginic acid, Primogel, or corn starch; a lubricant such as magnesium stearate or Sterotes; a glidant such as colloidal silicon dioxide; a sweetening agent such as sucrose or saccharin; or a flavoring agent such as peppermint, methyl salicylate, or orange flavoring.
  • a binder such as microcrystalline cellulose, gum tragacanth or gelatin
  • an excipient such as starch or lactose, a disintegrating agent such as alginic acid, Primogel, or corn starch
  • a lubricant such as magnesium stearate or Sterotes
  • the compounds are delivered in the form of an aerosol spray from a pressurized container or dispenser which contains a suitable propellant, e.g., a gas such as carbon dioxide, or a nebulizer.
  • a suitable propellant e.g., a gas such as carbon dioxide, or a nebulizer.
  • Systemic administration can also be by transmucosal or transdermal means.
  • penetrants appropriate to the barrier to be permeated are used in the formulation.
  • penetrants are generally known in the art, and include, for example, for transmucosal administration, detergents, bile salts, and fusidic acid derivatives.
  • Transmucosal administration can be accomplished through the use of nasal sprays or suppositories.
  • the active compounds are formulated into ointments, salves, gels, or creams as generally known in the art.
  • the compounds can also be prepared in the form of suppositories (e.g., with conventional suppository bases such as cocoa butter and other glycerides) or retention enemas for rectal delivery.
  • suppositories e.g., with conventional suppository bases such as cocoa butter and other glycerides
  • retention enemas for rectal delivery.
  • the active compounds are prepared with carriers that will protect the compound against rapid elimination from the body, such as a controlled release formulation, including implants and microencapsulated delivery systems.
  • a controlled release formulation including implants and microencapsulated delivery systems.
  • Biodegradable, biocompatible polymers can be used, such as ethylene vinyl acetate, polyanhydrides, polyglycolic acid, collagen, polyorthoesters, and polylactic acid.
  • Dosage unit form refers to physically discrete units suited as unitary dosages for the subject to be treated; each unit containing a predetermined quantity of active compound calculated to produce the desired therapeutic effect in association with the required pharmaceutical carrier.
  • the specification for the dosage unit forms ofthe invention are dictated by and directly dependent on the unique characteristics ofthe active compound and the particular therapeutic effect to be achieved, and the limitations inherent in the art of compounding such an active compound for the treatment of individuals.
  • the prefe ⁇ ed dosage is 0.1 mg/kg to 100 mg/kg of body weight (generally 10 mg/kg to 20 mg/kg). If the antibody is to act in the brain, a dosage of 50 mg/kg to 100 mg/kg is usually appropriate. Generally, partially human antibodies and fully human antibodies have a longer half-life within the human body than other antibodies. Accordingly, lower dosages and less frequent administration is often possible. Modifications such as lipidation can be used to stabilize antibodies and to enhance uptake and tissue penetration (e.g., into the cervical epithelium). A method for lipidation of antibodies is described by Cruikshank et al. (1997) J. Acquired Immune Deficiency Syndromes and Human Retrovirology 14:193.
  • the invention also provides vaccine compositions for the prevention and/or treatment of cervical cancer.
  • the invention provides cervical cancer vaccine compositions in which a protein of a marker of Table 1, or a combination of proteins of the markers of Table 1, are introduced into a subject in order to stimulate an immune response against the cervical cancer.
  • the invention also provides cervical cancer vaccine compositions in which a gene expression construct, which expresses a marker or fragment of a marker identified in Table 1, is introduced into the subject such that a protein or fragment of a protein encoded by a marker of Table 1 is produced by transfected cells in the subject at a higher than normal level and elicits an immune response.
  • a cervical cancer vaccine is provided and employed as an immunotherapeutic agent for the prevention of cervical cancer.
  • a cervical cancer vaccine is provided and employed as an immunotherapeutic agent for the treatment of cervical cancer.
  • a cervical cancer vaccine comprised ofthe proteins ofthe markers of Table 1, may be employed for the prevention and/or treatment of cervical cancer in a subject by administering the vaccine by a variety of routes, e.g., intradermally, subcutaneously, or intramuscularly.
  • the cervical cancer vaccine can be administered together with adjuvants and/or immunomodulators to boost the activity ofthe vaccine and the subject's response.
  • devices and/or compositions containing the vaccine, suitable for sustained or intermittent release could be, implanted in the body or topically applied thereto for the relatively slow release of such materials into the body.
  • the cervical cancer vaccine can be introduced along with immunomodulatory compounds, which can alter the type of immune response produced in order to produce a response which will be more effective in eliminating the cancer.
  • a cervical cancer vaccine comprised of an expression construct ofthe markers of Table 1, may be introduced by injection into muscle or by coating onto microprojectiles and using a device designed for the pu ⁇ ose to fire the projectiles at high speed into the skin. The cells ofthe subject will then express the protein(s) or fragments of proteins ofthe markers of Table 1 and induce an immune response.
  • the cervical cancer vaccine may be introduced along with expression constructs for immunomodulatory molecules, such as cytokines, which may increase the immune response or modulate the type of immune response produced in order to produce a response which will be more effective in eliminating the cancer.
  • the marker nucleic acid molecules can be inserted into vectors and used as gene therapy vectors.
  • Gene therapy vectors can be delivered to a subject by, for example, intravenous injection, local administration (U.S. Patent 5,328,470), or by stereotactic injection (see, e.g., Chen et al, 1994, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 91:3054- 3057).
  • the pharmaceutical preparation ofthe gene therapy vector can include the gene therapy vector in an acceptable diluent, or can comprise a slow release matrix in which the gene delivery vehicle is imbedded.
  • the pharmaceutical preparation can include one or more cells which produce the gene delivery system.
  • compositions can be included in a container, pack, or dispenser together with instructions for administration.
  • the present invention pertains to the field of predictive medicine in which diagnostic assays, prognostic assays, pharmacogenomics, and monitoring clinical trails are used for prognostic (predictive) pu ⁇ oses to thereby treat an individual prophylactically. Accordingly, one aspect ofthe present invention relates to diagnostic assays for determining the level of expression of one or more marker proteins or nucleic acids, in order to determine whether an individual is at risk of developing cervical cancer. Such assays can be used for prognostic or predictive pu ⁇ oses to thereby prophylactically treat an individual prior to the onset ofthe cancer.
  • Yet another aspect ofthe invention pertains to monitoring the influence of agents (e.g., drugs or other compounds administered either to inhibit cervical cancer or to treat or prevent any other disorder ⁇ i.e. in order to understand any cervical carcinogenic effects that such treatment may have ⁇ ) on the expression or activity of a marker ofthe invention in clinical trials.
  • agents e.g., drugs or other compounds administered either to inhibit cervical cancer or to treat or prevent any other disorder ⁇ i.e. in order to understand any cervical carcinogenic effects that such treatment may have ⁇
  • agents e.g., drugs or other compounds administered either to inhibit cervical cancer or to treat or prevent any other disorder ⁇ i.e. in order to understand any cervical carcinogenic effects that such treatment may have ⁇
  • An exemplary method for detecting the presence or absence of a marker protein or nucleic acid in a biological sample involves obtaining a biological sample (e.g. a cervical-associated body fluid) from a test subject and contacting the biological sample with a compound or an agent capable of detecting the polypeptide or nucleic acid (e.g., mRNA, genomic DNA, or cDNA).
  • a biological sample e.g. a cervical-associated body fluid
  • a compound or an agent capable of detecting the polypeptide or nucleic acid e.g., mRNA, genomic DNA, or cDNA.
  • the detection methods ofthe invention can thus be used to detect mRNA, protein, cDNA, or genomic DNA, for example, in a biological sample in vitro as well as in vivo.
  • in vitro techniques for detection of mRNA include Northern hybridizations and in situ hybridizations.
  • In vitro techniques for detection of a marker protein include enzyme linked immunosorbent assays (ELISAs), Western blots, immunoprecipitations and immunofluorescence.
  • In vitro techniques for detection of genomic DNA include Southern hybridizations.
  • in vivo techniques for detection of a marker protein include introducing into a subject a labeled antibody directed against the protein or fragment thereof.
  • the antibody can be labeled with a radioactive marker whose presence and location in a subject can be detected by standard imaging techniques.
  • a general principle of such diagnostic and prognostic assays involves preparing a sample or reaction mixture that may contain a marker, and a probe, under appropriate conditions and for a time sufficient to allow the marker and probe to interact and bind, thus forming a complex that can be removed and/or detected in the reaction mixture.
  • These assays can be conducted in a variety of ways. For example, one method to conduct such an assay would involve anchoring the marker or probe onto a solid phase support, also refe ⁇ ed to as a substrate, and detecting target marker/probe complexes anchored on the solid phase at the end of the reaction.
  • a sample from a subject which is to be assayed for presence and/or concentration of marker, can be anchored onto a carrier or solid phase support.
  • the reverse situation is possible, in which the probe can be anchored to a solid phase and a sample from a subject can be allowed to react as an unanchored component ofthe assay.
  • biotinylated assay components can be prepared from biotin-NHS (N-hydroxy-succinimide) using techniques known in the art (e.g., biotinylation kit, Pierce Chemicals, Rockford, IL), and immobilized in the wells of streptavidin-coated 96 well plates (Pierce Chemical).
  • biotin-NHS N-hydroxy-succinimide
  • the surfaces with immobilized assay components can be prepared in advance and stored.
  • Suitable carriers or solid phase supports for such assays include any material capable of binding the class of molecule to which the marker or probe belongs.
  • Well-known supports or carriers include, but are not limited to, glass, polystyrene, nylon, polypropylene, nylon, polyethylene, dextran, amylases, natural and modified celluloses, polyacrylamides, gabbros, and magnetite.
  • the non-immobilized component is added to the solid phase upon which the second component is anchored.
  • uncomplexed components may be removed (e.g., by washing) under conditions such that any complexes formed will remain immobilized upon the solid phase.
  • the detection of marker/probe complexes anchored to the solid phase can be accomplished in a number of methods outlined herein.
  • the probe when it is the unanchored assay component, can be labeled for the pu ⁇ ose of detection and readout ofthe assay, either directly or indirectly, with detectable labels discussed herein and which are well-known to one skilled in the art.
  • marker/probe complex formation without further manipulation or labeling of either component (marker or probe), for example by utilizing the technique of fluorescence energy transfer (see, for example, Lakowicz et al, U.S. Patent No. 5,631,169; Stavrianopoulos, et al, U.S. Patent No. 4,868,103).
  • a fluorophore label on the first, 'donor' molecule is selected such that, upon excitation with incident light of appropriate wavelength, its emitted fluorescent energy will be absorbed by a fluorescent label on a second 'acceptor' molecule, which in turn is able to fluoresce due to the absorbed energy.
  • the 'donor' protein molecule may simply utilize the natural fluorescent energy of tryptophan residues. Labels are chosen that emit different wavelengths of light, such that the 'acceptor' molecule label may be differentiated from that ofthe 'donor'. Since the efficiency of energy transfer between the labels is related to the distance separating the molecules, spatial relationships between the molecules can be assessed. In a situation in which binding occurs between the molecules, the fluorescent emission ofthe 'acceptor' molecule label in the assay should be maximal. An FET binding event can be conveniently measured through standard fluorometric detection means well known in the art (e.g., using a fluorimeter).
  • determination ofthe ability of a probe to recognize a marker can be accomplished without labeling either assay component (probe or marker) by utilizing a technology such as real-time Biomolecular Interaction Analysis (BIA) (see, e.g., Sjolander, S. and Urbaniczky, C, 1991, Anal. Chem. 63:2338-2345 and Szabo et al, 1995, Curr. Opin. Struct. Biol. 5:699-705).
  • BIOA Biomolecular Interaction Analysis
  • surface plasmon resonance is a technology for studying biospecific interactions in real time, without labeling any ofthe interactants (e.g., BIAcore). Changes in the mass at the binding surface (indicative of a binding event) result in alterations ofthe refractive index of light near the surface (the optical phenomenon of surface plasmon resonance (SPR)), resulting in a detectable signal which can be used as an indication of real-time reactions between biological molecules.
  • SPR surface plasmon resonance
  • analogous diagnostic and prognostic assays can be conducted with marker and probe as solutes in a liquid phase.
  • the complexed marker and probe are separated from uncomplexed components by any of a number of standard techniques, including but not limited to: differential centrifugation, chromatography, electrophoresis and immunoprecipitation.
  • differential centrifugation marker/probe complexes may be separated from uncomplexed assay components through a series of centrifugal steps, due to the different sedimentation equilibria of complexes based on their different sizes and densities (see, for example, Rivas, G., and Minton, A.P., 1993, Trends Biochem Sci.
  • Standard chromatographic techniques may also be utilized to separate complexed molecules from uncomplexed ones.
  • gel filtration chromatography separates molecules based on size, and through the utilization of an appropriate gel filtration resin in a column format, for example, the relatively larger complex may be separated from the relatively smaller uncomplexed components.
  • the relatively different charge properties ofthe marker/probe complex as compared to the uncomplexed components may be exploited to differentiate the complex from uncomplexed components, for example through the utilization of ion-exchange chromatography resins.
  • Such resins and chromatographic techniques are well known to one skilled in the art (see, e.g., Heegaard, N.H., 1998, J. Mol. Recognit.
  • Gel electrophoresis may also be employed to separate complexed assay components from unbound components (see, e.g., Ausubel et al, ed., Current Protocols in Molecular Biology, John Wiley & Sons, New York, 1987-1999). In this technique, protein or nucleic acid complexes are separated based on size or charge, for example. In order to maintain the binding interaction during the electrophoretic process, non-denaturing gel matrix materials and conditions in the absence of reducing agent are typically prefe ⁇ ed.
  • the level of marker mRNA can be determined both by in situ and by in vitro formats in a biological sample using methods known in the art.
  • biological sample is intended to include tissues, cells, biological fluids and isolates thereof, isolated from a subject, as well as tissues, cells and fluids present within a subject. Many expression detection methods use isolated RNA.
  • RNA isolation technique that does not select against the isolation of mRNA can be utilized for the purification of RNA from cervical cells (see, e.g., Ausubel et al, ed., Current Protocols in Molecular Biology, John Wiley & Sons, New York 1987-1999). Additionally, large numbers of tissue samples can readily be processed using techniques well known to those of skill in the art, such as, for example, the single-step RNA isolation process of Chomczynski (1989, U.S. Patent No. 4,843,155).
  • the isolated mRNA can be used in hybridization or amplification assays that include, but are not limited to, Southern or Northern analyses, polymerase chain reaction analyses and probe a ⁇ ays.
  • One prefe ⁇ ed diagnostic method for the detection of mRNA levels involves contacting the isolated mRNA with a nucleic acid molecule (probe) that can hybridize to the mRNA encoded by the gene being detected.
  • the nucleic acid probe can be, for example, a full-length cDNA, or a portion thereof, such as an oligonucleotide of at least 7, 15, 30, 50, 100, 250 or 500 nucleotides in length and sufficient to specifically hybridize under stringent conditions to a mRNA or genomic DNA encoding a marker ofthe present invention.
  • Other suitable probes for use in the diagnostic assays ofthe invention are described herein. Hybridization of an mRNA with the probe indicates that the marker in question is being expressed.
  • the mRNA is immobilized on a solid surface and contacted with a probe, for example by running the isolated mRNA on an agarose gel and transferring the mRNA from the gel to a membrane, such as nitrocellulose.
  • the probe(s) are immobilized on a solid surface and the mRNA is contacted with the probe(s), for example, in an Affymetrix gene chip a ⁇ ay.
  • a skilled artisan can readily adapt known mRNA detection methods for use in detecting the level of mRNA encoded by the markers of the present invention.
  • An alternative method for determining the level of mRNA marker in a sample involves the process of nucleic acid amplification, e.g., by rtPCR (the experimental embodiment set forth in Mullis, 1987, U.S. Patent No. 4,683,202), ligase chain reaction (Barany, 1991, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA, 88:189-193), self sustained sequence replication (Guatelli et al, 1990, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 87:1874-1878), transcriptional amplification system (Kwoh et al, 1989, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci.
  • amplification primers are defined as being a pair of nucleic acid molecules that can anneal to 5' or 3' regions of a gene (plus and minus strands, respectively, or vice-versa) and contain a short region in between.
  • amplification primers are from about 10 to 30 nucleotides in length and flank a region from about 50 to 200 nucleotides in length. Under appropriate conditions and with appropriate reagents, such primers permit the amplification of a nucleic acid molecule comprising the nucleotide sequence flanked by the primers.
  • mRNA does not need to be isolated from the cervical cells prior to detection.
  • a cell or tissue sample is prepared/processed using known histological methods. The sample is then immobilized on a support, typically a glass slide, and then contacted with a probe that can hybridize to mRNA that encodes the marker.
  • determinations may be based on the normalized expression level ofthe marker.
  • Expression levels are normalized by co ⁇ ecting the absolute expression level of a marker by comparing its expression to the expression of a gene that is not a marker, e.g., a housekeeping gene that is constitutively expressed. Suitable genes for normalization include housekeeping genes such as the actin gene, or epithelial cell-specific genes. This normalization allows the comparison ofthe expression level in one sample, e.g., a patient sample, to another sample, e.g., a non- cervical cancer sample, or between samples from different sources. Alternatively, the expression level can be provided as a relative expression level.
  • the level of expression ofthe marker is determined for 10 or more samples of normal versus cancer cell isolates, preferably 50 or more samples, prior to the determination ofthe expression level for the sample in question.
  • the mean expression level of each ofthe genes assayed in the larger number of samples is determined and this is used as a baseline expression level for the marker.
  • the expression level ofthe marker determined for the test sample (absolute level of expression) is then divided by the mean expression value obtained for that marker. This provides a relative expression level.
  • the samples used in the baseline determination will be from cervical cancer or from non-cervical cancer cells of cervical tissue.
  • the choice ofthe cell source is dependent on the use ofthe relative expression level. Using expression found in normal tissues as a mean expression score aids in validating whether the marker assayed is cervical specific (versus normal cells).
  • the mean expression value can be revised, providing improved relative expression values based on accumulated data. Expression data from cervical cells provides a means for grading the severity ofthe cervical cancer state.
  • a marker protein is detected.
  • a prefe ⁇ ed agent for detecting marker protein ofthe invention is an antibody capable of binding to such a protein or a fragment thereof, preferably an antibody with a detectable label.
  • Antibodies can be polyclonal, or more preferably, monoclonal. An intact antibody, or a fragment or derivative thereof (e.g. , Fab or F(ab') 2 ) can be used.
  • labeled with regard to the probe or antibody, is intended to encompass direct labeling ofthe probe or antibody by coupling (i.e., physically linking) a detectable substance to the probe or antibody, as well as indirect labeling ofthe probe or antibody by reactivity with another reagent that is directly labeled.
  • indirect labeling include detection of a primary antibody using a fluorescently labeled secondary antibody and end-labeling of a DNA probe with biotin such that it can be detected with fluorescently labeled sfreptavidin.
  • Proteins from cervical cells can be isolated using techniques that are well known to those of skill in the art.
  • the protein isolation methods employed can, for example, be such as those described in Harlow and Lane (Harlow and Lane, 1988, Antibodies: A Laboratory Manual, Cold Spring Harbor Laboratory Press, Cold Spring Harbor, New York).
  • a variety of formats can be employed to determine whether a sample contains a protein that binds to a given antibody.
  • formats include, but are not limited to, enzyme immunoassay (EIA), radioimmunoassay (RIA), Western blot analysis and enzyme linked immunoabsorbant assay (ELISA).
  • EIA enzyme immunoassay
  • RIA radioimmunoassay
  • ELISA enzyme linked immunoabsorbant assay
  • antibodies, or antibody fragments or derivatives can be used in methods such as Western blots or immunofluorescence techniques to detect the expressed proteins.
  • Suitable solid phase supports or carriers include any support capable of binding an antigen or an antibody.
  • Well-known supports or carriers include glass, polystyrene, polypropylene, polyethylene, dextran, nylon, amylases, natural and modified celluloses, polyacrylamides, gabbros, and magnetite.
  • protein isolated from cervical cells can be run on a polyacrylamide gel electrophoresis and immobilized onto a solid phase support such as nitrocellulose.
  • the support can then be washed with suitable buffers followed by treatment with the detectably labeled antibody.
  • the solid phase support can then be washed with the buffer a second time to remove unbound antibody.
  • the amount of bound label on the solid support can then be detected by conventional means.
  • kits for detecting the presence of a marker protein or nucleic acid in a biological sample can be used to determine if a subject is suffering from or is at increased risk of developing cervical cancer.
  • the kit can comprise a labeled compound or agent capable of detecting a marker protein or nucleic acid in a biological sample and means for determining the amount ofthe protein or mRNA in the sample (e.g., an antibody which binds the protein or a fragment thereof, or an oligonucleotide probe which binds to DNA or mRNA encoding the protein).
  • Kits can also include instructions for inte ⁇ reting the results obtained using the kit.
  • the kit can comprise, for example: (1) a first antibody (e.g., attached to a solid support) which binds to a marker protein; and, optionally, (2) a second, different antibody which binds to either the protein or the first antibody and is conjugated to a detectable label.
  • a first antibody e.g., attached to a solid support
  • a second, different antibody which binds to either the protein or the first antibody and is conjugated to a detectable label.
  • the kit can comprise, for example: (1) an oligonucleotide, e.g., a detectably labeled oligonucleotide, which hybridizes to a nucleic acid sequence encoding a marker protein or (2) a pair of primers useful for amplifying a marker nucleic acid molecule.
  • the kit can also comprise, e.g., a buffering agent, a preservative, or a protein stabilizing agent.
  • the kit can further comprise components necessary for detecting the detectable label (e.g., an enzyme or a substrate).
  • the kit can also contain a control sample or a series of control samples which can be assayed and compared to the test sample.
  • Each component ofthe kit can be enclosed within an individual container and all ofthe various containers can be within a single package, along with instructions for inte ⁇ reting the results ofthe assays performed using the kit.
  • the markers ofthe invention are also useful as pharmacogenomic markers.
  • a "pharmacogenomic marker” is an objective biochemical marker whose expression level co ⁇ elates with a specific clinical drug response or susceptibility in a patient (see, e.g., McLeod et al. (1999) Eur. J. Cancer 35(12): 1650- 1652).
  • the presence or quantity ofthe pharmacogenomic marker expression is related to the predicted response ofthe patient and more particularly the patient's tumor to therapy with a specific drug or class of drugs.
  • a drug therapy which is most appropriate for the patient, or which is predicted to have a greater degree of success, may be selected. For example, based on the presence or quantity of RNA or protein encoded by specific tumor markers in a patient, a drug or course of treatment may be selected that is optimized for the treatment ofthe specific tumor likely to be present in the patient.
  • the use of pharmacogenomic markers therefore permits selecting or designing the most appropriate treatment for each cancer patient without trying different drugs or regimes.
  • G6PD glucose-6-phosphate dehydrogenase
  • the activity of drug metabolizing enzymes is a major determinant of both the intensity and duration of drug action.
  • the gene coding for CYP2D6 is highly polymo ⁇ hic and several mutations have been identified in PM, which all lead to the absence of functional CYP2D6. Poor metabolizers of CYP2D6 and CYP2C19 quite frequently experience exaggerated drug response and side effects when they receive standard doses. If a metabolite is the active therapeutic moiety, a PM will show no therapeutic response, as demonstrated for the analgesic effect of codeine mediated by its CYP2D6-formed metabolite mo ⁇ hine. The other extreme are the so called ultra-rapid metabolizers who do not respond to standard doses. Recently, the molecular basis of ultra-rapid metabolism has been identified to be due to CYP2D6 gene amplification.
  • the level of expression of a marker ofthe invention in an individual can be determined to thereby select appropriate agent(s) for therapeutic or prophylactic treatment ofthe individual.
  • pharmacogenetic studies can be used to apply genotyping of polymo ⁇ hic alleles encoding drug-metabolizing enzymes to the identification of an individual's drug responsiveness phenotype. This knowledge, when applied to dosing or drug selection, can avoid adverse reactions or therapeutic failure and thus enhance therapeutic or prophylactic efficiency when treating a subject with a modulator of expression of a marker of the invention.
  • Monitoring the influence of agents (e.g., drug compounds) on the level of expression of a marker ofthe invention can be applied not only in basic drug screening, but also in clinical trials.
  • agents e.g., drug compounds
  • the effectiveness of an agent to affect marker expression can be monitored in clinical trials of subjects receiving treatment for cervical cancer.
  • the present invention provides a method for monitoring the effectiveness of treatment of a subject with an agent (e.g., an agonist, antagonist, peptidomimetic, protein, peptide, nucleic acid, small molecule, or other drug candidate) comprising the steps of (i) obtaining a pre-administration sample from a subject prior to administration ofthe agent; (ii) detecting the level of expression of one or more selected markers ofthe invention in the pre-administration sample; (iii) obtaining one or more post-administration samples from the subject; (iv) detecting the level of expression ofthe marker(s) in the post-administration samples; (v) comparing the level of expression ofthe marker(s) in the pre-administration sample with the level of expression ofthe marker(s) in the post-administration sample or samples; and (vi) altering the administration ofthe agent to the subject accordingly.
  • an agent e.g., an agonist, antagonist, peptidomimetic, protein, peptide, nucleic acid, small molecule, or other drug candidate
  • Electronic apparatus readable media comprising a marker ofthe present invention is also provided.
  • electronic apparatus readable media refers to any suitable medium for storing, holding or containing data or information that can be read and accessed directly by an electronic apparatus.
  • Such media can include, but are not limited to: magnetic storage media, such as floppy discs, hard disc storage medium, and magnetic tape; optical storage media such as compact disc; electronic storage media such as RAM, ROM, EPROM, EEPROM and the like; general hard disks and hybrids of these categories such as magnetic/optical storage media.
  • the medium is adapted or configured for having recorded thereon a marker ofthe present invention.
  • the term "electronic apparatus” is intended to include any suitable computing or processing apparatus or other device configured or adapted for storing data or information.
  • Examples of electronic apparatus suitable for use with the present invention include stand-alone computing apparatus; networks, including a local area network (LAN), a wide area network (WAN) Internet, Intranet, and Extranet; electronic appliances such as a personal digital assistants (PDAs), cellular phone, pager and the like; and local and distributed processing systems.
  • “recorded” refers to a process for storing or encoding information on the electronic apparatus readable medium. Those skilled in the art can readily adopt any ofthe presently known methods for recording information on known media to generate manufactures comprising the markers ofthe present invention.
  • the marker nucleic acid sequence can be represented in a word processing text file, formatted in commercially-available software such as WordPerfect and MicroSoft Word, or represented in the form of an ASCII file, stored in a database application, such as DB2, Sybase, Oracle, or the like, as well as in other forms.
  • a database application such as DB2, Sybase, Oracle, or the like, as well as in other forms.
  • Any number of data processor structuring formats e.g., text file or database
  • markers ofthe invention By providing the markers ofthe invention in readable form, one can routinely access the marker sequence information for a variety of piuposes. For example, one skilled in the art can use the nucleotide or amino acid sequences ofthe present invention in readable form to compare a target sequence or target structural motif with the sequence information stored within the data storage means. Search means are used to identify fragments or regions ofthe sequences ofthe invention which match a particular target sequence or target motif.
  • the present invention therefore provides a medium for holding instructions for performing a method for determining whether a subject has cervical cancer or a pre-disposition to cervical cancer, wherein the method comprises the steps of determining the presence or absence of a marker and based on the presence or absence ofthe marker, determimng whether the subject has cervical cancer or a pre-disposition to cervical cancer and/or recommending a particular treatment for cervical cancer or pre- cervical cancer condition.
  • the present invention further provides in an electronic system and/or in a network, a method for determimng whether a subject has cervical cancer or a pre- disposition to cervical cancer associated with a marker wherein the method comprises the steps of determining the presence or absence ofthe marker, and based on the presence or absence ofthe marker, determining whether the subject has cervical cancer or a pre-disposition to cervical cancer, and/or recommending a particular treatment for the cervical cancer or pre-cervical cancer condition.
  • the method may further comprise the step of receiving phenotypic information associated with the subject and/or acquiring from a network phenotypic information associated with the subject.
  • the present invention also provides in a network, a method for determining whether a subject has cervical cancer or a pre-disposition to cervical cancer associated with a marker, said method comprising the steps of receiving information associated with the marker receiving phenotypic information associated with the subject, acquiring information from the network co ⁇ esponding to the marker and/or cervical cancer, and based on one or more ofthe phenotypic information, the marker, and the acquired information, determining whether the subject has a cervical cancer or a predisposition to cervical cancer.
  • the method may further comprise the step of recommending a particular treatment for the cervical cancer or pre-cervical cancer condition.
  • the present invention also provides a business method for determining whether a subject has cervical cancer or a pre-disposition to cervical cancer, said method comprising the steps of receiving information associated with the marker, receiving phenotypic information associated with the subject, acquiring information from the network co ⁇ esponding to the marker and/or cervical cancer, and based on one or more ofthe phenotypic information, the marker, and the acquired information, determining whether the subject has cervical cancer or a pre-disposition to cervical cancer.
  • the method may further comprise the step of recommending a particular treatment for the cervical cancer or pre-cervical cancer condition.
  • the invention also includes an a ⁇ ay comprising a marker ofthe present invention.
  • the a ⁇ ay can be used to assay expression of one or more genes in the array.
  • the a ⁇ ay can be used to assay gene expression in a tissue to ascertain tissue specificity of genes in the a ⁇ ay. In this manner, up to about 7600 genes can be simultaneously assayed for expression. This allows a profile to be developed showing a battery of genes specifically expressed in one or more tissues.
  • the invention allows the quantitation of gene expression.
  • tissue specificity but also the level of expression of a battery of genes in the tissue is ascertainable.
  • genes can be grouped on the basis of their tissue expression perse and level of expression in that tissue. This is useful, for example, in ascertaining the relationship of gene expression between or among tissues.
  • one tissue can be perturbed and the effect on gene expression in a second tissue can be determined.
  • the effect of one cell type on another cell type in response to a biological stimulus can be determined.
  • Such a determination is useful, for example, to know the effect of cell-cell interaction at the level of gene expression.
  • the invention provides an assay to determine the molecular basis ofthe undesirable effect and thus provides the opportunity to co-administer a counteracting agent or otherwise treat the undesired effect.
  • undesirable biological effects can be determined at the molecular level.
  • the effects of an agent on expression of other than the target gene can be ascertained and counteracted.
  • the a ⁇ ay can be used to monitor the time course of expression of one or more genes in the array. This can occur in various biological contexts, as disclosed herein, for example development of cervical cancer, progression of cervical cancer, and processes, such a cellular transformation associated with cervical cancer.
  • the a ⁇ ay is also useful for ascertaining the effect ofthe expression of a gene on the expression of other genes in the same cell or in different cells. This provides, for example, for a selection of alternate molecular targets for therapeutic intervention if the ultimate or downstream target cannot be regulated.
  • the a ⁇ ay is also useful for ascertaining differential expression patterns of one or more genes in normal and abnormal cells. This provides a battery of genes that could serve as a molecular target for diagnosis or therapeutic intervention.
  • the markers ofthe invention may serve as surrogate markers for one or more disorders or disease states or for conditions leading up to disease states, and in particular, cervical cancer.
  • a "su ⁇ ogate marker” is an objective biochemical marker which co ⁇ elates with the absence or presence of a disease or disorder, or with the progression of a disease or disorder (e.g. , with the presence or absence of a tumor). The presence or quantity of such markers is independent of the disease. Therefore, these markers may serve to indicate whether a particular course of treatment is effective in lessening a disease state or disorder.
  • Su ⁇ ogate markers are of particular use when the presence or extent of a disease state or disorder is difficult to assess through standard methodologies (e.g., early stage tumors), or when an assessment of disease progression is desired before a potentially dangerous clinical endpoint is reached (e.g., an assessment of cardiovascular disease may be made using cholesterol levels as a su ⁇ ogate marker, and an analysis of HIN infection may be made using HIN R ⁇ A levels as a su ⁇ ogate marker, well in advance ofthe undesirable clinical outcomes of myocardial infarction or fully-developed ADDS).
  • Examples ofthe use of su ⁇ ogate markers in the art include: Koomen et al. (2000) J. Mass. Spectrom. 35: 258-264; and James (1994) AIDS Treatment News Archive 209.
  • a "pharmacodynamic marker” is an objective biochemical marker which co ⁇ elates specifically with drug effects.
  • the presence or quantity of a pharmacodynamic marker is not related to the disease state or disorder for which the drug is being administered; therefore, the presence or quantity ofthe marker is indicative ofthe presence or activity ofthe drug in a subject.
  • a pharmacodynamic marker may be indicative ofthe concentration ofthe drug in a biological tissue, in that the marker is either expressed or transcribed or not expressed or transcribed in that tissue in relationship to the level ofthe drug. In this fashion, the distribution or uptake ofthe drug may be monitored by the pharmacodynamic marker.
  • the presence or quantity ofthe pharmacodynamic marker may be related to the presence or quantity of the metabolic product of a drug, such that the presence or quantity ofthe marker is indicative ofthe relative breakdown rate ofthe drug in vivo.
  • Pharmacodynamic markers are of particular use in increasing the sensitivity of detection of drug effects, particularly when the drug is administered in low doses. Since even a small amount of a drug may be sufficient to activate multiple rounds of marker transcription or expression, the amplified marker may be in a quantity which is more readily detectable than the drug itself.
  • the marker may be more easily detected due to the nature ofthe marker itself; for example, using the methods described herein, antibodies may be employed in an immune-based detection system for a protein marker, or marker-specific radiolabeled probes may be used to detect a mR ⁇ A marker.
  • a pharmacodynamic marker may offer mechanism-based prediction of risk due to drug treatment beyond the range of possible direct observations. Examples ofthe use of pharmacodynamic markers in the art include: Matsuda et al. US 6,033,862; Hattis et al. (1991) Env. Health Perspect. 90: 229-238; Schentag (1999) Am. J. Health-Syst. Pharm. 56 Suppl. 3: S21-S24; and Nicolau (1999) Am, J. Health-Syst. Pharm. 56 Suppl. 3: S16- S20.
  • EXAMPLE 1 IDENTIFICATION OF CERVICAL CANCER MARKERS BY cDNA AND TISSUE MICRO ARRAYS
  • RNA samples were collected and snap frozen in liquid nitrogen. The histology and cellular composition of tissues were confirmed before RNA extraction was performed. Total RNA was extracted from the frozen tissues using Trizol Reagent (Life Technologies) followed by a secondary clean up step with Qiagen's RNeasy kit to increase RNA probe labeling efficiency (Qiagen, Valencia CA). Only RNA with a 28S/18S ribosomal RNA ratio of at least 1.0, calculated using Agilent Technologies 2100 Bioanalyzer (Palo Alto, CA), was used in this study.
  • Each filter was hybridized at 65°C for 16 hours with approximately 6xl0 6 counts of labeled probe in a buffer containing 7% sodium dodecyl sulfate (SDS), 250mM Na 3 PO 4 (pH 7.2), 1 mM EDTA, 0.5% Casein-Hammerstein and O.lmg/ml of denatured salmon sperm DNA.
  • SDS sodium dodecyl sulfate
  • 250mM Na 3 PO 4 pH 7.2
  • 1 mM EDTA 0.5% Casein-Hammerstein and O.lmg/ml of denatured salmon sperm DNA.
  • SDS wash buffer 20mM Na 3 PO 4 (pH 7.2), 1 mM EDTA and 4% or 1% SDS
  • Spots were quantitated using an automated a ⁇ ay analysis program, Grid Guru vl.0, developed at Millennium Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Marker scoring algorithm and data analysis
  • the digitized data from each microa ⁇ ay filter was normalized by the median intensity of all spots on that filter.
  • Both a ⁇ ay-based and gene-based hierarchical clustering was performed and visualized using Stanford's Gene Cluster and Tree View software. Differentially expressed genes were ranked by calculating the Marker Score for each gene.
  • the Marker Score To compute Marker Score, the samples were divided into control and tester groups. The starting point for the Marker Score is average fold change (ratio) of the tester samples above the control samples. The score was designed to reflect both the degree of change (the expression ratio) and the number of tester samples showing differential expression, while not being dominated by a small fraction of tester samples with very high values. To reduce this "outlier" effect, genes were treated with expression ratios greater than 10 as not meaningfully different from those with ratios of 10. This desired performance from a Marker Score was accomplished by transforming the testerxontrol expression ratio using an asymptotic compression function before taking the average fold-change across tester samples. A Marker Score has a value of 1 when the testers do not appear to be expressed more highly than the controls, and a value greater than 1 otherwise. A Marker Score cannot exceed a value of 10 for any gene. The Marker Score S g for gene g is therefore computed as the average of compressed testerxontrol ratios:
  • LSIL low-grade squamous intraepithelial lesions
  • HSIL high-grade squamous intraepithelial lesions
  • SCC squamous cell carcinomas
  • ACA adenocarcinomas
  • the cervical tissues were deparaffinized, rehydrated and postfixed with 4% paraformaldehyde in PBS for 15 minutes. After washing with PBS, the tissue microa ⁇ ays were digested with 2ug/ml proteinase K at 37°C for 15 minutes and again incubated with 4% paraformaldehyde/PBS for 10 minutes. Tissue sections were subsequently incubated with 0.2N HCL for 10 minutes, 0.25% acetic anhydride/0.1 mol/L triethanolamine for 10 minutes, and dehydrated with graded ethanol.
  • Antisense probes were labeled with S-UTP in an in vitro transc ⁇ ption reaction (Riboprobe Combination System, Promega, Madison, WI) using 500 ng of linearized plasmid DNA derived from IMAGE clones. Hybridizations were performed at 50°C for 18 hours using probes labeled at 5xl0 7 cpm/ml in lOmM Tris-HCl (pH 7.6) buffer containing 50% formamide, 10% dextran sulfate, lx Denhardt's solution, 0.6 M NaCl, 10 mM DTT, 0.25% SDS and 200 ug/ml tRNA.
  • mRNA transcripts Localization of mRNA transcripts was determined by dipping slides in Kodak NTB2 photoemulsion (Eastman Kodak, Rochester, NY) and exposing for 14-21 days at 4°C. The slides were counterstained using Myers hematoxylin and alcoholic eosin Y.
  • marker scores were calculated for each clone on the 30K cDNA microa ⁇ ay from three marker selection paradigms: 9 SCC vs. control group (9 ectocervix, 3 endocervix and 5 LSIL), 5 HSIL vs. control group, and 3 ACA vs. control group.
  • 9 SCC vs. control group (9 ectocervix, 3 endocervix and 5 LSIL), 5 HSIL vs. control group, and 3 ACA vs. control group.
  • up-regulated genes related to an immune response i.e. immunoglobulins, MHCs
  • MCM 6 was overexpressed in HSILs, squamous cell carcinomas and adenocarcinomas, while Claudin 1 was overexpressed only in squamous cell carcinomas.
  • hierarchical clustering was performed based on the expression profiles across all clinical samples. These overexpressed genes were clustered into two main groups. One group consists mainly of genes that encode either extracellular matrix (ECM) proteins (collagen, laminin, fibronectin) or proteins responsible for cell-ECM interaction or ECM degradation and remodeling (e.g. osteonectin, matrix metalloproteinase, urokinase).
  • ECM extracellular matrix
  • the other cluster contains many genes involved in cell replication and proliferation. Examples include DNA replication licensing factors (MCM 6), topoisomerase 2A, and the oncogene B-Myb.
  • cervical screening evaluates mo ⁇ hological changes of cells exfoliated from cervical epithelium, cells from stroma are unlikely to be present in a Pap test sample.
  • the marker selection was therefore focused on those candidate markers that were differentially expressed in the epithelial cells of cervical dysplasias and invasive tumors.
  • a frequency calculation was performed using all tissue cores on the microa ⁇ ay. The calculation was based on a semi-quantitative, arbitrary scoring method. The signal was scored on a scale from 0 to 3: 0 - no signal; 1 - weak, indeterminate signal; 2 - determinate, weak to moderate signal; 3 - strong to very strong signal.
  • Table 6 shows the results of the scoring for markers of the present invention.
  • a tissue core had to have a signal score of ⁇ .
  • the selected markers are presented in the order of increasing frequency of positive cores for normal cervical tissues. It was found that the frequency of marker elevation is highly co ⁇ elated with the stage of clinical abnormality and varies in a broad range from marker to marker at particular clinical stages.
  • EFI27 for example, had relatively high (>20%) positive cores from normal cervical tissues, whereas markers such as ITGB6 and CLDN1 were relatively lower in normals and started to increase in LSIL and HSIL. The appearance of positive cores for BST2 took place even later in the tumor progression stage, at the transition from high-grade premalignant lesions to invasive disease.
  • RNA samples were prepared from the sample using the Taqman Reverse Transcription Reagents following the manufacturer's instructions (Applied Biosytems). A negative control of RNA without reverse transcriptase was mock reverse transcribed for each RNA sample.
  • Gene expression was measured by TAQMAN® quantitative PCR (Applied Biosystems) in cDNA prepared from a variety of normal and diseased (e.g., cancerous) human tissues or cell lines.
  • Probes were designed by PrimerExpress software (Applied Biosystems) based on the sequence ofthe specific genes and their related transcripts. Each target gene probe was labeled using FAM (6-carboxyfluorescein), and the 18s reference probe was labeled with a different fluorescent dye, VIC. The differential labeling ofthe target gene and internal reference gene thus enabled measurement in the same well. Primer and probes were checked for their sensitivity and specificity for each transcript ofthe specific gene. Forward and reverse primers and the probes for both 18s and the target gene were added to the TAQMAN® Universal PCR Master Mix (Applied Biosystems). Although the final concentration of primer and probe could vary, each was internally consistent within a given experiment.
  • a typical experiment contained lOOnM of forward and reverse primers plus 200nM probe for 18s and 900nM forward and reverse primers plus 250nM probe for the target gene.
  • TAQMAN® matrix experiments were carried out on an ABI PRISM 7700 Sequence Detection System (Applied Biosystems). The thermal cycler conditions were as follows: hold for 2 min at 50°C and 10 min at 95°C, followed by two-step PCR for 40 cycles of 95°C for 15 sec followed by 60°C for 1 min.
  • the threshold cycle (Ct) value is defined as the cycle at which a statistically significant increase in fluorescence is detected. A lower Ct value is indicative of a higher mRNA concentration.
  • Tables 9-13 identify the Sample (Sample #), Tissue Stage, and Expression ofthe target gene.
  • the marker (set forth in Table 1) that was assayed is also identified along with the variant, primer and probe (set forth in Table 7), if applicable.
  • the data co ⁇ esponding to M30A[1] identifies Marker M30A using the forward 1 (Fl), reverse 1 (Rl) and probe 1 (PI) as identified in Table 7.
  • RNA from different samples was pooled to be used as template to generate first strand cDNA.
  • the cervical panel consisted of a cervical tumor pool, a cervical normal pool, an 'other normals' pool and an 'other tumors' pool.
  • the pools consisted of equal amounts of each sample.
  • the ethidium bromide agarose gel pictures ofthe end-point PCR on the tissue panel were scored on a scale of 0-5 (Table 8). Each picture was scored independently by 3 people and the results were compiled. The scores were compared to make sure that there was agreement on the relative intensities ofthe bands and modifications were made where needed. The median ofthe 3 scores was then recorded as the final score.
  • Tables 1 identifies markers ofthe invention (SEQ ID NOs: 1-44), which are designated with a name ("Marker”), the name the gene is commonly known by, if applicable (“Gene Name”), the Sequence Listing identifier ofthe cDNA sequence of a nucleotide transcript encoded by or co ⁇ esponding to the marker (“SEQ LD NO (nts)”), the Sequence Listing identifier ofthe amino acid sequence of a protein encoded by the nucleotide transcript (“SEQ ID NO (AAs)”), and the location ofthe protein coding sequence within the cDNA sequence (“CDS”).
  • Marker the name the gene is commonly known by, if applicable
  • Gene Name the Sequence Listing identifier ofthe cDNA sequence of a nucleotide transcript encoded by or co ⁇ esponding to the marker
  • SEQ ID NO (AAs) the Sequence Listing identifier ofthe amino acid sequence of a protein encoded by the nucleotide transcript
  • CDS location of
  • Tables 2 and 3 list newly-identified nucleotide and amino acid sequences, which are designated with a name ("Marker”), the name the gene is commonly known by, if applicable (“Gene Name”), the Sequence Listing identifier ofthe cDNA sequence of a nucleotide transcript encoded by or co ⁇ esponding to the marker (“SEQ ID NO (nts)”), the Sequence Listing identifier ofthe amino acid sequence of a protein encoded by the nucleotide transcript (“SEQ LD NO (AAs)”), and the location ofthe protein coding sequence within the cDNA sequence (“CDS”).
  • Table 4 identifies markers ofthe present invention and their marker scores in SCC, ACA and HSLL.
  • the markers of Table 4 are designated with a name (“Marker”), the name the gene is commonly known by, if applicable (“Gene Name”), the marker score from the squamous cell carcinomas paradigm (“Score SCC”), the marker score from the adenocarcinomas paradigm (“Score ACA”), and the marker score from the high-grade squamous intraepithelial lesions paradigm (“Score HSIL").
  • Table 5 lists markers identified as overexpressed in cervical cancer by in situ hybridization and indicates the location of marker expression.
  • the markers of Table 5 are designated with a name (“Marker”), the name the gene is commonly known by, if applicable (“Gene Name”), the in situ hybridization signal detected in cervical epithelial cells (“Signal Location”).
  • Table 6 sets forth the differential expression ofthe markers in epithelial cells of cervical dysplasias and invasive tumors.
  • the markers of Table 6 are designated with a name ("Marker”), the name the gene is commonly known by, if applicable (“Gene Name”), and for each marker, the frequency of marker elevation ("frequency") and the number of positives to the number of patients ("# positives/# patients") in normal ectocervical and endocervical cells ("Normal (EC + END)”), the frequency of marker elevation ("frequency”) and the number of positives to the number of patients ("# positives/# patients") in low-grade squamous intraepithelial lesions (“LSIL”), the frequency of marker elevation ("frequency”) and the number of positives to the number of patients (“# positives/# patients”) in high-grade squamous intraepithelial lesions (“HSIL”), and the frequency of marker elevation ("frequency”) and the number of positives to the number of patients (“# positives/# patients”) in squamous
  • Table 7 sets forth gene specific primers. Table 7 identifies the marker, which are designated with a name ("Marker”), the gene specific primers co ⁇ esponding to matching positions for Taqman Primer 1 ("Matching Positions: Taqman Primer 1"), the gene specific primers co ⁇ esponding to matching positions for Taqman Primer 2 ("Matching Positions: Taqman Primer 2"), the gene specific primers co ⁇ esponding to matching positions for Taqman Probe (“Matching Positions: Taqman Probe”), the gene specific primers co ⁇ esponding to matching positions for Endpoint PCR Primer 1 ("Matching Positions: Endpoint PCR Primer 1"), and the gene specific primers co ⁇ esponding to matching positions for Endpoint PCR Primer 1 ("Matching Positions: Endpoint PCR Primer 1").
  • Marker the gene specific primers co ⁇ esponding to matching positions for Taqman Primer 1
  • Table 7 identifies primers in the forward 1 direction (“Fl”); the forward 2 direction (“F2”); the reverse 1 direction (“Rl”); the reverse 2 direction (“R2”), as well as the probes ("PI” designates probe 1; and "P2" designates probe 2).
  • Table 8 sets forth the scoring on a scale of 0-5 of ethidium bromide agarose gel pictures ofthe end-point PCR on the tissue panel.
  • Table 8 identifies markers, which are designated with a name ("Marker”), and the samples used ("Cervical Normal” and “Cervical Tumor”).
  • Tables 9 -13 identify the expression ofthe target gene in each ofthe tissues tested.
  • Tables 9-13 identify the Sample, which is designated with a number ("Sample #"), the tissue stage ofthe sample ("Tissue Stage"), and expression ofthe target gene ("Gene Name”).
  • Tables 9-13 also identify the marker name, co ⁇ esponding to the marker names set forth in Table 1, primer and probe (set forth in Table 7), if applicable, that were assayed. For example, in Table 12, the data co ⁇ esponding to "M30A[1]" identifies Marker M30A using the forward 1 primer (Fl), reverse 1 primer (Rl) and probe 1 (PI) as identified in

Landscapes

  • Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
  • Life Sciences & Earth Sciences (AREA)
  • Chemical & Material Sciences (AREA)
  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Immunology (AREA)
  • Molecular Biology (AREA)
  • Biomedical Technology (AREA)
  • Hematology (AREA)
  • Urology & Nephrology (AREA)
  • General Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
  • Analytical Chemistry (AREA)
  • Biochemistry (AREA)
  • Pathology (AREA)
  • Organic Chemistry (AREA)
  • Medicinal Chemistry (AREA)
  • Cell Biology (AREA)
  • Biotechnology (AREA)
  • Microbiology (AREA)
  • Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • Proteomics, Peptides & Aminoacids (AREA)
  • General Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • Food Science & Technology (AREA)
  • Oncology (AREA)
  • Hospice & Palliative Care (AREA)
  • Zoology (AREA)
  • Genetics & Genomics (AREA)
  • Biophysics (AREA)
  • Bioinformatics & Cheminformatics (AREA)
  • Wood Science & Technology (AREA)
  • Toxicology (AREA)
  • Tropical Medicine & Parasitology (AREA)
  • Gastroenterology & Hepatology (AREA)
  • General Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • General Chemical & Material Sciences (AREA)
  • Pharmacology & Pharmacy (AREA)
  • Nuclear Medicine, Radiotherapy & Molecular Imaging (AREA)
  • Veterinary Medicine (AREA)
  • Public Health (AREA)
  • Animal Behavior & Ethology (AREA)
  • Chemical Kinetics & Catalysis (AREA)

Abstract

The invention relates to nucleic acid molecules and proteins associated with cervical cancer including pre-malignant conditions such as dysplasia. Compositions, kits, and methods for detecting, characterizing, preventing, and treating human cervical cancers are also provided.

Description

COMPOSITIONS, KITS, AND METHODS FOR IDENTIFICATION, ASSESSMENT, PREVENTION, AND THERAPY OF
CERVICAL CANCER
RELATED APPLICATION
The present application claims priority from U.S. provisional patent application serial no. 60/404,770, filed on August 20, 2002, which is expressly incoφorated by reference.
FIELD OF THE INVENTION
The field ofthe invention is cervical cancer, including diagnosis, characterization, management, and therapy of cervical cancer.
BACKGROUND OF THE INVENTION The increased number of cancer cases reported in the United States, and, indeed, around the world, is a major concern. Currently there are only a handful of treatments available for specific types of cancer, and these provide no absolute guarantee of success. In order to be most effective, these treatments require not only an early detection ofthe malignancy, but a reliable assessment ofthe severity ofthe malignancy. Cancer ofthe cervix is one ofthe most common malignancies in women and remains a significant public health problem throughout the world. In the United States alone, invasive cervical cancer accounts for approximately 19% of all gynecological cancers. In 1996, it was estimated that there were 14,700 newly diagnosed cases and 4900 deaths attributed to this disease (American Cancer Society, Cancer Facts & Figures 1996, Atlanta, Ga.: American Cancer Society, 1996). In many developing countries, where mass screening programs are not widely available, the clinical problem is more serious. Worldwide, the number of new cases is estimated to be 471,000 with a four-year survival rate of only 40% (Munoz et al, 1989, Epidemiology of Cervical Cancer In: "Human Papillomavirus", New York, Oxford Press, pp 9-39; National Institutes of Health, Consensus Development Conference Statement on Cervical Cancer, Apr.1-3, 1996). In light of this, cervical cancer remains a highly preventable form of cancer when pre-invasive lesions are detected early. Cytological examination of Papanicolaou-stained cervical smears (also referred to as Pap smears or Pap tests) is currently the principle method for detecting cervical cancer and is the most cost- effective cancer screening test developed to date (Greenberg, M.D., et al, 1995, Clin Obstet Gynecol 38(3): 600-609). It has dramatically decreased the incidence and mortality rates of cervical cancer by more than 70% since it was introduced in the United States and many other countries of the world (Eddy D.M., 1990, Ann. Intern. Med. 113(3): 214-226). The abnormal morphologic changes of Pap tests described by The Bethesda System include ASCUS (atypical squamous cells of undetermined significance), AGUS (atypical glandular cells of undetermined significance), LSIL (low- grade squamous intraepithelial lesion), HSIL (high-grade squamous intraepithelial lesion), and squamous and adenocarcinoma (National Cancer Institute Workshop: The 1988 Bethesda System for reporting cervical/vaginal cytologic diagnosis. JAMA, 262(7): 931-934). The success of Pap tests is attributed mostly to the diagnosis and treatment of precancerous lesions.
Currently, management of patients with HSIL and more advanced diseases is relatively standard. Most women with such lesions undergo colposcopy and appropriately directed biopsies. If the histologic diagnosis is confirmed, ablative or excisional treatment such as electrosurgical loop excision procedure (LEEP), cryosurgery or conization is performed. However, management of ambiguous or low- grade cytological results (ASCUS and LSIL) is very controversial. This is mainly due to the nature of this morphology-based test, which inevitably leads to interobserver variability and some Pap test discordance with histological follow-up. It was reported that the mean sensitivity of primary Pap tests is approximately 58% and the accuracy of a repeat test is only about 66% (Fahey M.T., et al, 1995, Am. J. Epidemiol. 141: 680- 689). The low sensitivity and poor reproducibility have complicated the management of ASCUS and LSIL patients. If an "accelerated repeat Pap test" is recommended for the follow-up of women with primary diagnosis of ASCUS or LSIL, patients will risk delay in diagnosis of potential high-grade lesions. However, if these patients are universally referred to colposcopy, the vast majority of women will be over treated. Only 5-10% of women with ASCUS have high-grade disease upon colposcopy, and more than 80% of LSIL will regress to normal or stay in their current state (Cox, J.T., 2000, Clinics in Laboratory Medicine. 20(2): 303-343, Ostor A.G., 1993, Int. J. Gynecol Pathol 12(2): 186-192).
AGUS represents a much greater risk than ASCUS or LSIL because cytology is less sensitive for this condition and the disease progresses more rapidly (Anderson M.C., 1995, Baillieres Clin. Obstet. Gynecol. 9:105). It was found that 9- 54% of women with AGUS have biopsy-confirmed cervical intraepithelial neoplasias, 0- 8% have biopsy-confirmed adenocarcinoma in situ (AIS), and less than 1-9% have invasive carcinoma (Wright, T.C., et al, 2002, JAMA, 287(16): 2120-2129). Due to the greater risk, all patients with AGUS are referred to colposcopy (Wright, T.C., et al, 2002).
The subjectivity of cervical cytology could be reduced by objective markers that determine the presence and severity of dysplastic cells. Since high-risk human papillomavirus (HPV) infection is strongly associated with cervical cancer development (Walboomers, J.M., et al, 1999, J. Pathol. 189: 12-19), HPV testing using methods like Hybrid Capture II (Digene Diagnostics, Silver Spring, MD) or PCR appears to provide an objective measurement (Wick, M.J., 2000, Clinics in Laboratory Medicine, 20(2): 271-287). However, since the vast majority of HPV infections and the resulting squamous intraepithelial lesions regress spontaneously, especially in young women, HPV testing cannot specifically identify patients whose lesions will persist or progress to invasive carcinoma (Sasieni, P.D., 2000, J. Am. Med. Womens Assoc. 55(4): 216-219, Sasieni, P.D., 2000, Br. J. Cancer, 83(5): 561-565). As reported in the ASCUS-LSIL Triage Study (ALTS), 83% of woman with LSIL Pap results test positive for high-risk HPV types, a level too high to be useful for triage (Human papillomavirus testing for triage of women with cytologic evidence of low-grade squamous intraepithelial lesions: baseline data from a randomized trial. The Atypical Squamous Cells of Undetermined Significance/Low-Grade Squamous Intraepithelial Lesions Triage Study (ALTS) Group, 2000, J. Natl. Cancer 1st. 92:397-402). Although triage using HPV testing significantly improved the sensitivity for detecting HSIL in women with ASCUS Pap results, the specificity was comparable to using conventional cytology (Solomon, D., et al, 2001, J. Natl. Cancer Inst. 93(4): 293-299). A more desirable cervical screening marker would identify all cervical cancers, the majority of HSIL, and the small percentage of true precancers amongst patients with LSIL and ASCUS on Pap. It is now well accepted that cervical carcinogenesis occurs in a step-wise fashion (Ried, T., et al, 1999, Genes Chromosomes Cancer, 25(3): 195-204). The transition of normal epithelium to preneoplastic lesions and invasive carcinoma occurs sequentially. The morphologically defined steps of dysplastic and malignant abnormalities are a reflection of cellular gene alterations during tumorgenesis. It would thus be desirable to provide biomarkers useful for the identification, assessment, prevention and therapy of cervical cancer.
SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION The invention relates to cancer markers (hereinafter "markers" or
"markers ofthe inventions"), which are listed in Table 1. The invention provides nucleic acids and proteins that are encoded by or correspond to the markers (hereinafter "marker nucleic acids" and "marker proteins," respectively). Table 1 provides the sequence identifiers ofthe sequences of such marker nucleic acids and proteins listed in the accompanying Sequence Listing (SEQ ID NOs: 1-44). Table 2 lists newly-identified nucleotide and amino acid sequences. Table 3 lists newly-identified nucleotide sequences. Tables 1-3 provide the sequence identifier numbers ofthe sequences of such marker nucleic acids and proteins listed in the accompanying Sequence Listing, and the gene names ofthe markers. The invention further provides antibodies, antibody derivatives and antibody fragments which bind specifically with such proteins and/or fragments ofthe proteins.
The invention also relates to various methods, reagents and kits for diagnosing, staging, prognosing, monitoring and treating cervical cancer. "Cervical cancer" as used herein includes carcinomas, (e.g., carcinoma in situ, invasive carcinoma, metastatic carcinoma) and pre-malignant conditions, (e.g., dysplasia, including CIN or SIL). In one embodiment, the invention provides a diagnostic method of assessing whether a patient has cervical cancer or has higher than normal risk for developing cervical cancer, comprising the steps of comparing the level of expression of a marker of the invention in a patient sample and the normal level of expression ofthe marker in a control, e.g., a sample from a patient without cervical cancer. A significantly higher level of expression ofthe marker in the patient sample as compared to the normal level is an indication that the patient is afflicted with cervical cancer or has higher than normal risk for developing cervical cancer. According to the invention, the markers are selected such that the positive predictive value ofthe methods ofthe invention is at least about 10%, preferably about 25%o, more preferably about 50% and most preferably about 90%. Also preferred for use in the methods ofthe invention are markers that are differentially expressed, as compared to normal cervical cells, by at least two-fold in at least about 20%,more preferably about 50% and most preferably about 75% of any ofthe following conditions: stage 0 cervical cancer patients, stage I cervical cancer patients, stage II cervical cancer patients, stage III cervical cancer patients, stage IV cervical cancer patients, grade I cervical cancer patients, grade II cervical cancer patients, grade III cervical cancer patients, squamous cell (epidermoid) cervical cancer patients, cervical adenocarcinoma patients, cervical adenosquamous carcinoma patients, small-cell cervical carcinoma patients, malignant cervical cancer patients, patients with primary carcinomas ofthe cervix, patients with primary malignant lymphomas ofthe cervix and patients with secondary malignant lymphomas ofthe cervix, and all other types of cancers, malignancies and transformations associated with the cervix.
In one embodiment, the present invention provides a diagnostic method of assessing whether a patient is afflicted with cervical cancer (e.g., new detection ("screening"), detection of recurrence, reflex testing), the method comprises comparing: a) the level of expression of a marker ofthe invention in a patient sample, and b) the normal level of expression ofthe marker in a control non-cervical cancer sample.
A significantly higher level of expression ofthe marker in the patient sample as compared to the normal level is an indication that the patient is afflicted with cervical cancer.
In another embodiment, the invention provides a diagnostic method of assessing whether a patient is afflicted with cervical cancer (e.g., new detection ("screening"), detection of recurrence, reflex testing), the method comprises comparing: a) the level of expression of a marker set ofthe invention in a patient sample, and b) the normal level of expression ofthe marker set in a control non- cervical cancer sample. A significantly higher level of expression ofthe marker set in the patient sample as compared to the normal level is an indication that the patient is afflicted with cervical cancer.
The invention also provides diagnostic methods for assessing the efficacy of a therapy for inhibiting cervical cancer in a patient. Such methods comprise comparing: a) expression of a marker ofthe invention in a first sample obtained from the patient prior to providing at least a portion ofthe therapy to the patient, and b) expression ofthe marker in a second sample obtained from the patient following provision ofthe portion ofthe therapy. A significantly lower level of expression ofthe marker in the second sample relative to that in the first sample is an indication that the therapy is efficacious for inhibiting cervical cancer in the patient. It will be appreciated that in these methods the "therapy" may be any therapy for treating cervical cancer including, but not limited to, chemotherapy, radiation therapy, surgical removal of tumor tissue, gene therapy and biologic therapy such as the administering of antibodies and chemokines. Thus, the methods ofthe invention may be used to evaluate a patient before, during and after therapy, for example, to evaluate the reduction in tumor burden.
In a preferred embodiment, the diagnostic methods are directed to therapy using a chemical or biologic agent. These methods comprise comparing: a) expression of a marker ofthe invention in a first sample obtained from the patient and maintained in the presence ofthe chemical or biologic agent, and b) expression ofthe marker in a second sample obtained from the patient and maintained in the absence ofthe agent.
A significantly lower level of expression ofthe marker in the second sample relative to that in the first sample is an indication that the agent is efficacious for inhibiting cervical cancer, in the patient. In one embodiment, the first and second samples can be portions of a single sample obtained from the patient or portions of pooled samples obtained from the patient. The invention additionally provides a monitoring method for assessing the progression of cervical cancer in a patient, the method comprising: a) detecting in a patient sample at a first time point, the expression of a marker ofthe invention; b) repeating step a) at a subsequent time point in time; and c) comparing the level of expression detected in steps a) and b), and therefrom monitoring the progression of cervical cancer in the patient. A significantly higher level of expression ofthe marker in the sample at the subsequent time point from that of the sample at the first time point is an indication that the cervical cancer has progressed, whereas a significantly lower level of expression is an indication that the cervical cancer has regressed.
The invention further provides a diagnostic method for determining whether cervical cancer has metastasized or is likely to metastasize in the future, the method comprising comparing: a) the level of expression of a marker ofthe invention in a patient sample, and b) the normal level (or non-metastatic level) of expression ofthe marker in a control sample.
A significantly higher level of expression in the patient sample as compared to the normal level (or non-metastatic level) is an indication that the cervical cancer has metastasized or is likely to metastasize in the future.
The invention moreover provides a test method for selecting a composition for inhibiting cervical cancer in a patient. This method comprises the steps of: a) obtaining a sample comprising cancer cells from the patient; b) separately maintaining aliquots ofthe sample in the presence of a plurality of test compositions; c) comparing expression of a marker ofthe invention in each ofthe aliquots; and d) selecting one ofthe test compositions which significantly reduces the level of expression ofthe marker in the aliquot containing that test composition, relative to the levels of expression ofthe marker in the presence ofthe other test compositions. The invention additionally provides a test method of assessing the cervical carcinogenic potential of a compound. This method comprises the steps of: a) maintaining separate aliquots of cervical cells in the presence and absence ofthe compound; and b) comparing expression of a marker of the invention in each of the aliquots. A significantly higher level of expression ofthe marker in the aliquot maintained in the presence ofthe compound, relative to that ofthe aliquot maintained in the absence ofthe compound, is an indication that the compound possesses cervical carcinogenic potential. In addition, the invention further provides a method of inhibiting cervical cancer in a patient. This method comprises the steps of: a) obtaining a sample comprising cancer cells from the patient; b) separately maintaining aliquots ofthe sample in the presence of a plurality of compositions; c) comparing expression of a marker ofthe invention in each ofthe aliquots; and d) administering to the patient at least one ofthe compositions which significantly lowers the level of expression ofthe marker in the aliquot containing that composition, relative to the levels of expression ofthe marker in the presence of the other compositions.
In the aforementioned methods, the samples or patient samples comprise cells obtained from the patient. The cells may be found in a cervical smear collected, for example, by a cervical brush. In another embodiment, the sample is a body fluid. Such fluids include, for example, blood fluids, lymph, ascitic fluids, gynecological fluids, urine, and fluids collected by vaginal rinsing. In a further embodiment, the patient sample is in vivo.
According to the invention, the level of expression of a marker ofthe invention in a sample can be assessed, for example, by detecting the presence in the sample of: • the corresponding marker protein (e.g. , a protein having one of the sequences set forth as "SEQ ID NO (AAs)" in Table 1, or a fragment ofthe protein (e.g. by using a reagent, such as an antibody, an antibody derivative, an antibody fragment or single-chain antibody, which binds specifically with the protein or protein fragment)
• the corresponding marker nucleic acid (e.g. a nucleotide transcript having one ofthe nucleic acid sequences set forth as "SEQ ID NO (nts)" in Table 1, or a complement thereof), or a fragment of the nucleic acid (e.g. by contacting transcribed polynucleotides obtained from the sample with a substrate having affixed thereto one or more nucleic acids having the entire or a segment ofthe nucleic acid sequence of any of the SEQ ID NO (nts), or a complement thereof) • a metabolite which is produced directly (i. e. , catalyzed) or indirectly by the corresponding marker protein.
According to the invention, any ofthe aforementioned methods may be performed using a plurality (e.g. 2, 3, 5, or 10 or more) of cervical cancer markers, including cervical cancer markers known in the art. In such methods, the level of expression in the sample of each of a plurality of markers, at least one of which is a marker ofthe invention, is compared with the normal level of expression of each ofthe plurality of markers in samples of the same type obtained from control humans not afflicted with cervical cancer. A significantly altered (i.e., increased or decreased as specified in the above-described methods using a single marker) level of expression in the sample of one or more markers of the invention, or some combination thereof, relative to that marker's corresponding normal or control level, is an indication that the patient is afflicted with cervical cancer. For all ofthe aforementioned methods, the marker(s) are preferably selected such that the positive predictive value ofthe method is at least about 10%. In a further aspect, the invention provides an antibody, an antibody derivative, or an antibody fragment, which binds specifically with a marker protein (e.g., a protein having one ofthe amino acid sequences set forth in the Sequence Listing) or a fragment ofthe protein. The invention also provides methods for making such antibody, antibody derivative, and antibody fragment. Such methods may comprise immunizing a mammal with a protein or peptide comprising the entirety, or a segment of 10 or more amino acids, of a marker protein (e.g., a protein having one ofthe amino acid sequences set forth in the Sequence Listing), wherein the protein or peptide may be obtained from a cell or by chemical synthesis. The methods ofthe invention also encompass producing monoclonal and single-chain antibodies, which would further comprise isolating splenocytes from the immunized mammal, fusing the isolated splenocytes with an immortalized cell line to form hybridomas, and screening individual hybridomas for those that produce an antibody that binds specifically with a marker protein or a fragment ofthe protein.
In another aspect, the invention relates to various diagnostic and test kits. In one embodiment, the invention provides a kit for assessing whether a patient is afflicted with cervical cancer. The kit comprises a reagent for assessing expression of a marker ofthe invention. In another embodiment, the invention provides a kit for assessing the suitability of a chemical or biologic agent for inhibiting cervical cancer in a patient. Such a kit comprises a reagent for assessing expression of a marker ofthe invention, and may also comprise one or more of such agents. In a further embodiment, the invention provides kits for assessing the presence of cervical cancer cells or treating cervical cancers. Such kits comprise an antibody, an antibody derivative, or an antibody fragment, which binds specifically with a marker protein, or a fragment ofthe protein. Such kits may also comprise a plurality of antibodies, antibody derivatives, or antibody fragments wherein the plurality of such antibody agents binds specifically with a marker protein, or a fragment ofthe protein.
In an additional embodiment, the invention also provides a kit for assessing the presence of cervical cancer cells, wherein the kit comprises a nucleic acid probe that binds specifically with a marker nucleic acid or a fragment ofthe nucleic acid. The kit may also comprise a plurality of probes, wherein each ofthe probes binds specifically with a marker nucleic acid, or a fragment ofthe nucleic acid.
In a further aspect, the invention relates to methods for treating a patient afflicted with cervical cancer or at risk of developing cervical cancer. Such methods may comprise reducing the expression and/or interfering with the biological function of a marker ofthe invention. In one embodiment, the method comprises providing to the patient an antisense oligonucleotide or polynucleotide complementary to a marker nucleic acid, or a segment thereof. For example, an antisense polynucleotide may be provided to the patient through the delivery of a vector that expresses an anti-sense polynucleotide of a marker nucleic acid or a fragment thereof. In another embodiment, the method comprises providing to the patient an antibody, an antibody derivative, or antibody fragment, which binds specifically with a marker protein or a fragment ofthe protein. In a prefeπed embodiment, the antibody, antibody derivative or antibody fragment binds specifically with a protein having one ofthe amino acid sequences set forth in the Sequence Listing, or a fragment ofthe protein.
It will be appreciated that the methods and kits ofthe present invention may also include known cancer markers including known cervical cancer markers. It will further be appreciated that the methods and kits may be used to identify cancers other than cervical cancer.
BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS Figure 1 depicts a cluster diagram of cervical tissue samples.
Dendrogram was created from hierarchical clustering ofthe transcriptional profiles of 34 normal, LSIL, HSIL and cancerous cervical tissue samples. Each sample was labeled by its tissue type and an Id number. The abbreviations in Figure 1 are defined as follows: Nect0: normal ectocervix; Nend0: normal endocervix; LSIL: low-grade squamous intraepithelial lesion; HSIL: high-grade squamous intraepithelial lesion; Tscc: squamous cell carcinoma; Taca: adenocarcinoma. The dashed line divides the 34 samples into two major groups: control group and diseased group. Filled circles indicate incoπectly clustered samples.
Figure 2 depicts transcriptional profiles (TP) of MCM6 and Claudin 1 in normal, dysplastic and cancerous cervical tissues by cDNA microaπay hybridization. Each data point represents the average of duplicate microarray hybridizations. The TP intensity was normalized by the median intensity of all spots on the array. The abbreviations in Figure 2 are defined as follows: Endo: normal endocervical tissue; Ecto noπnal ectocervical tissue; LSIL: low-grade squamous intraepithelial lesion; HSIL high-grade squamous intraepithelial lesion; SCC: squamous cell carcinoma; AC A adenocarcinoma.
DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF THE INNENTION The invention relates to newly discovered cancer markers set forth in Table 1, associated with the cancerous state of cervical cells. It has been discovered that the higher than normal level of expression of any of these markers or combination of these markers coπelates with the presence of cervical cancer including pre-malignant conditions such as dysplasia, in a patient. Methods are provided for detecting the
- l l - presence of cervical cancer in a sample, the absence of cervical cancer in a sample, the stage of a cervical cancer, and other characteristics of cervical cancer that are relevant to prevention, diagnosis, characterization, and therapy of cervical cancer in a patient. Methods of treating cervical cancer are also provided. Table 1 lists the markers ofthe invention, which are over-expressed in cervical cancer cells compared to normal (i.e., non-cancerous) cervical cells and comprises markers listed in Tables 2-13. Table 1 provides the sequence listing identifiers ofthe cDNA sequence of a nucleotide transcript and the amino acid sequence of a protein encoded by or coπesponding to each marker, as well as the location ofthe protein coding sequence within the cDNA sequence. Table 2 lists newly-identified nucleotide and amino acid sequences. Table 3 lists newly-identified nucleotide sequences. Table 4 identifies markers ofthe present invention which were selected by transcription profiling experiments and their marker scores in SCC, ACA and HSIL. Table 5 identifies markers ofthe present invention that are overexpressed in cervical cancer by in situ hybridization and indicates the location of marker expression. Table 6 identifies markers ofthe present invention and the frequency of their expression using a cervical tissue microaπay. Table 7 identifies gene specific primers. Table 8 sets forth the scoring on a scale of 0-5 of ethidium bromide agarose gel pictures ofthe end-point PCR on the tissue panel. Tables 9 -13 set forth expression ofthe target gene in each of the tissues tested.
Definitions
As used herein, each ofthe following terms has the meaning associated with it in this section. The articles "a" and "an" are used herein to refer to one or to more than one (i.e. to at least one) ofthe grammatical object ofthe article. By way of example, "an element" means one element or more than one element.
A "marker" is a gene whose altered level of expression in a tissue or cell from its expression level in normal or healthy tissue or cell is associated with a disease state, such as cancer. A "marker nucleic acid" is a nucleic acid (e.g., mRNA, cDNA) encoded by or coπesponding to a marker ofthe invention. Such marker nucleic acids include DNA (e.g., cDNA) comprising the entire or a partial sequence of any ofthe nucleic acid sequences set forth in the Sequence Listing or the complement of such a sequence. The marker nucleic acids also include RNA comprising the entire or a partial sequence of any ofthe nucleic acid sequences set forth in the Sequence Listing or the complement of such a sequence, wherein all thymidine residues are replaced with uridine residues. A "marker protein" is a protein encoded by or coπesponding to a marker ofthe invention. A marker protein comprises the entire or a partial sequence of any ofthe sequences set forth in the Sequence Listing. The terms "protein" and "polypeptide' are used interchangeably.
A "marker set" is a group of more than one marker.
The term "probe" refers to any molecule which is capable of selectively binding to a specifically intended target molecule, for example, a nucleotide transcript or protein encoded by or coπesponding to a marker. Probes can be either synthesized by one skilled in the art, or derived from appropriate biological preparations. For purposes of detection ofthe target molecule, probes may be specifically designed to be labeled, as described herein. Examples of molecules that can be utilized as probes include, but are not limited to, RNA, DNA, proteins, antibodies, and organic molecules.
A "cervical-associated" body fluid is a fluid which, when in the body of a patient, contacts or passes through cervical cells or into which cells or proteins shed from cervical cells are capable of passing. The cells may be found in a cervical smear collected, for example, by a cervical brush. Exemplary cervical-associated body fluids include blood fluids, lymph, ascitic fluids, gynecological fluids, cystic fluid, urine, and fluids collected by vaginal rinsing.
The "normal" level of expression of a marker is the level of expression of the marker in cervical cells of a human subject or patient not afflicted with cervical cancer. An "over-expression" or "significantly higher level of expression" of a marker refers to an expression level in a test sample that is greater than the standard eπor ofthe assay employed to assess expression, and is preferably at least twice, and more preferably three, four, five or ten times the expression level ofthe marker in a control sample (e.g., sample from a healthy subjects not having the marker associated disease) and preferably, the average expression level ofthe marker in several control samples. A "significantly lower level of expression" of a marker refers to an expression level in a test sample that is at least twice, and more preferably three, four, five or ten times lower than the expression level ofthe marker in a control sample (e.g., sample from a healthy subject not having the marker associated disease) and preferably, the average expression level ofthe marker in several control samples.
As used herein, the term "promoter/regulatory sequence" means a nucleic acid sequence which is required for expression of a gene product operably linked to the promoter/regulatory sequence. In some instances, this sequence may be the core promoter sequence and in other instances, this sequence may also include an enhancer sequence and other regulatory elements which are required for expression ofthe gene product. The promoter/regulatory sequence may, for example, be one which expresses the gene product in a tissue-specific manner.
A "constitutive" promoter is a nucleotide sequence which, when operably linked with a polynucleotide which encodes or specifies a gene product, causes the gene product to be produced in a living human cell under most or all physiological conditions ofthe cell.
An "inducible" promoter is a nucleotide sequence which, when operably linked with a polynucleotide which encodes or specifies a gene product, causes the gene product to be produced in a living human cell substantially only when an inducer which coπesponds to the promoter is present in the cell.
A "tissue-specific" promoter is a nucleotide sequence which, when operably linked with a polynucleotide which encodes or specifies a gene product, causes the gene product to be produced in a living human cell substantially only if the cell is a cell ofthe tissue type coπesponding to the promoter. A "transcribed polynucleotide" or "nucleotide transcript" is a polynucleotide (e.g. an mRNA, hnRNA, a cDNA, or an analog of such RNA or cDNA) which is complementary to or homologous with all or a portion of a mature mRNA made by transcription of a marker ofthe invention and normal post-transcriptional processing (e.g. splicing), if any, ofthe RNA transcript, and reverse transcription ofthe RNA transcript.
"Complementary" refers to the broad concept of sequence complementarity between regions of two nucleic acid strands or between two regions of the same nucleic acid strand. It is known that an adenine residue of a first nucleic acid region is capable of forming specific hydrogen bonds ("base pairing") with a residue of a second nucleic acid region which is antiparallel to the first region if the residue is thymine or uracil. Similarly, it is known that a cytosine residue of a first nucleic acid strand is capable of base pairing with a residue of a second nucleic acid strand which is antiparallel to the first strand if the residue is guanine. A first region of a nucleic acid is complementary to a second region ofthe same or a different nucleic acid if, when the two regions are aπanged in an antiparallel fashion, at least one nucleotide residue ofthe first region is capable of base pairing with a residue ofthe second region. Preferably, the first region comprises a first portion and the second region comprises a second portion, whereby, when the first and second portions are aπanged in an antiparallel fashion, at least about 50%, and preferably at least about 75%, at least about 90%, or at least about 95% ofthe nucleotide residues ofthe first portion are capable of base pairing with nucleotide residues in the second portion. More preferably, all nucleotide residues ofthe first portion are capable of base pairing with nucleotide residues in the second portion.
"Homologous" as used herein, refers to nucleotide sequence similarity between two regions ofthe same nucleic acid strand or between regions of two different nucleic acid strands. When a nucleotide residue position in both regions is occupied by the same nucleotide residue, then the regions are homologous at that position. A first region is homologous to a second region if at least one nucleotide residue position of each region is occupied by the same residue. Homology between two regions is expressed in terms ofthe proportion of nucleotide residue positions ofthe two regions that are occupied by the same nucleotide residue. By way of example, a region having the nucleotide sequence 5'-ATTGCC-3' and a region having the nucleotide sequence 5'- TATGGC-31 share 50% homology. Preferably, the first region comprises a first portion and the second region comprises a second portion, whereby, at least about 50%, and preferably at least about 75%, at least about 90%, or at least about 95% ofthe nucleotide residue positions of each ofthe portions are occupied by the same nucleotide residue. More preferably, all nucleotide residue positions of each ofthe portions are occupied by the same nucleotide residue. A molecule is "fixed" or "affixed" to a substrate if it is covalently or non- covalently associated with the substrate such the substrate can be rinsed with a fluid (e.g. standard saline citrate, pH 7.4) without a substantial fraction ofthe molecule dissociating from the substrate. As used herein, a "naturally-occurring" nucleic acid molecule refers to an
RNA or DNA molecule having a nucleotide sequence that occurs in an organism found in nature.
A cancer is "inhibited" if at least one symptom ofthe cancer is alleviated, terminated, slowed, or prevented. As used herein, cervical cancer is also "inhibited" if recuπence or metastasis ofthe cancer is reduced, slowed, delayed, or prevented.
A kit is any manufacture (e.g. a package or container) comprising at least one reagent, e.g. a probe, for specifically detecting the expression of a marker ofthe invention. The kit may be promoted, distributed, or sold as a unit for performing the methods ofthe present invention. "Proteins ofthe invention" encompass marker proteins and their fragments; variant marker proteins and their fragments; peptides and polypeptides comprising an at least 15 amino acid segment of a marker or variant marker protein; and fusion proteins comprising a marker or variant marker protein, or an at least 15 amino acid segment of a marker or variant marker protein. Unless otherwise specified herewithin, the terms "antibody" and
"antibodies" broadly encompass naturally-occurring forms of antibodies (e.g., IgG, IgA, IgM, IgE) and recombinant antibodies such as single-chain antibodies, chimeric and humanized antibodies and multi-specific antibodies, as well as fragments and derivatives of all ofthe foregoing, which fragments and derivatives have at least an antigenic binding site. Antibody derivatives may comprise a protein or chemical moiety conjugated to an antibody.
Description
The present invention is based, in part, on newly identified markers which are over-expressed in cervical cancer cells as compared to their expression in normal (i.e. non-cancerous) cervical cells. The enhanced expression of one or more of these markers in cervical cells is herein coπelated with the cancerous state ofthe tissue. The invention provides compositions, kits, and methods for assessing the cancerous state of cervical cells (e.g. cells obtained from a human, cultured human cells, archived or preserved human cells and in vivo cells) as well as treating patients afflicted with cervical cancer.
The compositions, kits, and methods ofthe invention have the following uses, among others:
1) assessing whether a patient is afflicted with cervical cancer;
2) assessing the stage of cervical cancer in a human patient;
3) assessing the grade of cervical cancer in a patient;
4) assessing the benign or malignant nature of cervical cancer in a patient;
5) assessing the metastatic potential of cervical cancer in a patient;
6) assessing the histological type of neoplasm associated with cervical cancer in a patient;
7) making antibodies, antibody fragments or antibody derivatives that are useful for treating cervical cancer and/or assessing whether a patient is afflicted with cervical cancer;
8) assessing the presence of cervical cancer cells;
9) assessing the efficacy of one or more test compounds for inhibiting cervical cancer in a patient; 10) assessing the efficacy of a therapy for inhibiting cervical cancer in a patient;
11) monitoring the progression of cervical cancer in a patient;
12) selecting a composition or therapy for inhibiting cervical cancer in a patient; 13) treating a patient afflicted with cervical cancer;
14) inhibiting cervical cancer in a patient;
15) assessing the cervical carcinogenic potential of a test compound; and
16) preventing the onset of cervical cancer in a patient at risk for developing cervical cancer.
The invention thus includes a method of assessing whether a patient is afflicted with cervical cancer which includes assessing whether the patient has pre- metastasized cervical cancer. This method comprises comparing the level of expression of a marker ofthe invention (listed in Table 1) in a patient sample and the normal level of expression ofthe marker in a control, e.g., a non-cervical cancer sample. A significantly higher level of expression ofthe marker in the patient sample as compared to the normal level is an indication that the patient is afflicted with cervical cancer. Gene delivery vehicles, host cells and compositions (all described herein) containing nucleic acids comprising the entirety, or a segment of 15 or more nucleotides, of any ofthe nucleic acid sequences set forth in the Sequence Listing, or the complement of such sequences, and polypeptides comprising the entirety, or a segment of 10 or more amino acids, of any ofthe amino acid sequences set forth in the Sequence Listing, are also provided by this invention.
As described herein, cervical cancer in patients is associated with an increased level of expression of one or more markers ofthe invention. While, as discussed above, some of these changes in expression level result from occuπence ofthe cervical cancer, others of these changes induce, maintain, and promote the cancerous state of cervical cancer cells. Thus, cervical cancer characterized by an increase in the level of expression of one or more markers ofthe invention can be inhibited by reducing and/or interfering with the expression ofthe markers and/or function ofthe proteins encoded by those markers.
Expression of a marker ofthe invention can be inhibited in a number of ways generally known in the art. For example, an antisense oligonucleotide can be provided to the cervical cancer cells in order to inhibit transcription, translation, or both, ofthe marker(s). Alternately, a polynucleotide encoding an antibody, an antibody derivative, or an antibody fragment which specifically binds a marker protein, and operably linked with an appropriate promoter/regulator region, can be provided to the cell in order to generate intracellular antibodies which will inhibit the function or activity ofthe protein. The expression and/or function of a marker may also be inhibited by treating the cervical cancer cell with an antibody, antibody derivative or antibody fragment that specifically binds a marker protein. Using the methods described herein, a variety of molecules, particularly including molecules sufficiently small that they are able to cross the cell membrane, can be screened in order to identify molecules which inhibit expression of a marker or inhibit the function of a marker protein. The compound so identified can be provided to the patient in order to inhibit cervical cancer cells ofthe patient. Any marker or combination of markers ofthe invention, as well as any known markers in combination with the markers ofthe invention, may be used in the compositions, kits, and methods ofthe present invention. In general, it is preferable to use markers for which the difference between the level of expression ofthe marker in cervical cancer cells and the level of expression ofthe same marker in normal cervical cells is as great as possible. Although this difference can be as small as the limit of detection ofthe method for assessing expression ofthe marker, it is prefeπed that the difference be at least greater than the standard eπor ofthe assessment method, and preferably a difference of at least 2-, 3-, 4-, 5-, 6-, 7-, 8-, 9-, 10-, 15-, 20-, 25-, 100-, 500-, 1000-fold or greater than the level of expression of the same marker in normal cervical tissue.
It is recognized that certain marker proteins are secreted from cervical cells (i.e. one or both of normal and cancerous cells) to the extracellular space suπounding the cells. These markers are preferably used in certain embodiments ofthe compositions, kits, and methods ofthe invention, owing to the fact that the such marker proteins can be detected in a cervical-associated body fluid sample, which may be more easily collected from a human patient than a tissue biopsy sample. In addition, prefeπed in vivo techniques for detection of a marker protein include introducing into a subject a labeled antibody directed against the protein. For example, the antibody can be labeled with a radioactive marker whose presence and location in a subject can be detected by standard imaging techniques.
It is a simple matter for the skilled artisan to determine whether any particular marker protein is a secreted protein. In order to make this determination, the marker protein is expressed in, for example, a mammalian cell, preferably a human cervical cell line, extracellular fluid is collected, and the presence or absence ofthe protein in the extracellular fluid is assessed (e.g. using a labeled antibody which binds specifically with the protein).
The following is an example of a method which can be used to detect
5 secretion of a protein. About 8 x 10 293T cells are incubated at 37°C in wells containing growth medium (Dulbecco's modified Eagle's medium {DMEM} supplemented with 10% fetal bovine serum) under a 5% ( /v) CO2, 95% air atmosphere to about 60-70% confluence. The cells are then transfected using a standard transfection mixture comprising 2 micrograms of DNA comprising an expression vector encoding the protein and 10 microliters of LipofectAMHNE™ (GIBCO/BRL Catalog no. 18342- 012) per well. The transfection mixture is maintained for about 5 hours, and then replaced with fresh growth medium and maintained in an air atmosphere. Each well is gently rinsed twice with DMEM which does not contain methionine or cysteine (DMEM-MC; ICN Catalog no. 16-424- 54). About 1 milliliter of DMEM-MC and
35 about 50 microcuries of Trans- S™ reagent (ICN Catalog no. 51006) are added to each well. The wells are maintained under the 5% CO2 atmosphere described above and incubated at 37°C for a selected period. Following incubation, 150 microliters of conditioned medium is removed and centrifuged to remove floating cells and debris. The presence ofthe protein in the supernatant is an indication that the protein is secreted.
It will be appreciated that patient samples containing cervical cells may be used in the methods ofthe present invention. In these embodiments, the level of expression ofthe marker can be assessed by assessing the amount (e.g. absolute amount or concentration) ofthe marker in a cervical cell sample, e.g., cervical smear obtained from a patient. The cell sample can, of course, be subjected to a variety of well-known post-collection preparative and storage techniques (e.g., nucleic acid and/or protein extraction, fixation, storage, freezing, ultrafiltration, concentration, evaporation, centrifugation, etc.) prior to assessing the amount ofthe marker in the sample. Likewise, cervical smears may also be subjected to post-collection preparative and storage techniques, e.g., fixation.
The compositions, kits, and methods ofthe invention can be used to detect expression of marker proteins having at least one portion which is displayed on the surface of cells which express it. It is a simple matter for the skilled artisan to determine whether a marker protein, or a portion thereof, is exposed on the cell surface. For example, immunological methods may be used to detect such proteins on whole cells, or well known computer-based sequence analysis methods may be used to predict the presence of at least one extracellular domain (i.e. including both secreted proteins and proteins having at least one cell-surface domain). Expression of a marker protein having at least one portion which is displayed on the surface of a cell which expresses it may be detected without necessarily lysing the cell (e.g. using a labeled antibody which binds specifically with a cell-surface domain ofthe protein). Expression of a marker ofthe invention may be assessed by any of a wide variety of well known methods for detecting expression of a transcribed nucleic acid or protein. Non-limiting examples of such methods include immunological methods for detection of secreted, cell-surface, cytoplasmic, or nuclear proteins, protein purification methods, protein function or activity assays, nucleic acid hybridization methods, nucleic acid reverse transcription methods, and nucleic acid amplification methods.
In a prefeπed embodiment, expression of a marker is assessed using an antibody (e.g. a radio-labeled, chromophore-labeled, fluorophore-labeled, or enzyme- labeled antibody), an antibody derivative (e.g. an antibody conjugated with a substrate or with the protein or ligand of a protein-ligand pair {e.g. biotin-streptavidin} ), or an antibody fragment (e.g. a single-chain antibody, an isolated antibody hypervariable domain, etc.) which binds specifically with a marker protein or fragment thereof, including a marker protein which has undergone all or a portion of its normal post- translational modification. In another prefeπed embodiment, expression of a marker is assessed by preparing mRNA/cDNA (i.e. a transcribed polynucleotide) from cells in a patient sample, and by hybridizing the mRNA/cDNA with a reference polynucleotide which is a complement of a marker nucleic acid, or a fragment thereof. cDNA can, optionally, be amplified using any of a variety of polymerase chain reaction methods prior to hybridization with the reference polynucleotide; preferably, it is not amplified.
Expression of one or more markers can likewise be detected using quantitative PCR to assess the level of expression ofthe marker(s). Alternatively, any ofthe many known methods of detecting mutations or variants (e.g. single nucleotide polymorphisms, deletions, etc.) of a marker ofthe invention may be used to detect occuπence of a marker in a patient.
In a related embodiment, a mixture of transcribed polynucleotides obtained from the sample is contacted with a substrate having fixed thereto a polynucleotide complementary to or homologous with at least a portion (e.g. at least 7, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, 40, 50, 100, 500, or more nucleotide residues) of a marker nucleic acid. If polynucleotides complementary to or homologous with are differentially detectable on the substrate (e.g. detectable using different chromophores or fluorophores, or fixed to different selected positions), then the levels of expression of a plurality of markers can be assessed simultaneously using a single substrate (e.g. a "gene chip" microaπay of polynucleotides fixed at selected positions). When a method of assessing marker expression is used which involves hybridization of one nucleic acid with another, it is prefeπed that the hybridization be performed under stringent hybridization conditions. Because the compositions, kits, and methods ofthe invention rely on detection of a difference in expression levels of one or more markers ofthe invention, it is preferable that the level of expression ofthe marker is significantly greater than the minimum detection limit ofthe method used to assess expression in at least one of normal cervical cells and cancerous cervical cells. It is understood that by routine screening of additional patient samples using one or more ofthe markers ofthe invention, it will be realized that certain ofthe markers are over-expressed in cancers of various types, including specific cervical cancers, as well as other cancers such as breast cancer, ovarian cancer, etc. For example, it will be confirmed that some ofthe markers ofthe invention are over- expressed in most (i.e. 50% or more) or substantially all (i.e. 80% or more) of cervical cancer. Furthermore, it will be confirmed that certain ofthe markers ofthe invention are associated with cervical cancer of various stages (i.e. stage 0, 1, II, III, and IN cervical cancers, as well as subclassifications LAI, IA2, IB, IB1, IB2, IIA, UB, IIIA, IIIB, IN A, and INB, using the FIGO Stage Grouping system for primary carcinoma ofthe cervix (see Gynecologic Oncology, 1991 , 41 : 199 and Cancer, 1992, 69:482)), and pre- malignant conditions (e.g., dysplasia including CIΝ or SIL), of various histologic subtypes (e.g. squamous cell carcinomas and squamous cell carcinoma variants such as verrucous carcinoma, lymphoepithelioma-like carcinoma, papillary squamous neoplasm and spindle cell squamous cell carcinoma (see Cervical Cancer and Preinvasive Neoplasia, 1996, pp. 90-91) serous, mucinous, endometrioid, and clear cell subtypes, as well as subclassifications and alternate classifications adenocarcinoma, papillary adenocarcinoma, papillary cystadenocarcinoma, surface papillary carcinoma, malignant adenofibroma, cystadenofibroma, adenocarcinoma, cystadenocarcinoma, adenoacanthoma, endometrioid stromal sarcoma, mesodermal {Mϋllerian} mixed tumor, malignant carcinoma, mixed epithelial tumor, and undifferentiated carcinoma, using the WHO/FIGO system for classification of malignant cervical tumors; Scully, Atlas of Tumor Pathology, 3d series, Washington DC), and various grades (i.e. grade I {well differentiated} , grade II {moderately well differentiated}, and grade III {poorly differentiated from suπounding noπnal tissue} ). In addition, as a greater number of patient samples are assessed for expression ofthe markers ofthe invention and the outcomes ofthe individual patients from whom the samples were obtained are coπelated, it will also be confirmed that altered expression of certain ofthe markers of the invention are strongly coπelated with malignant cancers and that altered expression of other markers ofthe invention are strongly coπelated with benign tumors. The compositions, kits, and methods ofthe invention are thus useful for characterizing one or more ofthe stage, grade, histological type, and benign/malignant nature of cervical cancer in patients. When the compositions, kits, and methods ofthe invention are used for characterizing one or more ofthe stage, grade, histological type, and benign/malignant nature of cervical cancer in a patient, it is prefeπed that the marker or panel of markers ofthe invention is selected such that a positive result is obtained in at least about 20%, and preferably at least about 40%, 60%, or 80%, and more preferably in substantially all patients afflicted with a cervical cancer ofthe coπesponding stage, grade, histological type, or benign/malignant nature. Preferably, the marker or panel of markers ofthe invention is selected such that a positive predictive value (PPN) of greater than about 10%) is obtained for the general population (more preferably coupled with an assay specificity greater than 80%). When a plurality of markers ofthe invention are used in the compositions, kits, and methods ofthe invention, the level of expression of each marker in a patient sample can be compared with the normal level of expression of each ofthe plurality of markers in non-cancerous samples ofthe same type, either in a single reaction mixture (i.e. using reagents, such as different fluorescent probes, for each marker) or in individual reaction mixtures coπesponding to one or more ofthe markers. In one embodiment, a significantly increased level of expression of more than one ofthe plurality of markers in the sample, relative to the coπesponding normal levels, is an indication that the patient is afflicted with cervical cancer. When a plurality of markers is used, it is prefeπed that 2, 3, 4, 5, 8, 10, 12, 15, 20, 30, or 50 or more individual markers be used, wherein fewer markers are prefeπed.
In order to maximize the sensitivity ofthe compositions, kits, and methods ofthe invention (i.e. by interference attributable to cells of non-cervical origin in a patient sample), it is preferable that the marker ofthe invention used therein be a marker which has a restricted tissue distribution, e.g., normally not expressed in a non- cervical tissue.
Only a small number of markers are known to be associated with cervical cancer (e.g. bcl-2, 15A8 antigen, cdc6, Mcm5, and EGFR). These markers are not, of course, included among the markers ofthe invention, although they may be used together with one or more markers ofthe invention in a panel of markers, for example. It is well known that certain types of genes, such as oncogenes, tumor suppressor genes, growth factor-like genes, protease-like genes, and protein kinase-like genes are often involved with development of cancers of various types. Thus, among the markers ofthe invention, use of those which coπespond to proteins which resemble known proteins encoded by known oncogenes and tumor suppressor genes, and those which coπespond to proteins which resemble growth factors, proteases, and protein kinases are prefeπed. It is recognized that the compositions, kits, and methods ofthe invention will be of particular utility to patients having an enhanced risk of developing cervical cancer and their medical advisors. Patients recognized as having an enhanced risk of developing cervical cancer include, for example, patients having a familial history of cervical cancer, patients identified as having a mutant oncogene (i.e. at least one allele), and patients of advancing age (i.e. women older than about 50 or 60 years).
The level of expression of a marker in normal (i.e. non-cancerous) human cervical tissue can be assessed in a variety of ways. In one embodiment, this normal level of expression is assessed by assessing the level of expression ofthe marker in a portion of cervical cells which appears to be non-cancerous and by comparing this normal level of expression with the level of expression in a portion ofthe cervical cells which is suspected of being cancerous. Alternately, and particularly as further information becomes available as a result of routine performance ofthe methods described herein, population-average values for normal expression ofthe markers ofthe invention may be used. In other embodiments, the 'normal' level of expression of a marker may be determined by assessing expression ofthe marker in a patient sample obtained from a non-cancer-afflicted patient, from a patient sample obtained from a patient before the suspected onset of cervical cancer in the patient, from archived patient samples, and the like. The invention includes compositions, kits, and methods for assessing the presence of cervical cancer cells in a sample (e.g. an archived tissue sample or a sample obtained from a patient). These compositions, kits, and methods are substantially the same as those described above, except that, where necessary, the compositions, kits, and methods are adapted for use with samples other than patient samples. For example, when the sample to be used is a parafinized, archived human tissue sample, it can be necessary to adjust the ratio of compounds in the compositions ofthe invention, in the kits ofthe invention, or the methods used to assess levels of marker expression in the sample. Such methods are well known in the art and within the skill ofthe ordinary artisan.
The invention includes a kit for assessing the presence of cervical cancer cells (e.g. in a sample such as a patient sample). The kit comprises a plurality of reagents, each of which is capable of binding specifically with a marker nucleic acid or protein. Suitable reagents for binding with a marker protein include antibodies, antibody derivatives, antibody fragments, and the like. Suitable reagents for binding with a marker nucleic acid (e.g. a genomic DNA, an mRNA, a spliced mRNA, a cDNA, or the like) include complementary nucleic acids. For example, the nucleic acid reagents may include oligonucleotides (labeled or non-labeled) fixed to a substrate, labeled oligonucleotides not bound with a substrate, pairs of PCR primers, molecular beacon probes, and the like.
The kit ofthe invention may optionally comprise additional components useful for performing the methods ofthe invention. By way of example, the kit may comprise fluids (e.g. SSC buffer) suitable for annealing complementary nucleic acids or for binding an antibody with a protein with which it specifically binds, one or more sample compartments, an instructional material which describes performance of a method ofthe invention, a sample of normal cervical cells, a sample of cervical cancer cells, and the like.
The invention also includes a method of making an isolated hybridoma which produces an antibody useful for assessing whether patient is afflicted with a cervical cancer. In this method, a protein or peptide comprising the entirety or a segment of a marker protein is synthesized or isolated (e.g. by purification from a cell in which it is expressed or by transcription and translation of a nucleic acid encoding the protein or peptide in vivo or in vitro using known methods). A vertebrate, preferably a mammal such as a mouse, rat, rabbit, or sheep, is immunized using the protein or peptide. The vertebrate may optionally (and preferably) be immunized at least one additional time with the protein or peptide, so that the vertebrate exhibits a robust immune response to the protein or peptide. Splenocytes are isolated from the immunized vertebrate and fused with an immortalized cell line to form hybridomas, using any of a variety of methods well known in the art. Hybridomas formed in this manner are then screened using standard methods to identify one or more hybridomas which produce an antibody which specifically binds with the marker protein or a fragment thereof. The invention also includes hybridomas made by this method and antibodies made using such hybridomas.
The invention also includes a method of assessing the efficacy of a test compound for inhibiting cervical cancer cells. As described above, differences in the level of expression ofthe markers ofthe invention coπelate with the cancerous state of cervical cells. Although it is recognized that changes in the levels of expression of certain ofthe markers ofthe invention likely result from the cancerous state of cervical cells, it is likewise recognized that changes in the levels of expression of other ofthe markers ofthe invention induce, maintain, and promote the cancerous state of those cells. Thus, compounds which inhibit a cervical cancer in a patient will cause the level of expression of one or more ofthe markers ofthe invention to change to a level nearer the normal level of expression for that marker (i.e. the level of expression for the marker in non-cancerous cervical cells).
This method thus comprises comparing expression of a marker in a first cervical cell sample and maintained in the presence ofthe test compound and expression ofthe marker in a second cervical cell sample and maintained in the absence ofthe test compound. A significantly reduced expression of a marker ofthe invention in the presence ofthe test compound is an indication that the test compound inhibits cervical cancer. The cervical cell samples may, for example, be aliquots of a single sample of normal cervical cells obtained from a patient, pooled samples of normal cervical cells obtained from a patient, cells of a normal cervical cell line, aliquots of a single sample of cervical cancer cells obtained from a patient, pooled samples of cervical cancer cells obtained from a patient, cells of a cervical cancer cell line, or the like. In one embodiment, the samples are cervical cancer cells obtained from a patient and a plurality of compounds known to be effective for inhibiting various cervical cancers are tested in order to identify the compound which is likely to best inhibit the cervical cancer in the patient.
This method may likewise be used to assess the efficacy of a therapy for inhibiting cervical cancer in a patient. In this method, the level of expression of one or more markers of the invention in a pair of samples (one subjected to the therapy, the other not subjected to the therapy) is assessed. As with the method of assessing the efficacy of test compounds, if the therapy induces a significantly lower level of expression of a marker of the invention then the therapy is efficacious for inhibiting cervical cancer. As above, if samples from a selected patient are used in this method, then alternative therapies can be assessed in vitro in order to select a therapy most likely to be efficacious for inhibiting cervical cancer in the patient.
As described above, the cancerous state of human cervical cells is coπelated with changes in the levels of expression ofthe markers of the invention. The invention includes a method for assessing the human cervical cell carcinogenic potential of a test compound. This method comprises maintaining separate aliquots of human cervical cells in the presence and absence ofthe test compound. Expression of a marker ofthe invention in each ofthe aliquots is compared. A significantly higher level of expression of a marker ofthe invention in the aliquot maintained in the presence ofthe test compound (relative to the aliquot maintained in the absence ofthe test compound) is an indication that the test compound possesses human cervical cell carcinogenic potential. The relative carcinogenic potentials of various test compounds can be assessed by comparing the degree of enhancement or inhibition ofthe level of expression ofthe relevant markers, by comparing the number of markers for which the level of expression is enhanced or inhibited, or by comparing both. Various aspects ofthe invention are described in further detail in the following subsections.
I. Isolated Nucleic Acid Molecules
One aspect ofthe invention pertains to isolated nucleic acid molecules, including nucleic acids which encode a marker protein or a portion thereof. Isolated nucleic acids ofthe invention also include nucleic acid molecules sufficient for use as hybridization probes to identify marker nucleic acid molecules, and fragments of marker nucleic acid molecules, e.g., those suitable for use as PCR primers for the amplification or mutation of marker nucleic acid molecules. As used herein, the term "nucleic acid molecule" is intended to include DNA molecules (e.g., cDNA or genomic DNA) and RNA molecules (e.g., mRNA) and analogs ofthe DNA or RNA generated using nucleotide analogs. The nucleic acid molecule can be single-stranded or double- stranded, but preferably is double-stranded DNA.
An "isolated" nucleic acid molecule is one which is separated from other nucleic acid molecules which are present in the natural source ofthe nucleic acid molecule. Preferably, an "isolated" nucleic acid molecule is free of sequences (preferably protein-encoding sequences) which naturally flank the nucleic acid (i.e., sequences located at the 5' and 3' ends ofthe nucleic acid) in the genomic DNA ofthe organism from which the nucleic acid is derived. For example, in various embodiments, the isolated nucleic acid molecule can contain less than about 5 kB, 4 kB, 3 kB, 2 kB, 1 kB, 0.5 kB or 0.1 kB of nucleotide sequences which naturally flank the nucleic acid molecule in genomic DNA ofthe cell from which the nucleic acid is derived. Moreover, an "isolated" nucleic acid molecule, such as a cDNA molecule, can be substantially free of other cellular material, or culture medium when produced by recombinant techniques, or substantially free of chemical precursors or other chemicals when chemically synthesized.
A nucleic acid molecule ofthe present invention can be isolated using standard molecular biology techniques and the sequence information in the database records described herein. Using all or a portion of such nucleic acid sequences, nucleic acid molecules ofthe invention can be isolated using standard hybridization and cloning techniques (e.g., as described in Sambrook et al, ed., Molecular Cloning: A Laboratory Manual, 2nd ed., Cold Spring Harbor Laboratory Press, Cold Spring Harbor, NY, 1989).
A nucleic acid molecule ofthe invention can be amplified using cDNA, mRNA, or genomic DNA as a template and appropriate oligonucleotide primers according to standard PCR amplification techniques. The nucleic acid so amplified can be cloned into an appropriate vector and characterized by DNA sequence analysis. Furthermore, nucleotides coπesponding to all or a portion of a nucleic acid molecule of the invention can be prepared by standard synthetic techniques, e.g., using an automated DNA synthesizer. In another prefeπed embodiment, an isolated nucleic acid molecule ofthe invention comprises a nucleic acid molecule which has a nucleotide sequence complementary to the nucleotide sequence of a marker nucleic acid or to the nucleotide sequence of a nucleic acid encoding a marker protein. A nucleic acid molecule which is complementary to a given nucleotide sequence is one which is sufficiently complementary to the given nucleotide sequence that it can hybridize to the given nucleotide sequence thereby forming a stable duplex.
Moreover, a nucleic acid molecule ofthe invention can comprise only a portion of a nucleic acid sequence, wherein the full length nucleic acid sequence comprises a marker nucleic acid or which encodes a marker protein. Such nucleic acids can be used, for example, as a probe or primer. The probe/primer typically is used as one or more substantially purified oligonucleotides. The oligonucleotide typically comprises a region of nucleotide sequence that hybridizes under stringent conditions to at least about 7, preferably about 15, more preferably about 25, 50, 75, 100, 125, 150, 175, 200, 250, 300, 350, or 400 or more consecutive nucleotides of a nucleic acid ofthe invention.
Probes based on the sequence of a nucleic acid molecule ofthe invention can be used to detect transcripts or genomic sequences coπesponding to one or more markers ofthe invention. The probe comprises a label group attached thereto, e.g., a radioisotope, a fluorescent compound, an enzyme, or an enzyme co-factor. Such probes can be used as part of a diagnostic test kit for identifying cells or tissues which mis- express the protein, such as by measuring levels of a nucleic acid molecule encoding the protein in a sample of cells from a subject, e.g., detecting mRNA levels or determining whether a gene encoding the protein has been mutated or deleted. The invention further encompasses nucleic acid molecules that differ, due to degeneracy ofthe genetic code, from the nucleotide sequence of nucleic acids encoding a marker protein (e.g., a protein having one ofthe amino acid sequences set forth in the Sequence Listing), and thus encode the same protein.
It will be appreciated by those skilled in the art that DNA sequence polymorphisms that lead to changes in the amino acid sequence can exist within a population (e.g., the human population). Such genetic polymorphisms can exist among individuals within a population due to natural allelic variation. An allele is one of a group of genes which occur alternatively at a given genetic locus. In addition, it will be appreciated that DNA polymorphisms that affect RNA expression levels can also exist that may affect the overall expression level of that gene (e.g., by affecting regulation or degradation).
As used herein, the phrase "allelic variant" refers to a nucleotide sequence which occurs at a given locus or to a polypeptide encoded by the nucleotide sequence. As used herein, the terms "gene" and "recombinant gene" refer to nucleic acid molecules comprising an open reading frame encoding a polypeptide coπesponding to a marker ofthe invention. Such natural allelic variations can typically result in 1-5% variance in the nucleotide sequence of a given gene. Alternative alleles can be identified by sequencing the gene of interest in a number of different individuals. This can be readily carried out by using hybridization probes to identify the same genetic locus in a variety of individuals. Any and all such nucleotide variations and resulting amino acid polymorphisms or variations that are the result of natural allelic variation and that do not alter the functional activity are intended to be within the scope ofthe invention. In another embodiment, an isolated nucleic acid molecule ofthe invention is at least 7, 15, 20, 25, 30, 40, 60, 80, 100, 150, 200, 250, 300, 350, 400, 450, 550, 650, 700, 800, 900, 1000, 1200, 1400, 1600, 1800, 2000, 2200, 2400, 2600, 2800, 3000, 3500, 4000, 4500, or more nucleotides in length and hybridizes under stringent conditions to a marker nucleic acid or to a nucleic acid encoding a marker protein. As used herein, the term "hybridizes under stringent conditions" is intended to describe conditions for hybridization and washing under which nucleotide sequences at least 60% (65%, 70%, preferably 75%) identical to each other typically remain hybridized to each other. Such stringent conditions are known to those skilled in the art and can be found in sections 6.3.1-6.3.6 of Current Protocols in Molecular Biology, John Wiley & Sons, N.Y. (1989). A prefeπed, non-limiting example of stringent hybridization conditions are hybridization in 6X sodium chloride/sodium citrate (SSC) at about 45°C, followed by one or more washes in 0.2X SSC, 0.1% SDS at 50-65°C.
In addition to naturally-occurring allelic variants of a nucleic acid molecule ofthe invention that can exist in the population, the skilled artisan will further appreciate that sequence changes can be introduced by mutation thereby leading to changes in the amino acid sequence ofthe encoded protein, without altering the biological activity ofthe protein encoded thereby. For example, one can make nucleotide substitutions leading to amino acid substitutions at "non-essential" amino acid residues. A "non-essential" amino acid residue is a residue that can be altered from the wild-type sequence without altering the biological activity, whereas an "essential" amino acid residue is required for biological activity. For example, amino acid residues that are not conserved or only semi-conserved among homologs of various species may be non-essential for activity and thus would be likely targets for alteration.
Alternatively, amino acid residues that are conserved among the homologs of various species (e.g. , murine and human) may be essential for activity and thus would not be likely targets for alteration.
Accordingly, another aspect ofthe invention pertains to nucleic acid molecules encoding a variant marker protein that contain changes in amino acid residues that are not essential for activity. Such variant marker proteins differ in amino acid sequence from the naturally-occurring marker proteins, yet retain biological activity. In one embodiment, such a variant marker protein has an amino acid sequence that is at least about 40% identical, 50%, 60%, 70%, 80%, 90%, 95%, or 98% identical to the amino acid sequence of a marker protein.
An isolated nucleic acid molecule encoding a variant marker protein can be created by introducing one or more nucleotide substitutions, additions or deletions into the nucleotide sequence of marker nucleic acids, such that one or more amino acid residue substitutions, additions, or deletions are introduced into the encoded protein. Mutations can be introduced by standard techniques, such as site-directed mutagenesis and PCR-mediated mutagenesis. Preferably, conservative amino acid substitutions are made at one or more predicted non-essential amino acid residues. A "conservative amino acid substitution" is one in which the amino acid residue is replaced with an amino acid residue having a similar side chain. Families of amino acid residues having similar side chains have been defined in the art. These families include amino acids with basic side chains (e.g., lysine, arginine, histidine), acidic side chains (e.g., aspartic acid, glutamic acid), uncharged polar side chains (e.g., glycine, asparagine, glutamine, serine, threonine, tyrosine, cysteine), non-polar side chains (e.g., alanine, valine, leucine, isoleucine, proline, phenylalanine, methionine, tryptophan), beta-branched side chains (e.g., threonine, valine, isoleucine) and aromatic side chains (e.g., tyrosine, phenylalanine, tryptophan, histidine). Alternatively, mutations can be introduced randomly along all or part ofthe coding sequence, such as by saturation mutagenesis, and the resultant mutants can be screened for biological activity to identify mutants that retain activity. Following mutagenesis, the encoded protein can be expressed recombinantly and the activity ofthe protein can be determined.
The present invention encompasses antisense nucleic acid molecules, i.e., molecules which are complementary to a sense nucleic acid ofthe invention, e.g., complementary to the coding strand of a double-stranded marker cDNA molecule or complementary to a marker mRNA sequence. Accordingly, an antisense nucleic acid of the invention can hydrogen bond to (i.e. anneal with) a sense nucleic acid ofthe invention. The antisense nucleic acid can be complementary to an entire coding strand, or to only a portion thereof, e.g., all or part ofthe protein coding region (or open reading frame). An antisense nucleic acid molecule can also be antisense to all or part of a non- coding region ofthe coding strand of a nucleotide sequence encoding a marker protein. The non-coding regions ("5' and 3' untranslated regions") are the 5' and 3' sequences which flank the coding region and are not translated into amino acids.
An antisense oligonucleotide can be, for example, about 5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, or 50 or more nucleotides in length. An antisense nucleic acid ofthe invention can be constructed using chemical synthesis and enzymatic ligation reactions using procedures known in the art. For example, an antisense nucleic acid (e.g., an antisense oligonucleotide) can be chemically synthesized using naturally occurring nucleotides or variously modified nucleotides designed to increase the biological stability ofthe molecules or to increase the physical stability ofthe duplex formed between the antisense and sense nucleic acids, e.g., phosphorothioate derivatives and acridine substituted nucleotides can be used. Examples of modified nucleotides which can be used to generate the antisense nucleic acid include 5-fluorouracil, 5-bromouracil, 5-chlorouracil, 5-iodouracil, hypoxanthine, xanthine, 4-acetylcytosine, 5- (carboxyhydroxylmethyl) uracil, 5-carboxymethylaminomethyl-2-thiouridine, 5- carboxymethylaminomethyluracil, dihydrouracil, beta-D-galactosylqueosine, inosine, N6-isopentenyladenine, 1-mefhylguanine, 1-methylinosine, 2,2-dimethylguanine, 2- methyladenine, 2-methylguanine, 3-methylcytosine, 5-methylcytosine, N6-adenine, 7- methylguanine, 5-methylaminomethyluracil, 5-methoxyaminomethyl-2-thiouracil, beta- D-mannosylqueosine, 5'-methoxycarboxymethyluracil, 5-methoxyuracil, 2-methylthio- N6-isopentenyladenine, uracil-5-oxyacetic acid (v), wybutoxosine, pseudouracil, queosine, 2-thiocytosine, 5-methyl-2-thiouracil, 2-thiouracil, 4-thiouracil, 5- methyluracil, uracil-5-oxyacetic acid methylester, uracil-5-oxyacetic acid (v), 5-methyl- 2-thiouracil, 3-(3-amino-3-N-2-carboxypropyl) uracil, (acp3)w, and 2,6-diaminopurine. Alternatively, the antisense nucleic acid can be produced biologically using an expression vector into which a nucleic acid has been sub-cloned in an antisense orientation (i.e., RNA transcribed from the inserted nucleic acid will be of an antisense orientation to a target nucleic acid of interest, described further in the following subsection).
The antisense nucleic acid molecules ofthe invention are typically administered to a subject or generated in situ such that they hybridize with or bind to cellular mRNA and/or genomic DNA encoding a marker protein to thereby inhibit expression ofthe marker, e.g., by inhibiting transcription and/or translation. The hybridization can be by conventional nucleotide complementarity to form a stable duplex, or, for example, in the case of an antisense nucleic acid molecule which binds to DNA duplexes, through specific interactions in the major groove ofthe double helix. Examples of a route of administration of antisense nucleic acid molecules ofthe invention includes direct injection at a tissue site or infusion ofthe antisense nucleic acid into a cervical-associated body fluid. Alternatively, antisense nucleic acid molecules can be modified to target selected cells and then administered systemically. For example, for systemic administration, antisense molecules can be modified such that they specifically bind to receptors or antigens expressed on a selected cell surface, e.g., by linking the antisense nucleic acid molecules to peptides or antibodies which bind to cell surface receptors or antigens. The antisense nucleic acid molecules can also be delivered to cells using the vectors described herein. To achieve sufficient intracellular concentrations ofthe antisense molecules, vector constructs in which the antisense nucleic acid molecule is placed under the control of a strong pol II or pol III promoter are prefeπed.
An antisense nucleic acid molecule ofthe invention can be an α-anomeric nucleic acid molecule. An α-anomeric nucleic acid molecule forms specific double- stranded hybrids with complementary RNA in which, contrary to the usual α-units, the strands run parallel to each other (Gaultier et al, 1987, Nucleic Acids Res. 15:6625- 6641). The antisense nucleic acid molecule can also comprise a 2'-o- methylribonucleotide (Inoue et al, 1987, Nucleic Acids Res. 15:6131-6148) or a chimeric RNA-DNA analogue (Inoue et al, 1987, FEBSLett. 215:327-330). The invention also encompasses ribozymes. Ribozymes are catalytic RNA molecules with ribonuclease activity which are capable of cleaving a single- stranded nucleic acid, such as an mRNA, to which they have a complementary region. Thus, ribozymes (e.g., hammerhead ribozymes as described in Haselhoff and Gerlach, 1988, Nature 334:585-591) can be used to catalytically cleave mRNA transcripts to thereby inhibit translation ofthe protein encoded by the mRNA. A ribozyme having specificity for a nucleic acid molecule encoding a marker protein can be designed based upon the nucleotide sequence of a cDNA coπesponding to the marker. For example, a derivative of a Tetrahymena L-19 IVS RNA can be constructed in which the nucleotide sequence ofthe active site is complementary to the nucleotide sequence to be cleaved (see Cech et al. U.S. Patent No. 4,987,071; and Cech et al. U.S. Patent No. 5,116,742). Alternatively, an mRNA encoding a polypeptide ofthe invention can be used to select a catalytic RNA having a specific ribonuclease activity from a pool of RNA molecules (see, e.g., Bartel and Szostak, 1993, Science 261 :1411-1418). The invention also encompasses nucleic acid molecules which form triple helical structures. For example, expression of a marker ofthe invention can be inhibited by targeting nucleotide sequences complementary to the regulatory region ofthe gene encoding the marker nucleic acid or protein (e.g., the promoter and/or enhancer) to form triple helical structures that prevent transcription ofthe gene in target cells. See generally Helene (1991) Anticancer Drug Des. 6(6):569-84; Helene (1992) Ann. N.Y. Acad. Sci. 660:27-36; and Maher ( 1992) Bioassays 14(12):807-15.
In various embodiments, the nucleic acid molecules ofthe invention can be modified at the base moiety, sugar moiety or phosphate backbone to improve, e.g., the stability, hybridization, or solubility ofthe molecule. For example, the deoxyribose phosphate backbone ofthe nucleic acids can be modified to generate peptide nucleic acids (see Hyrup et al, 1996, Bioorganic & Medicinal Chemistry 4(1): 5-23). As used herein, the terms "peptide nucleic acids" or "PNAs" refer to nucleic acid mimics, e.g., DNA mimics, in which the deoxyribose phosphate backbone is replaced by a pseudopeptide backbone and only the four natural nucleobases are retained. The neutral backbone of PNAs has been shown to allow for specific hybridization to DNA and RNA under conditions of low ionic strength. The synthesis of PNA oligomers can be performed using standard solid phase peptide synthesis protocols as described in Hyrup βt al (1996), supra; Perry-O'Keefe et al. (1996) Proc. Natl Acad. Sci. USA 93:14670- 675.
PNAs can be used in therapeutic and diagnostic applications. For example, PNAs can be used as antisense or antigene agents for sequence-specific modulation of gene expression by, e.g., inducing transcription or translation aπest or inhibiting replication. PNAs can also be used, e.g., in the analysis of single base pair mutations in a gene by, e.g. , PNA directed PCR clamping; as artificial restriction enzymes when used in combination with other enzymes, e.g., SI nucleases (Hyrup (1996), supra; or as probes or primers for DNA sequence and hybridization (Hyrup, 1996, supra; Perry-O'Keefe et al, 1996, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 93:14670-675). In another embodiment, PNAs can be modified, e.g., to enhance their stability or cellular uptake, by attaching lipophilic or other helper groups to PNA, by the formation of PNA-DNA chimeras, or by the use of liposomes or other techniques of drug delivery known in the art. For example, PNA-DNA chimeras can be generated which can combine the advantageous properties of PNA and DNA. Such chimeras allow DNA recognition enzymes, e.g., RNase H and DNA polymerases, to interact with the DNA portion while the PNA portion would provide high binding affinity and specificity. PNA-DNA chimeras can be linked using linkers of appropriate lengths selected in terms of base stacking, number of bonds between the nucleobases, and orientation (Hyrup, 1996, supra). The synthesis of PNA-DNA chimeras can be performed as described in Hyrup (1996), supra, and Finn et al. (1996) Nucleic Acids Res. 24(17):3357-63. For example, a DNA chain can be synthesized on a solid support using standard phosphoramidite coupling chemistry and modified nucleoside analogs. Compounds such as 5'-(4-methoxytrityl)amino-5'-deoxy-thymidine phosphoramidite can be used as a link between the PNA and the 5' end of DNA (Mag et al, 1989, Nucleic Acids Res. 17:5973-88). PNA monomers are then coupled in a step-wise manner to produce a chimeric molecule with a 5' PNA segment and a 3' DNA segment (Finn et al, 1996, Nucleic Acids Res. 24(17):3357-63). Alternatively, chimeric molecules can be synthesized with a 5' DNA segment and a 3' PNA segment (Peterser et al, 1975, Bioorganic Med. Chem. Lett. 5:1119-11124).
In other embodiments, the oligonucleotide can include other appended groups such as peptides (e.g., for targeting host cell receptors in vivo), or agents facilitating transport across the cell membrane (see, e.g., Letsinger et al, 1989, Proc. Natl Acad. Sci. USA 86:6553-6556; Lemaitre et al, 1987, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 84:648-652; PCT Publication No. WO 88/09810) or the blood-brain barrier (see, e.g., PCT Publication No. WO 89/10134). In addition, oligonucleotides can be modified with hybridization-triggered cleavage agents (see, e.g., Krol et al, 1988, Bio/Techniques 6:958-976) or intercalating agents (see, e.g., Zon, 1988, Pharm. Res. 5:539-549). To this end, the oligonucleotide can be conjugated to another molecule, e.g., a peptide, hybridization triggered cross-linking agent, transport agent, hybridization-triggered cleavage agent, etc.
The invention also includes molecular beacon nucleic acids having at least one region which is complementary to a nucleic acid ofthe invention, such that the molecular beacon is useful for quantitating the presence ofthe nucleic acid ofthe invention in a sample. A "molecular beacon" nucleic acid is a nucleic acid comprising a pair of complementary regions and having a fluorophore and a fluorescent quencher associated therewith. The fluorophore and quencher are associated with different portions ofthe nucleic acid in such an orientation that when the complementary regions are annealed with one another, fluorescence ofthe fluorophore is quenched by the quencher. When the complementary regions ofthe nucleic acid are not annealed with one another, fluorescence ofthe fluorophore is quenched to a lesser degree. Molecular beacon nucleic acids are described, for example, in U.S. Patent 5,876,930.
II. Isolated Proteins and Antibodies
One aspect ofthe invention pertains to isolated marker proteins and biologically active portions thereof, as well as polypeptide fragments suitable for use as immunogens to raise antibodies directed against a marker protein or a fragment thereof. In one embodiment, the native marker protein can be isolated from cells or tissue sources by an appropriate purification scheme using standard protein purification techniques. In another embodiment, a protein or peptide comprising the whole or a segment ofthe marker protein is produced by recombinant DNA techniques. Alternative to recombinant expression, such protein or peptide can be synthesized chemically using standard peptide synthesis techniques.
An "isolated" or "purified" protein or biologically active portion thereof is substantially free of cellular material or other contaminating proteins from the cell or tissue source from which the protein is derived, or substantially free of chemical precursors or other chemicals when chemically synthesized. The language "substantially free of cellular material" includes preparations of protein in which the protein is separated from cellular components ofthe cells from which it is isolated or recombinantly produced. Thus, protein that is substantially free of cellular material includes preparations of protein having less than about 30%, 20%, 10%, or 5% (by dry weight) of heterologous protein (also refeπed to herein as a "contaminating protein"). When the protein or biologically active portion thereof is recombinantly produced, it is also preferably substantially free of culture medium, i.e., culture medium represents less than about 20%, 10%, or 5% ofthe volume ofthe protein preparation. When the protein is produced by chemical synthesis, it is preferably substantially free of chemical precursors or other chemicals, i.e., it is separated from chemical precursors or other chemicals which are involved in the synthesis ofthe protein. Accordingly such preparations ofthe protein have less than about 30%, 20%, 10%, 5% (by dry weight) of chemical precursors or compounds other than the polypeptide of interest. Biologically active portions of a marker protein include polypeptides comprising amino acid sequences sufficiently identical to or derived from the amino acid sequence ofthe marker protein, which include fewer amino acids than the full length protein, and exhibit at least one activity ofthe coπesponding full-length protein. Typically, biologically active portions comprise a domain or motif with at least one activity ofthe coπesponding full-length protein. A biologically active portion of a marker protein ofthe invention can be a polypeptide which is, for example, 10, 25, 50, 100 or more amino acids in length. Moreover, other biologically active portions, in which other regions ofthe marker protein are deleted, can be prepared by recombinant techniques and evaluated for one or more ofthe functional activities ofthe native form of the marker protein.
Prefeπed marker proteins are encoded by nucleotide sequences comprising the sequence of any ofthe sequences set forth in the Sequence Listing. Other useful proteins are substantially identical (e.g., at least about 40%, preferably 50%, 60%, 70%, 80%, 90%), 95%, or 99%) to one of these sequences and retain the functional activity ofthe coπesponding naturally-occurring marker protein yet differ in amino acid sequence due to natural allelic variation or mutagenesis. To determine the percent identity of two amino acid sequences or of two nucleic acids, the sequences are aligned for optimal comparison purposes (e.g., gaps can be introduced in the sequence of a first amino acid or nucleic acid sequence for optimal alignment with a second amino or nucleic acid sequence). The amino acid residues or nucleotides at coπesponding amino acid positions or nucleotide positions are then compared. When a position in the first sequence is occupied by the same amino acid residue or nucleotide as the coπesponding position in the second sequence, then the molecules are identical at that position. The percent identity between the two sequences is a function ofthe number of identical positions shared by the sequences (i.e., % identity = # of identical positions/total # of positions (e.g., overlapping positions) xlOO). In one embodiment the two sequences are the same length.
The determination of percent identity between two sequences can be accomplished using a mathematical algorithm. A prefeπed, non-limiting example of a mathematical algorithm utilized for the comparison of two sequences is the algorithm of Karlin and Altschul (1990) Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 87:2264-2268, modified as in Karlin and Altschul (1993) Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 90:5873-5877. Such an algorithm is incorporated into the BLASTN and BLASTX programs of Altschul, et al. (1990) J. Mol. Biol. 215:403-410. BLAST nucleotide searches can be performed with the BLASTN program, score = 100, wordlength = 12 to obtain nucleotide sequences homologous to a nucleic acid molecules ofthe invention. BLAST protein searches can be performed with the BLASTP program, score = 50, wordlength = 3 to obtain amino acid sequences homologous to a protein molecules ofthe invention. To obtain gapped alignments for comparison purposes, a newer version ofthe BLAST algorithm called Gapped BLAST can be utilized as described in Altschul et al. (1997) Nucleic Acids Res. 25:3389-3402, which is able to perform gapped local alignments for the programs
BLASTN, BLASTP and BLASTX. Alternatively, PSI-Blast can be used to perform an iterated search which detects distant relationships between molecules. When utilizing BLAST, Gapped BLAST, and PSI-Blast programs, the default parameters ofthe respective programs (e.g., BLASTX and BLASTN) can be used. See http://www.ncbi.nlm.mh.gov. Another prefeπed, non-limiting example of a mathematical algorithm utilized for the comparison of sequences is the algorithm of Myers and Miller, (1988) CABIOS 4: 11-17. Such an algorithm is incorporated into the ALIGN program (version 2.0) which is part ofthe GCG sequence alignment software package. When utilizing the ALIGN program for comparing amino acid sequences, a PAM120 weight residue table, a gap length penalty of 12, and a gap penalty of 4 can be used. Yet another useful algorithm for identifying regions of local sequence similarity and alignment is the FASTA algorithm as described in Pearson and Lipman (1988) Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 85:2444-2448. When using the FASTA algorithm for comparing nucleotide or amino acid sequences, a PAM120 weight residue table can, for example, be used with a A-tuple value of 2.
The percent identity between two sequences can be determined using techniques similar to those described above, with or without allowing gaps. In calculating percent identity, only exact matches are counted.
The invention also provides chimeric or fusion proteins comprising a marker protein or a segment thereof. As used herein, a "chimeric protein" or "fusion protein" comprises all or part (preferably a biologically active part) of a marker protein operably linked to a heterologous polypeptide (i.e., a polypeptide other than the marker protein). Within the fusion protein, the term "operably linked" is intended to indicate that the marker protein or segment thereof and the heterologous polypeptide are fused in-frame to each other. The heterologous polypeptide can be fused to the amino- terminus or the carboxyl-terminus ofthe marker protein or segment.
One useful fusion protein is a GST fusion protein in which a marker protein or segment is fused to the carboxyl terminus of GST sequences. Such fusion proteins can facilitate the purification of a recombinant polypeptide ofthe invention.
In another embodiment, the fusion protein contains a heterologous signal sequence at its amino terminus. For example, the native signal sequence of a marker protein can be removed and replaced with a signal sequence from another protein. For example, the gp67 secretory sequence ofthe baculovirus envelope protein can be used as a heterologous signal sequence (Ausubel et al, ed., Current Protocols in Molecular Biology, John Wiley & Sons, NY, 1992). Other examples of eukaryotic heterologous signal sequences include the secretory sequences of melittin and human placental alkaline phosphatase (Stratagene; La Jolla, California). In yet another example, useful prokaryotic heterologous signal sequences include the phoA secretory signal (Sambrook et al, supra) and the protein A secretory signal (Pharmacia Biotech; Piscataway, New Jersey). In yet another embodiment, the fusion protein is an immunoglobulin fusion protein in which all or part of a marker protein is fused to sequences derived from a member ofthe immunoglobulin protein family. The immunoglobulin fusion proteins ofthe invention can be incorporated into pharmaceutical compositions and administered to a subject to inhibit an interaction between a ligand (soluble or membrane-bound) and a protein on the surface of a cell (receptor), to thereby suppress signal transduction in vivo. The immunoglobulin fusion protein can be used to affect the bioavailability of a cognate ligand of a marker protein. Inhibition of ligand/receptor interaction can be useful therapeutically, both for treating proliferative and differentiative disorders and for modulating (e.g. promoting or inhibiting) cell survival. Moreover, the immunoglobulin fusion proteins ofthe invention can be used as immunogens to produce antibodies directed against a marker protein in a subject, to purify ligands and in screening assays to identify molecules which inhibit the interaction ofthe marker protein with ligands. Chimeric and fusion proteins ofthe invention can be produced by standard recombinant DNA techniques. In another embodiment, the fusion gene can be synthesized by conventional techniques including automated DNA synthesizers. Alternatively, PCR amplification of gene fragments can be carried out using anchor primers which give rise to complementary overhangs between two consecutive gene fragments which can subsequently be annealed and re-amplified to generate a chimeric gene sequence (see, e.g., Ausubel et al, supra). Moreover, many expression vectors are commercially available that already encode a fusion moiety (e.g., a GST polypeptide). A nucleic acid encoding a polypeptide ofthe invention can be cloned into such an expression vector such that the fusion moiety is linked in-frame to the polypeptide ofthe invention. A signal sequence can be used to facilitate secretion and isolation of marker proteins. Signal sequences are typically characterized by a core of hydrophobic amino acids which are generally cleaved from the mature protein during secretion in one or more cleavage events. Such signal peptides contain processing sites that allow cleavage ofthe signal sequence from the mature proteins as they pass through the secretory pathway. Thus, the invention pertains to marker proteins, fusion proteins or segments thereof having a signal sequence, as well as to such proteins from which the signal sequence has been proteolytically cleaved (i.e., the cleavage products). In one embodiment, a nucleic acid sequence encoding a signal sequence can be operably linked in an expression vector to a protein of interest, such as a marker protein or a segment thereof. The signal sequence directs secretion ofthe protein, such as from a eukaryotic host into which the expression vector is transformed, and the signal sequence is subsequently or concuπently cleaved. The protein can then be readily purified from the extracellular medium by art recognized methods. Alternatively, the signal sequence can be linked to the protein of interest using a sequence which facilitates purification, such as with a GST domain.
The present invention also pertains to variants ofthe marker proteins. Such variants have an altered amino acid sequence which can function as either agonists (mimetics) or as antagonists. Variants can be generated by mutagenesis, e.g., discrete point mutation or truncation. An agonist can retain substantially the same, or a subset, ofthe biological activities ofthe naturally occurring form ofthe protein. An antagonist of a protein can inhibit one or more ofthe activities ofthe naturally occurring form of the protein by, for example, competitively binding to a downstream or upstream member of a cellular signaling cascade which includes the protein of interest. Thus, specific biological effects can be elicited by treatment with a variant of limited function. Treatment of a subject with a variant having a subset ofthe biological activities ofthe naturally occurring form ofthe protein can have fewer side effects in a subject relative to treatment with the naturally occurring form ofthe protein. Variants of a marker protein which function as either agonists (mimetics) or as antagonists can be identified by screening combinatorial libraries of mutants, e.g., truncation mutants, ofthe protein ofthe invention for agonist or antagonist activity. In one embodiment, a variegated library of variants is generated by combinatorial mutagenesis at the nucleic acid level and is encoded by a variegated gene library. A variegated library of variants can be produced by, for example, enzymatically ligating a mixture of synthetic oligonucleotides into gene sequences such that a degenerate set of potential protein sequences is expressible as individual polypeptides, or alternatively, as a set of larger fusion proteins (e.g., for phage display). There are a variety of methods which can be used to produce libraries of potential variants ofthe marker proteins from a degenerate oligonucleotide sequence. Methods for synthesizing degenerate oligonucleotides are known in the art (see, e.g., Narang, 1983, Tetrahedron 39:3; Itakura et al, 1984, Annu. Rev. Biochem. 53:323; Itakura et al, 1984, Science 198:1056; Ike et al, 1983 Nucleic Acid Res. 11:477). In addition, libraries of segments of a marker protein can be used to generate a variegated population of polypeptides for screening and subsequent selection of variant marker proteins or segments thereof. For example, a library of coding sequence fragments can be generated by treating a double stranded PCR fragment ofthe coding sequence of interest with a nuclease under conditions wherein nicking occurs only about once per molecule, denaturing the double stranded DNA, renaturing the DNA to form double stranded DNA which can include sense/antisense pairs from different nicked products, removing single stranded portions from reformed duplexes by treatment with SI nuclease, and ligating the resulting fragment library into an expression vector. By this method, an expression library can be derived which encodes amino terminal and internal fragments of various sizes ofthe protein of interest.
Several techniques are known in the art for screening gene products of combinatorial libraries made by point mutations or truncation, and for screening cDNA libraries for gene products having a selected property. The most widely used techniques, which are amenable to high through-put analysis, for screening large gene libraries typically include cloning the gene library into replicable expression vectors, transforming appropriate cells with the resulting library of vectors, and expressing the combinatorial genes under conditions in which detection of a desired activity facilitates isolation ofthe vector encoding the gene whose product was detected. Recursive ensemble mutagenesis (REM), a technique which enhances the frequency of functional mutants in the libraries, can be used in combination with the screening assays to identify variants of a protein ofthe invention (Arkin and Yourvan, 1992, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 59:7811-7815; Delgrave et al, 1993, Protein Engineering 6(3):327- 331).
Another aspect ofthe invention pertains to antibodies directed against a protein ofthe invention. In prefeπed embodiments, the antibodies specifically bind a marker protein or a fragment thereof. The terms "antibody" and "antibodies" as used interchangeably herein refer to immunoglobulin molecules as well as fragments and derivatives thereof that comprise an immuno logically active portion of an immunoglobulin molecule, (i.e., such a portion contains an antigen binding site which specifically binds an antigen, such as a marker protein, e.g. , eta epitope of a marker protein). An antibody which specifically binds to a protein ofthe invention is an antibody which binds the protein, but does not substantially bind other molecules in a sample, e.g., a biological sample, which naturally contains the protein. Examples of an immuno logically active portion of an immunoglobulin molecule include, but are not limited to, single-chain antibodies (scAb), F(ab) and F(ab')2 fragments.
An isolated protein ofthe invention or a fragment thereof can be used as an immunogen to generate antibodies. The full-length protein can be used or, alternatively, the invention provides antigenic peptide fragments for use as immunogens. The antigenic peptide of a protein ofthe invention comprises at least 8 (preferably 10, 15, 20, or 30 or more) amino acid residues ofthe amino acid sequence of one ofthe proteins ofthe invention, and encompasses at least one epitope ofthe protein such that an antibody raised against the peptide forms a specific immune complex with the protein. Prefeπed epitopes encompassed by the antigenic peptide are regions that are located on the surface ofthe protein, e.g., hydrophilic regions. Hydrophobicity sequence analysis, hydrophilicity sequence analysis, or similar analyses can be used to identify hydrophilic regions. In prefeπed embodiments, an isolated marker protein or fragment thereof is used as an immunogen. An immunogen typically is used to prepare antibodies by immunizing a suitable (i.e. immunocompetent) subject such as a rabbit, goat, mouse, or other mammal or vertebrate. An appropriate immunogenic preparation can contain, for example, recombinantly-expressed or chemically-synthesized protein or peptide. The preparation can further include an adjuvant, such as Freund's complete or incomplete adjuvant, or a similar immunostimulatory agent. Prefeπed immunogen compositions are those that contain no other human proteins such as, for example, immunogen compositions made using a non-human host cell for recombinant expression of a protein ofthe invention. In such a manner, the resulting antibody compositions have reduced or no binding of human proteins other than a protein ofthe invention. The invention provides polyclonal and monoclonal antibodies. The term
"monoclonal antibody" or "monoclonal antibody composition", as used herein, refers to a population of antibody molecules that contain only one species of an antigen binding site capable of immunoreacting with a particular epitope. Prefeπed polyclonal and monoclonal antibody compositions are ones that have been selected for antibodies directed against a protein ofthe invention. Particularly prefeπed polyclonal and monoclonal antibody preparations are ones that contain only antibodies directed against a marker protein or fragment thereof. Polyclonal antibodies can be prepared by immunizing a suitable subject with a protein ofthe invention as an immunogen The antibody titer in the immunized subject can be monitored over time by standard techniques, such as with an enzyme linked immunosorbent assay (ELISA) using immobilized polypeptide. At an appropriate time after immunization, e.g., when the specific antibody titers are highest, antibody- producing cells can be obtained from the subject and used to prepare monoclonal antibodies (mAb) by standard techniques, such as the hybridoma technique originally described by Kohler and Milstein (1975) Nature 256:495-497, the human B cell hybridoma technique (see Kozbor et al, 1983, Immunol. Today 4:72), the EBV- hybridoma technique (see Cole et al. , pp. 77-96 In Monoclonal Antibodies and Cancer Therapy, Alan R. Liss, Inc., 1985) or trioma techniques. The technology for producing hybridomas is well known (see generally Current Protocols in Immunology, Coligan et al. ed., John Wiley & Sons, New York, 1994). Hybridoma cells producing a monoclonal antibody ofthe invention are detected by screening the hybridoma culture supematants for antibodies that bind the polypeptide of interest, e.g., using a standard ELISA assay.
Alternative to preparing monoclonal antibody-secreting hybridomas, a monoclonal antibody directed against a protein ofthe invention can be identified and isolated by screening a recombinant combinatorial immunoglobulin library (e.g., an antibody phage display library) with the polypeptide of interest. Kits for generating and screening phage display libraries are commercially available (e.g., the Pharmacia Recombinant Phage Antibody System, Catalog No. 27-9400-01; and the Stratagene SurfZAP Phage Display Kit, Catalog No. 240612). Additionally, examples of methods and reagents particularly amenable for use in generating and screening antibody display library can be found in, for example, U.S. Patent No. 5,223,409; PCT Publication No. WO 92/18619; PCT Publication No. WO 91/17271; PCT Publication No. WO 92/20791; PCT Publication No. WO 92/15679; PCT Publication No. WO 93/01288; PCT Publication No. WO 92/01047; PCT Publication No. WO 92/09690; PCT Publication No. WO 90/02809; Fuchs et al. (1991) Bio/Technology 9:1370-1372; Hay et al. (1992) Hum. Antibod. Hybridomas 3:81-85; Huse et al. (1989) Science 246:1275- 1281; Griffiths et al. (1993) EMBO J. 12:725-734. The invention also provides recombinant antibodies that specifically bind a protein ofthe invention. In prefeπed embodiments, the recombinant antibodies specifically binds a marker protein or fragment thereof. Recombinant antibodies include, but are not limited to, chimeric and humanized monoclonal antibodies, comprising both human and non-human portions, single-chain antibodies and multi- specific antibodies. A chimeric antibody is a molecule in which different portions are derived from different animal species, such as those having a variable region derived from a murine mAb and a human immunoglobulin constant region. (See, e.g., Cabilly et al, U.S. Patent No. 4,816,567; and Boss et al, U.S. Patent No. 4,816,397, which are incoφorated herein by reference in their entirety.) Single-chain antibodies have an antigen binding site and consist of a single polypeptide. They can be produced by techniques known in the art, for example using methods described in Ladner et. al U.S. Pat. No. 4,946,778 (which is incoφorated herein by reference in its entirety); Bird et al, (1988) Science 242:423-426; Whitlow et al, (1991) Methods in Enzymology 2:1-9; Whitlow et al, (1991) Methods in Enzymology 2:97-105; and Huston et al, (1991) Methods in Enzymology Molecular Design and Modeling: Concepts and Applications 203:46-88. Multi-specific antibodies are antibody molecules having at least two antigen-binding sites that specifically bind different antigens. Such molecules can be produced by techniques known in the art, for example using methods described in Segal, U.S. Patent No. 4,676,980 (the disclosure of which is incoφorated herein by reference in its entirety); Holliger et al, (1993) Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 90:6444-6448; Whitlow et al, (1994) Protein Eng. 7:1017-1026 and U.S. Pat. No. 6,121,424.
Humanized antibodies are antibody molecules from non-human species having one or more complementarity determining regions (CDRs) from the non-human species and a framework region from a human immunoglobulin molecule. (See, e.g., Queen, U.S. Patent No. 5,585,089, which is incoφorated herein by reference in its entirety.) Humanized monoclonal antibodies can be produced by recombinant DNA techniques known in the art, for example using methods described in PCT Publication No. WO 87/02671; European Patent Application 184,187; European Patent Application 171 ,496; European Patent Application 173,494; PCT Publication No. WO 86/01533; U.S. Patent No. 4,816,567; European Patent Application 125,023; Better et al. (1988) Science 240:1041-1043; Liu et al. (1987) Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 84:3439-3443; Liu et al. (1987) J. Immunol. 139:3521- 3526; Sun et al. (1987) Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 84:214-218; Nishimura et al. (1987) Cancer Res. 47:999-1005; Wood et al. (1985) Nature 314:446-449; and Shaw et al. (1988) /. Natl. Cancer Inst. 80:1553-1559); Morrison (1985) Science 229:1202-1207; Oi et al. (1986) Bio/Techniques 4:214; U.S. Patent 5,225,539; Jones et al. (1986) Nature 321:552-525; Verhoeyan et al. (1988) Science 239:1534; and Beidler et al. (1988) J. Immunol. 141:4053-4060.
More particularly, humanized antibodies can be produced, for example, using transgenic mice which are incapable of expressing endogenous immunoglobulin heavy and light chains genes, but which can express human heavy and light chain genes. The transgenic mice are immunized in the normal fashion with a selected antigen, e.g., all or a portion of a polypeptide coπesponding to a marker ofthe invention. Monoclonal antibodies directed against the antigen can be obtained using conventional hybridoma technology. The human immunoglobulin transgenes harbored by the transgenic mice rearrange during B cell differentiation, and subsequently undergo class switching and somatic mutation. Thus, using such a technique, it is possible to produce therapeutically useful IgG, IgA and IgE antibodies. For an overview of this technology for producing human antibodies, see Lonberg and Huszar (1995) Int. Rev. Immunol. 13:65-93). For a detailed discussion of this technology for producing human antibodies and human monoclonal antibodies and protocols for producing such antibodies, see, e.g., U.S. Patent 5,625,126; U.S. Patent 5,633,425; U.S. Patent 5,569,825; U.S. Patent 5,661,016; and U.S. Patent 5,545,806. In addition, companies such as Abgenix, Inc. (Freemont, CA), can be engaged to provide human antibodies directed against a selected antigen using technology similar to that described above.
Completely human antibodies which recognize a selected epitope can be generated using a technique refeπed to as "guided selection." In this approach a selected non-human monoclonal antibody, e.g., a murine antibody, is used to guide the selection of a completely human antibody recognizing the same epitope (Jespers et al, 1994, Bio/technology 12:899-903).
The antibodies ofthe invention can be isolated after production (e.g., from the blood or serum ofthe subject) or synthesis and further purified by well-known techniques. For example, IgG antibodies can be purified using protein A chromatography. Antibodies specific for a protein ofthe invention can be selected or (e.g., partially purified) or purified by, e.g., affinity chromatography. For example, a recombinantly expressed and purified (or partially purified) protein ofthe invention is produced as described herein, and covalently or non-covalently coupled to a solid support such as, for example, a chromatography column. The column can then be used to affinity purify antibodies specific for the proteins ofthe invention from a sample containing antibodies directed against a large number of different epitopes, thereby generating a substantially purified antibody composition, i.e., one that is substantially free of contaminating antibodies. By a substantially purified antibody composition is meant, in this context, that the antibody sample contains at most only 30% (by dry weight) of contaminating antibodies directed against epitopes other than those ofthe desired protein ofthe invention, and preferably at most 20%, yet more preferably at most 10%, and most preferably at most 5% (by dry weight) ofthe sample is contaminating antibodies. A purified antibody composition means that at least 99% of the antibodies in the composition are directed against the desired protein ofthe invention.
In a prefeπed embodiment, the substantially purified antibodies ofthe invention may specifically bind to a signal peptide, a secreted sequence, an extracellular domain, a transmembrane or a cytoplasmic domain or cytoplasmic membrane of a protein ofthe invention. In a particularly prefeπed embodiment, the substantially purified antibodies ofthe invention specifically bind to a secreted sequence or an extracellular domain ofthe amino acid sequences of a protein ofthe invention. In a more prefeπed embodiment, the substantially purified antibodies ofthe invention specifically bind to a secreted sequence or an extracellular domain ofthe amino acid sequences of a marker protein.
An antibody directed against a protein ofthe invention can be used to isolate the protein by standard techniques, such as affinity chromatography or immunoprecipitation. Moreover, such an antibody can be used to detect the marker protein or fragment thereof (e.g., in a cellular lysate or cell supernatant) in order to evaluate the level and pattern of expression ofthe marker. The antibodies can also be used diagnostically to monitor protein levels in tissues or body fluids (e.g. in a cervical- associated body fluid) as part of a clinical testing procedure, e.g., to, for example, determine the efficacy of a given treatment regimen. Detection can be facilitated by the use of an antibody derivative, which comprises an antibody ofthe invention coupled to a detectable substance. Examples of detectable substances include various enzymes, prosthetic groups, fluorescent materials, luminescent materials, bioluminescent materials, and radioactive materials. Examples of suitable enzymes include horseradish peroxidase, alkaline phosphatase, β-galactosidase, or acetylcholinesterase; examples of suitable prosthetic group complexes include streptavidin/biotin and avidin/biotin; examples of suitable fluorescent materials include umbelliferone, fluorescein, fluorescein isothiocyanate, rhodamine, dichlorotriazinylamine fluorescein, dansyl chloride or phycoerythrin; an example of a luminescent material includes luminol; examples of bioluminescent materials include luciferase, luciferin, and aequorin, and
125 131 35 3 examples of suitable radioactive mateπal include I, I, S or H.
Antibodies ofthe invention may also be used as therapeutic agents in treating cancers. In a prefeπed embodiment, completely human antibodies ofthe invention are used for therapeutic treatment of human cancer patients, particularly those having an cervical cancer. In another prefeπed embodiment, antibodies that bind specifically to a marker protein or fragment thereof are used for therapeutic treatment. Further, such therapeutic antibody may be an antibody derivative or immunotoxin comprising an antibody conjugated to a therapeutic moiety such as a cytotoxin, a therapeutic agent or a radioactive metal ion. A cytotoxin or cytotoxic agent includes any agent that is detrimental to cells. Examples include taxol, cytochalasin B, gramicidin D, ethidium bromide, emetine, mitomycin, etoposide, tenoposide, vincristine, vinblastine, colchicin, doxorubicin, daunorubicin, dihydroxy anthracin dione, mitoxantrone, mithramycin, actinomycin D, 1-dehydrotestosterone, glucocorticoids, procaine, tetracaine, lidocaine, propranolol, and puromycin and analogs or homologs thereof. Therapeutic agents include, but are not limited to, antimetabolites (e.g., methotrexate, 6-mercaptopurine, 6-thioguanine, cytarabine, 5-fluorouracil decarbazine), alkylating agents (e.g., mechlorethamine, thioepa chlorambucil, melphalan, carmustine (BSNU) and lomustine (CCNU), cyclothosphamide, busulfan, dibromomannitol, streptozotocin, mitomycin C, and cis-dichlorodiamine platinum (II) (DDP) cisplatin), anthracyclines (e.g., daunorubicin (formerly daunomycin) and doxorubicin), antibiotics (e.g., dactinomycin (formerly actinomycin), bleomycin, mithramycin, and anthramycin (AMC)), and anti-mitotic agents (e.g., vincristine and vinblastine). The conjugated antibodies ofthe invention can be used for modifying a given biological response, for the drug moiety is not to be construed as limited to classical chemical therapeutic agents. For example, the drug moiety may be a protein or polypeptide possessing a desired biological activity. Such proteins may include, for example, a toxin such as ribosome-inhibiting protein (see Better et al, U.S. Patent No. 6,146,631, the disclosure of which is incoφorated herein in its entirety), abrin, ricin A, pseudomonas exotoxin, or diphtheria toxin; a protein such as tumor necrosis factor, .alpha. -interferon, .beta. -interferon, nerve growth factor, platelet derived growth factor, tissue plasminogen activator; or, biological response modifiers such as, for example, lymphokines, interleukin-1 ("IL-1"), interleukin-2 ("IL-2"), interleukin-6 ("IL-6"), granulocyte macrophase colony stimulating factor ("GM-CSF"), granulocyte colony stimulating factor ("G-CSF"), or other growth factors.
Techniques for conjugating such therapeutic moiety to antibodies are well known, see, e.g., Arnon et al, "Monoclonal Antibodies For Immunotargeting Of Drugs In Cancer Therapy", in Monoclonal Antibodies And Cancer Therapy, Reisfeld et al. (eds.), pp. 243-56 (Alan R. Liss, Inc. 1985); Hellstrom et al, "Antibodies For Drug Delivery", in Controlled Drug Delivery (2nd Ed.), Robinson et al. (eds.), pp. 623-53 (Marcel Dekker, Inc. 1987); Thoφe, "Antibody Carriers Of Cytotoxic Agents In Cancer Therapy: A Review", in Monoclonal Antibodies '84: Biological And Clinical
Applications, Pinchera et al (eds.), pp. 475-506 (1985); "Analysis, Results, And Future Prospective Of The Therapeutic Use Of Radiolabeled Antibody In Cancer Therapy", in Monoclonal Antibodies For Cancer Detection And Therapy, Baldwin et al. (eds.), pp. 303-16 (Academic Press 1985), and Thoφe et al, "The Preparation And Cytotoxic Properties Of Antibody-Toxin Conjugates", Immunol. Rev., 62:119-58 (1982).
Accordingly, in one aspect, the invention provides substantially purified antibodies, antibody fragments and derivatives, all of which specifically bind to a protein ofthe invention and preferably, a marker protein. In various embodiments, the substantially purified antibodies ofthe invention, or fragments or derivatives thereof, can be human, non-human, chimeric and/or humanized antibodies. In another aspect, the invention provides non-human antibodies, antibody fragments and derivatives, all of which specifically bind to a protein ofthe invention and preferably, a marker protein. Such non-human antibodies can be goat, mouse, sheep, horse, chicken, rabbit, or rat antibodies. Alternatively, the non-human antibodies ofthe invention can be chimeric and or humanized antibodies. In addition, the non-human antibodies ofthe invention can be polyclonal antibodies or monoclonal antibodies. In still a further aspect, the invention provides monoclonal antibodies, antibody fragments and derivatives, all of which specifically bind to a protein ofthe invention and preferably, a marker protein. The monoclonal antibodies can be human, humanized, chimeric and/or non-human antibodies.
The invention also provides a kit containing an antibody ofthe invention conjugated to a detectable substance, and instructions for use. Still another aspect ofthe invention is a pharmaceutical composition comprising an antibody ofthe invention. In one embodiment, the pharmaceutical composition comprises an antibody ofthe invention and a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier.
III. Recombinant Expression Vectors and Host Cells Another aspect ofthe invention pertains to vectors, preferably expression vectors, containing a nucleic acid encoding a marker protein (or a portion of such a protein). As used herein, the term "vector" refers to a nucleic acid molecule capable of transporting another nucleic acid to which it has been linked. One type of vector is a "plasmid", which refers to a circular double stranded DNA loop into which additional DNA segments can be ligated. Another type of vector is a viral vector, wherein additional DNA segments can be ligated into the viral genome. Certain vectors are capable of autonomous replication in a host cell into which they are introduced (e.g., bacterial vectors having a bacterial origin of replication and episomal mammalian vectors). Other vectors (e.g., non-episomal mammalian vectors) are integrated into the genome of a host cell upon introduction into the host cell, and thereby are replicated along with the host genome. Moreover, certain vectors, namely expression vectors, are capable of directing the expression of genes to which they are operably linked. In general, expression vectors of utility in recombinant DNA techniques are often in the form of plasmids (vectors). However, the invention is intended to include such other forms of expression vectors, such as viral vectors (e.g., replication defective retroviruses, adenoviruses and adeno-associated viruses), which serve equivalent functions.
The recombinant expression vectors ofthe invention comprise a nucleic acid ofthe invention in a form suitable for expression ofthe nucleic acid in a host cell. This means that the recombinant expression vectors include one or more regulatory sequences, selected on the basis ofthe host cells to be used for expression, which is operably linked to the nucleic acid sequence to be expressed. Within a recombinant expression vector, "operably linked" is intended to mean that the nucleotide sequence of interest is linked to the regulatory sequence(s) in a manner which allows for expression ofthe nucleotide sequence (e.g., in an in vitro transcription/translation system or in a host cell when the vector is introduced into the host cell). The term "regulatory sequence" is intended to include promoters, enhancers and other expression control elements (e.g., polyadenylation signals). Such regulatory sequences are described, for example, in Goeddel, Methods in Enzymology: Gene Expression Technology vol.185, Academic Press, San Diego, CA (1991). Regulatory sequences include those which direct constitutive expression of a nucleotide sequence in many types of host cell and those which direct expression ofthe nucleotide sequence only in certain host cells (e.g., tissue-specific regulatory sequences). It will be appreciated by those skilled in the art that the design ofthe expression vector can depend on such factors as the choice ofthe host cell to be transformed, the level of expression of protein desired, and the like. The expression vectors ofthe invention can be introduced into host cells to thereby produce proteins or peptides, including fusion proteins or peptides, encoded by nucleic acids as described herein.
The recombinant expression vectors ofthe invention can be designed for expression of a marker protein or a segment thereof in prokaryotic (e.g., E. coli) or eukaryotic cells (e.g., insect cells {using baculovirus expression vectors}, yeast cells or mammalian cells). Suitable host cells are discussed further in Goeddel, supra.
Alternatively, the recombinant expression vector can be transcribed and translated in vitro, for example using T7 promoter regulatory sequences and T7 polymerase.
Expression of proteins in prokaryotes is most often carried out in E. coli with vectors containing constitutive or inducible promoters directing the expression of either fusion or non- fusion proteins. Fusion vectors add a number of amino acids to a protein encoded therein, usually to the amino terminus ofthe recombinant protein. Such fusion vectors typically serve three puφoses: 1) to increase expression of recombinant protein; 2) to increase the solubility ofthe recombinant protein; and 3) to aid in the purification ofthe recombinant protein by acting as a ligand in affinity purification. Often, in fusion expression vectors, a proteolytic cleavage site is introduced at the junction ofthe fusion moiety and the recombinant protein to enable separation ofthe recombinant protein from the fusion moiety subsequent to purification ofthe fusion protein. Such enzymes, and their cognate recognition sequences, include Factor Xa, thrombin and enterokinase. Typical fusion expression vectors include pGEX (Pharmacia Biotech Inc; Smith and Johnson, 1988, Gene 67:31-40), pMAL (New England Biolabs, Beverly, MA) and pRIT5 (Pharmacia, Piscataway, NJ) which fuse glutathione S-transferase (GST), maltose E binding protein, or protein A, respectively, to the target recombinant protein.
Examples of suitable inducible non-fusion E. coli expression vectors include pTrc (Amann et al, 1988, Gene 69:301-315) and pET l id (Studier et al, p. 60- 89, In Gene Expression Technology: Methods in Enzymology vol.185, Academic Press, San Diego, CA, 1991). Target gene expression from the pTrc vector relies on host RNA polymerase transcription from a hybrid tφ-lac fusion promoter. Target gene expression from the pET l id vector relies on transcription from a T7 gnlO-lac fusion promoter mediated by a co-expressed viral RNA polymerase (T7 gnl). This viral polymerase is supplied by host strains BL21(DE3) or HMS174(DE3) from a resident prophage harboring a T7 gnl gene under the transcriptional control ofthe lacUV 5 promoter. One strategy to maximize recombinant protein expression in E. coli is to express the protein in a host bacteria with an impaired capacity to proteolytically cleave the recombinant protein (Gottesman, p. 119-128, In Gene Expression Technology: Methods in Enzymology vol. 185, Academic Press, San Diego, CA, 1990. Another strategy is to alter the nucleic acid sequence ofthe nucleic acid to be inserted into an expression vector so that the individual codons for each amino acid are those preferentially utilized in E. coli (Wada et al, 1992, Nucleic Acids Res. 20:2111-2118). Such alteration of nucleic acid sequences ofthe invention can be carried out by standard DNA synthesis techniques.
In another embodiment, the expression vector is a yeast expression vector. Examples of vectors for expression in yeast S. cerevisiae include pYepSecl (Baldari et al, 1987, EMBOJ. 6:229-234), pMFa (Kurjan and Herskowitz, 1982, Cell 30:933-943), pJRY88 (Schultz et al, 1987, Gene 54:113-123), pYES2 (Invitrogen Coφoration, San Diego, CA), and pPicZ (Invitrogen Coφ, San Diego, CA).
Alternatively, the expression vector is a baculovirus expression vector. Baculovirus vectors available for expression of proteins in cultured insect cells (e.g., Sf 9 cells) include the pAc series (Smith et al, 1983, Mol. Cell Biol. 3:2156-2165) and the pVL series (Lucklow and Summers, 1989, Virology 170:31-39). In yet another embodiment, a nucleic acid ofthe invention is expressed in mammalian cells using a mammalian expression vector. Examples of mammalian expression vectors include pCDM8 (Seed, 1987, Nature 329:840) and pMT2PC (Kaufman et al, 1987, EMBO J. 6:187-195). When used in mammalian cells, the expression vector's control functions are often provided by viral regulatory elements. For example, commonly used promoters are derived from polyoma, Adenovirus 2, cytomegalovirus and Simian Virus 40. For other suitable expression systems for both prokaryotic and eukaryotic cells see chapters 16 and 17 of Sambrook et al, supra.
In another embodiment, the recombinant mammalian expression vector is capable of directing expression ofthe nucleic acid preferentially in a particular cell type (e.g., tissue-specific regulatory elements are used to express the nucleic acid). Tissue- specific regulatory elements are known in the art. Νon-limiting examples of suitable tissue-specific promoters include the albumin promoter (liver-specific; Pinkert et al, 1987, Genes Dev. 1:268-277), lymphoid-specific promoters (Calame and Eaton, 1988, Adv. Immunol. 43:235-275), in particular promoters of T cell receptors (Winoto and Baltimore, 1989, EMBO J. 8:729-733) and immunoglobulins (Banerji et al, 1983, Cell 33:729-740; Queen and Baltimore, 1983, Cell 33:741-748), neuron-specific promoters (e.g., the neurofilament promoter; Byrne and Ruddle, 1989, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 86:5473-5477), pancreas-specific promoters (Edlund et al, 1985, Science 230:912-916), and mammary gland-specific promoters (e.g. , milk whey promoter; U.S. Patent No. 4,873,316 and European Application Publication No. 264,166). Developmentally- regulated promoters are also encompassed, for example the murine hox promoters (Kessel and Gruss, 1990, Science 249:374-379) and the α-fetoprotein promoter (Camper and Tilghman, 1989, Genes Dev. 3:537-546). The invention further provides a recombinant expression vector comprising a DNA molecule ofthe invention cloned into the expression vector in an antisense orientation. That is, the DNA molecule is operably linked to a regulatory sequence in a manner which allows for expression (by transcription ofthe DNA molecule) of an RNA molecule which is antisense to the mRNA encoding a polypeptide ofthe invention. Regulatory sequences operably linked to a nucleic acid cloned in the antisense orientation can be chosen which direct the continuous expression ofthe antisense RNA molecule in a variety of cell types, for instance viral promoters and/or enhancers, or regulatory sequences can be chosen which direct constitutive, tissue- specific or cell type specific expression of antisense RNA. The antisense expression vector can be in the form of a recombinant plasmid, phagemid, or attenuated virus in which antisense nucleic acids are produced under the control of a high efficiency regulatory region, the activity of which can be determined by the cell type into which the vector is introduced. For a discussion ofthe regulation of gene expression using antisense genes see Weintraub et al, 1986, Trends in Genetics, Vol. 1(1).
Another aspect ofthe invention pertains to host cells into which a recombinant expression vector ofthe invention has been introduced. The terms "host cell" and "recombinant host cell" are used interchangeably herein. It is understood that such terms refer not only to the particular subject cell but to the progeny or potential progeny of such a cell. Because certain modifications may occur in succeeding generations due to either mutation or environmental influences, such progeny may not, in fact, be identical to the parent cell, but are still included within the scope ofthe term as used herein. A host cell can be any prokaryotic (e.g., E. coli) or eukaryotic cell (e.g., insect cells, yeast or mammalian cells).
Vector DNA can be introduced into prokaryotic or eukaryotic cells via conventional transformation or transfection techniques. As used herein, the terms "transformation" and "transfection" are intended to refer to a variety of art-recognized techniques for introducing foreign nucleic acid into a host cell, including calcium phosphate or calcium chloride co-precipitation, DEAE-dextran-mediated transfection, lipofection, or electroporation. Suitable methods for transforming or transfecting host cells can be found in Sambrook, et al. (supra), and other laboratory manuals.
For stable transfection of mammalian cells, it is known that, depending upon the expression vector and transfection technique used, only a small fraction of cells may integrate the foreign DNA into their genome. In order to identify and select these integrants, a gene that encodes a selectable marker (e.g., for resistance to antibiotics) is generally introduced into the host cells along with the gene of interest. Prefeπed selectable markers include those which confer resistance to drugs, such as G418, hygromycin and methotrexate. Cells stably transfected with the introduced nucleic acid can be identified by drug selection (e.g., cells that have incoφorated the selectable marker will survive, while the other cells die). A host cell ofthe invention, such as a prokaryotic or eukaryotic host cell in culture, can be used to produce a marker protein or a segment thereof. Accordingly, the invention further provides methods for producing a marker protein or a segment thereof using the host cells ofthe invention. In one embodiment, the method comprises culturing the host cell ofthe invention (into which a recombinant expression vector encoding a marker protein or a segment thereof has been introduced) in a suitable medium such that the is produced. In another embodiment, the method further comprises isolating the marker protein or a segment thereof from the medium or the host cell. The host cells ofthe invention can also be used to produce nonhuman transgenic animals. For example, in one embodiment, a host cell ofthe invention is a fertilized oocyte or an embryonic stem cell into which a sequences encoding a marker protein or a segment thereof have been introduced. Such host cells can then be used to create non-human transgenic animals in which exogenous sequences encoding a marker protein ofthe invention have been introduced into their genome or homologous recombinant animals in which endogenous gene(s) encoding a marker protein have been altered. Such animals are useful for studying the function and/or activity ofthe marker protein and for identifying and/or evaluating modulators of marker protein. As used herein, a "transgenic animal" is a non-human animal, preferably a mammal, more preferably a rodent such as a rat or mouse, in which one or more ofthe cells ofthe animal includes a transgene. Other examples of transgenic animals include non-human primates, sheep, dogs, cows, goats, chickens, amphibians, etc. A transgene is exogenous DNA which is integrated into the genome of a cell from which a transgenic animal develops and which remains in the genome ofthe mature animal, thereby directing the expression of an encoded gene product in one or more cell types or tissues ofthe transgenic animal. As used herein, an "homologous recombinant animal" is a non- human animal, preferably a mammal, more preferably a mouse, in which an endogenous gene has been altered by homologous recombination between the endogenous gene and an exogenous DNA molecule introduced into a cell ofthe animal, e.g., an embryonic cell ofthe animal, prior to development ofthe animal.
A transgenic animal ofthe invention can be created by introducing a nucleic acid encoding a marker protein into the male pronuclei of a fertilized oocyte, e.g., by microinjection, retroviral infection, and allowing the oocyte to develop in a pseudopregnant female foster animal. Intronic sequences and polyadenylation signals can also be included in the transgene to increase the efficiency of expression ofthe transgene. A tissue-specific regulatory sequence(s) can be operably linked to the transgene to direct expression ofthe polypeptide ofthe invention to particular cells. Methods for generating transgenic animals via embryo manipulation and microinjection, particularly animals such as mice, have become conventional in the art and are described, for example, in U.S. Patent Nos. 4,736,866 and 4,870,009, U.S. Patent No. 4,873,191 and in Hogan, Manipulating the Mouse Embryo, Cold Spring Harbor Laboratory Press, Cold Spring Harbor, N.Y., 1986. Similar methods are used for production of other transgenic animals. A transgenic founder animal can be identified based upon the presence ofthe transgene in its genome and/or expression of mRNA encoding the transgene in tissues or cells ofthe animals. A transgenic founder animal can then be used to breed additional animals carrying the transgene. Moreover, transgenic animals carrying the transgene can further be bred to other transgenic animals carrying other transgenes.
To create an homologous recombinant animal, a vector is prepared which contains at least a portion of a gene encoding a marker protein into which a deletion, addition or substitution has been introduced to thereby alter, e.g., functionally disrupt, the gene. In a prefeπed embodiment, the vector is designed such that, upon homologous recombination, the endogenous gene is functionally disrupted (i.e., no longer encodes a functional protein; also refeπed to as a "knock out" vector). Alternatively, the vector can be designed such that, upon homologous recombination, the endogenous gene is mutated or otherwise altered but still encodes functional protein (e.g., the upstream regulatory region can be altered to thereby alter the expression ofthe endogenous protein). In the homologous recombination vector, the altered portion ofthe gene is flanked at its 5' and 3' ends by additional nucleic acid ofthe gene to allow for homologous recombination to occur between the exogenous gene carried by the vector and an endogenous gene in an embryonic stem cell. The additional flanking nucleic acid sequences are of sufficient length for successful homologous recombination with the endogenous gene. Typically, several kilobases of flanking DNA (both at the 5' and 3' ends) are included in the vector (see, e.g., Thomas and Capecchi, 1987, Cell 51:503 for a description of homologous recombination vectors). The vector is introduced into an embryonic stem cell line (e.g., by electroporation) and cells in which the introduced gene has homologously recombined with the endogenous gene are selected (see, e.g., Li et al, 1992, Cell 69:915). The selected cells are then injected into a blastocyst of an animal (e.g., a mouse) to form aggregation chimeras (see, e.g., Bradley, Teratocarcinomas and Embryonic Stem Cells: A Practical Approach, Robertson, Ed., IRL, Oxford, 1987, pp. 113-152). A chimeric embryo can then be implanted into a suitable pseudopregnant female foster animal and the embryo brought to term. Progeny harboring the homologously recombined DNA in their germ cells can be used to breed animals in which all cells ofthe animal contain the homologously recombined DNA by germline transmission ofthe transgene. Methods for constructing homologous recombination vectors and homologous recombinant animals are described further in Bradley (1991) Current Opinion in Bio/Technology 2:823-829 and in PCT Publication NOS. WO 90/11354, WO 91/01140, WO 92/0968, and WO 93/04169.
In another embodiment, transgenic non-human animals can be produced which contain selected systems which allow for regulated expression ofthe transgene. One example of such a system is the cre/loxP recombinase system of bacteriophage PI . For a description ofthe cre/loxP recombinase system, see, e.g., Lakso et al. (1992) Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 89:6232-6236. Another example of a recombinase system is the FLP recombinase system of Saccharomyces cerevisiae (O'Gorman et al, 1991, Science 251:1351-1355). If a cre/loxP recombinase system is used to regulate expression ofthe transgene, animals containing transgenes encoding both the Cre recombinase and a selected protein are required. Such animals can be provided through the construction of "double" transgenic animals, e.g., by mating two transgenic animals, one containing a transgene encoding a selected protein and the other containing a transgene encoding a recombinase. Clones ofthe non-human transgenic animals described herein can also be produced according to the methods described in Wilmut et al. (1997) Nature 385:810- 813 and PCT Publication NOS. WO 97/07668 and WO 97/07669.
IN. Pharmaceutical Compositions The nucleic acid molecules, polypeptides, and antibodies (also refeπed to herein as "active compounds") ofthe invention can be incoφorated into pharmaceutical compositions suitable for administration. Such compositions typically comprise the nucleic acid molecule, protein, or antibody and a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier. As used herein the language "pharmaceutically acceptable carrier" is intended to include any and all solvents, dispersion media, coatings, antibacterial and antifungal agents, isotonic and absoφtion delaying agents, and the like, compatible with pharmaceutical administration. The use of such media and agents for pharmaceutically active substances is well known in the art. Except insofar as any conventional media or agent is incompatible with the active compound, use thereof in the compositions is contemplated. Supplementary active compounds can also be incoφorated into the compositions.
The invention includes methods for preparing pharmaceutical compositions for modulating the expression or activity of a marker nucleic acid or protein . Such methods comprise formulating a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier with an agent which modulates expression or activity of a marker nucleic acid or protein. Such compositions can further include additional active agents. Thus, the invention further includes methods for preparing a pharmaceutical composition by formulating a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier with an agent which modulates expression or activity of a marker nucleic acid or protein and one or more additional active compounds.
The invention also provides methods (also refeπed to herein as "screening assays") for identifying modulators, i.e., candidate or test compounds or agents (e.g., peptides, peptidomimetics, peptoids, small molecules or other drugs) which (a) bind to the marker, or (b) have a modulatory (e.g., stimulatory or inhibitory) effect on the activity ofthe marker or, more specifically, (c) have a modulatory effect on the interactions ofthe marker with one or more of its natural substrates (e.g., peptide, protein, hormone, co-factor, or nucleic acid), or (d) have a modulatory effect on the expression ofthe marker. Such assays typically comprise a reaction between the marker and one or more assay components. The other components may be either the test compound itself, or a combination of test compound and a natural binding partner ofthe marker.
The test compounds ofthe present invention may be obtained from any available source, including systematic libraries of natural and or synthetic compounds. Test compounds may also be obtained by any ofthe numerous approaches in combinatorial library methods known in the art, including: biological libraries; peptoid libraries (libraries of molecules having the functionalities of peptides, but with a novel, non-peptide backbone which are resistant to enzymatic degradation but which nevertheless remain bioactive; see, e.g., Zuckermann et al, 1994, J. Med. Chem. 37:2678-85); spatially addressable parallel solid phase or solution phase libraries; synthetic library methods requiring deconvolution; the 'one-bead one-compound' library method; and synthetic library methods using affinity chromatography selection. The biological library and peptoid library approaches are limited to peptide libraries, while the other four approaches are applicable to peptide, non-peptide oligomer or small molecule libraries of compounds (Lam, 1997 ', Anticancer Drug Des. 12:145).
Examples of methods for the synthesis of molecular libraries can be found in the art, for example in: DeWitt et al. (1993) Proc. Natl Acad. Sci. U.S.A. 90:6909; Erb et al (1994) Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 91:11422; Zuckermann et al. (1994). J. Med. Chem. 37:2678; Cho et al. (1993) Science 261:1303; Caπell et al. (1994) Angew. Chem. Int. Ed. Engl 33:2059; Carell et al. (1994) Angew. Chem. Int. Ed. Engl 33:2061; and in Gallop et al. (1994) J. Med. Chem. 37:1233. Libraries of compounds may be presented in solution (e.g., Houghten,
1992, Biotechniques 13:412-421), or on beads (Lam, 1991, Nature 354:82-84), chips (Fodor, 1993, Nature 364:555-556), bacteria and/or spores, (Ladner, USP 5,223,409), plasmids (Cull et al, 1992, Proc Natl Acad Sci USA 89:1865-1869) or on phage (Scott and Smith, 1990, Science 249:386-390; Devlin, 1990, Science 249:404-406; Cwirla et al, 1990, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. 87:6378-6382; Felici, 1991, J. Mol. Biol. 222:301-310; Ladner, supra.).
In one embodiment, the invention provides assays for screening candidate or test compounds which are substrates of a protein encoded by or coπesponding to a marker or biologically active portion thereof. In another embodiment, the invention provides assays for screening candidate or test compounds which bind to a protein encoded by or coπesponding to a marker or biologically active portion thereof. Determining the ability ofthe test compound to directly bind to a protein can be accomplished, for example, by coupling the compound with a radioisotope or enzymatic label such that binding ofthe compound to the marker can be determined by detecting the labeled marker compound in a complex. For example, compounds (e.g., marker substrates) can be labeled with 1251, 35S, 14C, or 3H, either directly or indirectly, and the radioisotope detected by direct counting of radioemission or by scintillation counting. Alternatively, assay components can be enzymatically labeled with, for example, horseradish peroxidase, alkaline phosphatase, or luciferase, and the enzymatic label detected by determination of conversion of an appropriate substrate to product.
In another embodiment, the invention provides assays for screening candidate or test compounds which modulate the expression of a marker or the activity of a protein encoded by or coπesponding to a marker, or a biologically active portion thereof. In all likelihood, the protein encoded by or coπesponding to the marker can, in vivo, interact with one or more molecules, such as but not limited to, peptides, proteins, hormones, cofactors and nucleic acids. For the puφoses of this discussion, such cellular and extracellular molecules are refeπed to herein as "binding partners" or marker "substrate".
One necessary embodiment ofthe invention in order to facilitate such screening is the use of a protein encoded by or coπesponding to marker to identify the protein's natural in vivo binding partners. There are many ways to accomplish this which are known to one skilled in the art. One example is the use ofthe marker protein as "bait protein" in a two-hybrid assay or three-hybrid assay (see, e.g., U.S. Patent No. 5,283,317; Zervos et al, 1993, Cell 72:223-232; Madura et al, 1993, J. Biol. Chem. 268:12046-12054; Bartel et al ,1993, Biotechniques 14:920-924; Iwabuchi et al, 1993 Oncogene 8:1693-1696; Brent WO94/10300) in order to identify other proteins which bind to or interact with the marker (binding partners) and, therefore, are possibly involved in the natural function ofthe marker. Such marker binding partners are also likely to be involved in the propagation of signals by the marker protein or downstream elements of a marker protein-mediated signaling pathway. Alternatively, such marker protein binding partners may also be found to be inhibitors ofthe marker protein. The two-hybrid system is based on the modular nature of most transcription factors, which consist of separable DNA-binding and activation domains. Briefly, the assay utilizes two different DNA constructs. In one construct, the gene that encodes a marker protein fused to a gene encoding the DNA binding domain of a known transcription factor (e.g., GAL-4). In the other construct, a DNA sequence, from a library of DNA sequences, that encodes an unidentified protein ("prey" or "sample") is fused to a gene that codes for the activation domain ofthe known transcription factor. If the "bait" and the "prey" proteins are able to interact, in vivo, forming a marker- dependent complex, the DNA-binding and activation domains ofthe transcription factor are brought into close proximity. This proximity allows transcription of a reporter gene (e.g., LacZ) which is operably linked to a transcriptional regulatory site responsive to the transcription factor. Expression ofthe reporter gene can be readily detected and cell colonies containing the functional transcription factor can be isolated and used to obtain the cloned gene which encodes the protein which interacts with the marker protein.
In a further embodiment, assays may be devised through the use ofthe invention for the puφose of identifying compounds which modulate (e.g., affect either positively or negatively) interactions between a marker protein and its substrates and/or binding partners. Such compounds can include, but are not limited to, molecules such as antibodies, peptides, hormones, oligonucleotides, nucleic acids, and analogs thereof. Such compounds may also be obtained from any available source, including systematic libraries of natural and/or synthetic compounds. The prefeπed assay components for use in this embodiment is an cervical cancer marker protein identified herein, the known binding partner and/or substrate of same, and the test compound. Test compounds can be supplied from any source.
The basic principle ofthe assay systems used to identify compounds that interfere with the interaction between the marker protein and its binding partner involves preparing a reaction mixture containing the marker protein and its binding partner under conditions and for a time sufficient to allow the two products to interact and bind, thus forming a complex. In order to test an agent for inhibitory activity, the reaction mixture is prepared in the presence and absence ofthe test compound. The test compound can be initially included in the reaction mixture, or can be added at a time subsequent to the addition ofthe marker protein and its binding partner. Control reaction mixtures are incubated without the test compound or with a placebo. The formation of any complexes between the marker protein and its binding partner is then detected. The formation of a complex in the control reaction, but less or no such formation in the reaction mixture containing the test compound, indicates that the compound interferes with the interaction ofthe marker protein and its binding partner. Conversely, the formation of more complex in the presence of compound than in the control reaction indicates that the compound may enhance interaction ofthe marker protein and its binding partner. The assay for compounds that interfere with the interaction ofthe marker protein with its binding partner may be conducted in a heterogeneous or homogeneous format. Heterogeneous assays involve anchoring either the marker protein or its binding partner onto a solid phase and detecting complexes anchored to the solid phase at the end ofthe reaction. In homogeneous assays, the entire reaction is carried out in a liquid phase. In either approach, the order of addition of reactants can be varied to obtain different information about the compounds being tested. For example, test compounds that interfere with the interaction between the marker proteins and the binding partners (e.g., by competition) can be identified by conducting the reaction in the presence ofthe test substance, i.e., by adding the test substance to the reaction mixture prior to or simultaneously with the marker and its interactive binding partner. Alternatively, test compounds that disrupt preformed complexes, e.g., compounds with higher binding constants that displace one ofthe components from the complex, can be tested by adding the test compound to the reaction mixture after complexes have been formed. The various formats are briefly described below.
In a heterogeneous assay system, either the marker protein or its binding partner is anchored onto a solid surface or matrix, while the other coπesponding non- anchored component may be labeled, either directly or indirectly. In practice, microtitre plates are often utilized for this approach. The anchored species can be immobilized by a number of methods, either non-covalent or covalent, that are typically well known to one who practices the art. Non-covalent attachment can often be accomplished simply by coating the solid surface with a solution ofthe marker protein or its binding partner and drying. Alternatively, an immobilized antibody specific for the assay component to be anchored can be used for this puφose. Such surfaces can often be prepared in advance and stored.
In related embodiments, a fusion protein can be provided which adds a domain that allows one or both ofthe assay components to be anchored to a matrix. For example, glutathione-S-transferase/marker fusion proteins or glutathione-S- transferase/binding partner can be adsorbed onto glutathione sepharose beads (Sigma Chemical, St. Louis, MO) or glutathione derivatized microtiter plates, which are then combined with the test compound or the test compound and either the non-adsorbed marker or its binding partner, and the mixture incubated under conditions conducive to complex formation (e.g., physiological conditions). Following incubation, the beads or microtiter plate wells are washed to remove any unbound assay components, the immobilized complex assessed either directly or indirectly, for example, as described above. Alternatively, the complexes can be dissociated from the matrix, and the level of marker binding or activity determined using standard techniques. Other techniques for immobilizing proteins on matrices can also be used in the screening assays ofthe invention. For example, either a marker protein or a marker protein binding partner can be immobilized utilizing conjugation of biotin and streptavidin. Biotinylated marker protein or target molecules can be prepared from biotin-NHS (N-hydroxy-succinimide) using techniques known in the art (e.g., biotinylation kit, Pierce Chemicals, Rockford, IL), and immobilized in the wells of streptavidin-coated 96 well plates (Pierce Chemical). In certain embodiments, the protein-immobilized surfaces can be prepared in advance and stored.
In order to conduct the assay, the coπesponding partner ofthe immobilized assay component is exposed to the coated surface with or without the test compound. After the reaction is complete, unreacted assay components are removed (e.g., by washing) and any complexes formed will remain immobilized on the solid surface. The detection of complexes anchored on the solid surface can be accomplished in a number of ways. Where the non-immobilized component is pre-labeled, the detection of label immobilized on the surface indicates that complexes were formed. Where the non-immobilized component is not pre-labeled, an indirect label can be used to detect complexes anchored on the surface; e.g., using a labeled antibody specific for the initially non-immobilized species (the antibody, in turn, can be directly labeled or indirectly labeled with, e.g., a labeled anti-Ig antibody). Depending upon the order of addition of reaction components, test compounds which modulate (inhibit or enhance) complex formation or which disrupt preformed complexes can be detected.
In an alternate embodiment ofthe invention, a homogeneous assay may be used. This is typically a reaction, analogous to those mentioned above, which is conducted in a liquid phase in the presence or absence ofthe test compound. The formed complexes are then separated from unreacted components, and the amount of complex formed is determined. As mentioned for heterogeneous assay systems, the order of addition of reactants to the liquid phase can yield information about which test compounds modulate (inhibit or enhance) complex formation and which disrupt preformed complexes. In such a homogeneous assay, the reaction products may be separated from unreacted assay components by any of a number of standard techniques, including but not limited to: differential centrifugation, chromatography, electrophoresis and immunoprecipitation. In differential centrifugation, complexes of molecules may be separated from uncomplexed molecules through a series of centrifugal steps, due to the different sedimentation equilibria of complexes based on their different sizes and densities (see, for example, Rivas, G., and Minton, A.P., Trends Biochem Sci 1993 Aug;18(8):284-7). Standard chromatographic techniques may also be utilized to separate complexed molecules from uncomplexed ones. For example, gel filtration chromatography separates molecules based on size, and through the utilization of an appropriate gel filtration resin in a column format, for example, the relatively larger complex may be separated from the relatively smaller uncomplexed components. Similarly, the relatively different charge properties ofthe complex as compared to the uncomplexed molecules may be exploited to differentially separate the complex from the remaining individual reactants, for example through the use of ion-exchange chromatography resins. Such resins and chromatographic techniques are well known to one skilled in the art (see, e.g., Heegaard, 1998, J Mol. Recognit. 11:141-148; Hage and Tweed, 1997, J. Chromatogr. B. Biomed. Sci. Appl, 699:499-525). Gel electrophoresis may also be employed to separate complexed molecules from unbound species (see, e.g., Ausubel et al (eds.), In: Cuπent Protocols in Molecular Biology, J. Wiley & Sons, New York. 1999). In this technique, protein or nucleic acid complexes are separated based on size or charge, for example. In order to maintain the binding interaction during the electrophoretic process, nondenaturing gels in the absence of reducing agent are typically prefeπed, but conditions appropriate to the particular interactants will be well known to one skilled in the art. immunoprecipitation is another common technique utilized for the isolation of a protein-protein complex from solution (see, e.g., Ausubel et al (eds.), In: Cuπent Protocols in Molecular Biology, J. Wiley & Sons, New York. 1999). In this technique, all proteins binding to an antibody specific to one ofthe binding molecules are precipitated from solution by conjugating the antibody to a polymer bead that may be readily collected by centrifugation. The bound assay components are released from the beads (through a specific proteolysis event or other technique well known in the art which will not disturb the protein-protein interaction in the complex), and a second immunoprecipitation step is performed, this time utilizing antibodies specific for the coπespondingly different interacting assay component. In this manner, only formed complexes should remain attached to the beads. Variations in complex formation in both the presence and the absence of a test compound can be compared, thus offering information about the ability ofthe compound to modulate interactions between the marker protein and its binding partner.
Also within the scope ofthe present invention are methods for direct detection of interactions between the marker protein and its natural binding partner and/or a test compound in a homogeneous or heterogeneous assay system without further sample manipulation. For example, the technique of fluorescence energy transfer may be utilized (see, e.g., Lakowicz et al, U.S. Patent No. 5,631,169; Stavrianopoulos et al, U.S. Patent No. 4,868,103). Generally, this technique involves the addition of a fluorophore label on a first 'donor' molecule (e.g., marker or test compound) such that its emitted fluorescent energy will be absorbed by a fluorescent label on a second, 'acceptor' molecule (e.g., marker or test compound), which in turn is able to fluoresce due to the absorbed energy. Alternately, the 'donor' protein molecule may simply utilize the natural fluorescent energy of tryptophan residues. Labels are chosen that emit different wavelengths of light, such that the 'acceptor' molecule label may be differentiated from that ofthe 'donor'. Since the efficiency of energy transfer between the labels is related to the distance separating the molecules, spatial relationships between the molecules can be assessed. In a situation in which binding occurs between the molecules, the fluorescent emission ofthe 'acceptor' molecule label in the assay should be maximal. An FET binding event can be conveniently measured through standard fluorometric detection means well known in the art (e.g., using a fluorimeter). A test substance which either enhances or hinders participation of one ofthe species in the preformed complex will result in the generation of a signal variant to that of background. In this way, test substances that modulate interactions between a marker and its binding partner can be identified in controlled assays.
In another embodiment, modulators of marker expression are identified in a method wherein a cell is contacted with a candidate compound and the expression of marker mRNA or protein in the cell, is determined. The level of expression of marker mRNA or protein in the presence ofthe candidate compound is compared to the level of expression of marker mRNA or protein in the absence ofthe candidate compound. The candidate compound can then be identified as a modulator of marker expression based on this comparison. For example, when expression of marker mRNA or protein is greater (statistically significantly greater) in the presence ofthe candidate compound than in its absence, the candidate compound is identified as a stimulator of marker mRNA or protein expression. Conversely, when expression of marker mRNA or protein is less (statistically significantly less) in the presence ofthe candidate compound than in its absence, the candidate compound is identified as an inhibitor of marker mRNA or protein expression. The level of marker mRNA or protein expression in the cells can be determined by methods described herein for detecting marker mRNA or protein. In another aspect, the invention pertains to a combination of two or more ofthe assays described herein. For example, a modulating agent can be identified using a cell-based or a cell free assay, and the ability ofthe agent to modulate the activity of a marker protein can be further confirmed in vivo, e.g., in a whole animal model for cellular transformation and/or tumorigenesis. This invention further pertains to novel agents identified by the above- described screening assays. Accordingly, it is within the scope of this invention to further use an agent identified as described herein in an appropriate animal model. For example, an agent identified as described herein (e.g., a marker modulating agent, an antisense marker nucleic acid molecule, a marker-specific antibody, or a marker-binding partner) can be used in an animal model to determine the efficacy, toxicity, or side effects of treatment with such an agent. Alternatively, an agent identified as described herein can be used in an animal model to determine the mechanism of action of such an agent. Furthermore, this invention pertains to uses of novel agents identified by the above-described screening assays for treatments as described herein. It is understood that appropriate doses of small molecule agents and protein or polypeptide agents depends upon a number of factors within the knowledge of the ordinarily skilled physician, veterinarian, or researcher. The dose(s) of these agents will vary, for example, depending upon the identity, size, and condition ofthe subject or sample being treated, further depending upon the route by which the composition is to be administered, if applicable, and the effect which the practitioner desires the agent to have upon the nucleic acid or polypeptide ofthe invention. Exemplary doses of a small molecule include milligram or microgram amounts per kilogram of subject or sample weight (e.g. about 1 microgram per kilogram to about 500 milligrams per kilogram, about 100 micrograms per kilogram to about 5 milligrams per kilogram, or about 1 microgram per kilogram to about 50 micrograms per kilogram). Exemplary doses of a protein or polypeptide include gram, milligram or microgram amounts per kilogram of subject or sample weight (e.g. about 1 microgram per kilogram to about 5 grams per kilogram, about 100 micrograms per kilogram to about 500 milligrams per kilogram, or about 1 milligram per kilogram to about 50 milligrams per kilogram). It is furthermore understood that appropriate doses of one of these agents depend upon the potency ofthe agent with respect to the expression or activity to be modulated. Such appropriate doses can be determined using the assays described herein. When one or more of these agents is to be administered to an animal (e.g. a human) in order to modulate expression or activity of a polypeptide or nucleic acid ofthe invention, a physician, veterinarian, or researcher can, for example, prescribe a relatively low dose at first, subsequently increasing the dose until an appropriate response is obtained. In addition, it is understood that the specific dose level for any particular animal subject will depend upon a variety of factors including the activity ofthe specific agent employed, the age, body weight, general health, gender, and diet ofthe subject, the time of administration, the route of administration, the rate of excretion, any drug combination, and the degree of expression or activity to be modulated.
A pharmaceutical composition ofthe invention is formulated to be compatible with its intended route of administration. Examples of routes of administration include parenteral, e.g., intravenous, intradermal, subcutaneous, oral (e.g., inhalation), transdermal (topical), transmucosal, and rectal administration. Solutions or suspensions used for parenteral, intradermal, or subcutaneous application can include the following components: a sterile diluent such as water for injection, saline solution, fixed oils, polyethylene glycols, glycerine, propylene glycol or other synthetic solvents; antibacterial agents such as benzyl alcohol or methyl parabens; antioxidants such as ascorbic acid or sodium bisulfite; chelating agents such as e hylenediamine- tetraacetic acid; buffers such as acetates, citrates or phosphates and agents for the adjustment of tonicity such as sodium chloride or dextrose. pH can be adjusted with acids or bases, such as hydrochloric acid or sodium hydroxide. The parenteral preparation can be enclosed in ampules, disposable syringes or multiple dose vials made of glass or plastic. Pharmaceutical compositions suitable for injectable use include sterile aqueous solutions (where water soluble) or dispersions and sterile powders for the extemporaneous preparation of sterile injectable solutions or dispersions. For intravenous administration, suitable carriers include physiological saline, bacteriostatic water, Cremophor EL (BASF; Parsippany, NJ) or phosphate buffered saline (PBS). In all cases, the composition must be sterile and should be fluid to the extent that easy syringability exists. It must be stable under the conditions of manufacture and storage and must be preserved against the contaminating action of microorganisms such as bacteria and fungi. The carrier can be a solvent or dispersion medium containing, for example, water, ethanol, polyol (for example, glycerol, propylene glycol, and liquid polyethylene glycol, and the like), and suitable mixtures thereof. The proper fluidity can be maintained, for example, by the use of a coating such as lecithin, by the maintenance ofthe required particle size in the case of dispersion and by the use of surfactants. Prevention ofthe action of microorganisms can be achieved by various antibacterial and antifungal agents, for example, parabens, chlorobutanol, phenol, ascorbic acid, thimerosal, and the like. In many cases, it will be preferable to include isotonic agents, for example, sugars, polyalcohols such as mannitol, sorbitol, or sodium chloride in the composition. Prolonged absoφtion ofthe injectable compositions can be brought about by including in the composition an agent which delays absoφtion, for example, aluminum monostearate and gelatin.
Sterile injectable solutions can be prepared by incoφorating the active compound (e.g., a polypeptide or antibody) in the required amount in an appropriate solvent with one or a combination of ingredients enumerated above, as required, followed by filtered sterilization. Generally, dispersions are prepared by incoφorating the active compound into a sterile vehicle which contains a basic dispersion medium, and then incoφorating the required other ingredients from those enumerated above. In the case of sterile powders for the preparation of sterile injectable solutions, the prefeπed methods of preparation are vacuum drying and freeze-drying which yields a powder ofthe active ingredient plus any additional desired ingredient from a previously sterile-filtered solution thereof.
Oral compositions generally include an inert diluent or an edible carrier. They can be enclosed in gelatin capsules or compressed into tablets. For the pvupose of oral therapeutic administration, the active compound can be incoφorated with excipients and used in the form of tablets, troches, or capsules. Oral compositions can also be prepared using a fluid carrier for use as a mouthwash, wherein the compound in the fluid carrier is applied orally and swished and expectorated or swallowed.
Pharmaceutically compatible binding agents, and/or adjuvant materials can be included as part ofthe composition. The tablets, pills, capsules, troches, and the like can contain any ofthe following ingredients, or compounds of a similar nature: a binder such as microcrystalline cellulose, gum tragacanth or gelatin; an excipient such as starch or lactose, a disintegrating agent such as alginic acid, Primogel, or corn starch; a lubricant such as magnesium stearate or Sterotes; a glidant such as colloidal silicon dioxide; a sweetening agent such as sucrose or saccharin; or a flavoring agent such as peppermint, methyl salicylate, or orange flavoring.
For administration by inhalation, the compounds are delivered in the form of an aerosol spray from a pressurized container or dispenser which contains a suitable propellant, e.g., a gas such as carbon dioxide, or a nebulizer. Systemic administration can also be by transmucosal or transdermal means. For transmucosal or transdermal administration, penetrants appropriate to the barrier to be permeated are used in the formulation. Such penetrants are generally known in the art, and include, for example, for transmucosal administration, detergents, bile salts, and fusidic acid derivatives. Transmucosal administration can be accomplished through the use of nasal sprays or suppositories. For transdermal administration, the active compounds are formulated into ointments, salves, gels, or creams as generally known in the art.
The compounds can also be prepared in the form of suppositories (e.g., with conventional suppository bases such as cocoa butter and other glycerides) or retention enemas for rectal delivery.
In one embodiment, the active compounds are prepared with carriers that will protect the compound against rapid elimination from the body, such as a controlled release formulation, including implants and microencapsulated delivery systems. Biodegradable, biocompatible polymers can be used, such as ethylene vinyl acetate, polyanhydrides, polyglycolic acid, collagen, polyorthoesters, and polylactic acid.
Methods for preparation of such formulations will be apparent to those skilled in the art. The materials can also be obtained commercially from Alza Coφoration and Nova Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Liposomal suspensions (including liposomes having monoclonal antibodies incoφorated therein or thereon) can also be used as pharmaceutically acceptable carriers. These can be prepared according to methods known to those skilled in the art, for example, as described in U.S. Patent No. 4,522,811.
It is especially advantageous to formulate oral or parenteral compositions in dosage unit form for ease of administration and uniformity of dosage. Dosage unit form as used herein refers to physically discrete units suited as unitary dosages for the subject to be treated; each unit containing a predetermined quantity of active compound calculated to produce the desired therapeutic effect in association with the required pharmaceutical carrier. The specification for the dosage unit forms ofthe invention are dictated by and directly dependent on the unique characteristics ofthe active compound and the particular therapeutic effect to be achieved, and the limitations inherent in the art of compounding such an active compound for the treatment of individuals.
For antibodies, the prefeπed dosage is 0.1 mg/kg to 100 mg/kg of body weight (generally 10 mg/kg to 20 mg/kg). If the antibody is to act in the brain, a dosage of 50 mg/kg to 100 mg/kg is usually appropriate. Generally, partially human antibodies and fully human antibodies have a longer half-life within the human body than other antibodies. Accordingly, lower dosages and less frequent administration is often possible. Modifications such as lipidation can be used to stabilize antibodies and to enhance uptake and tissue penetration (e.g., into the cervical epithelium). A method for lipidation of antibodies is described by Cruikshank et al. (1997) J. Acquired Immune Deficiency Syndromes and Human Retrovirology 14:193.
The invention also provides vaccine compositions for the prevention and/or treatment of cervical cancer. The invention provides cervical cancer vaccine compositions in which a protein of a marker of Table 1, or a combination of proteins of the markers of Table 1, are introduced into a subject in order to stimulate an immune response against the cervical cancer. The invention also provides cervical cancer vaccine compositions in which a gene expression construct, which expresses a marker or fragment of a marker identified in Table 1, is introduced into the subject such that a protein or fragment of a protein encoded by a marker of Table 1 is produced by transfected cells in the subject at a higher than normal level and elicits an immune response. In one embodiment, a cervical cancer vaccine is provided and employed as an immunotherapeutic agent for the prevention of cervical cancer. In another embodiment, a cervical cancer vaccine is provided and employed as an immunotherapeutic agent for the treatment of cervical cancer. By way of example, a cervical cancer vaccine comprised ofthe proteins ofthe markers of Table 1, may be employed for the prevention and/or treatment of cervical cancer in a subject by administering the vaccine by a variety of routes, e.g., intradermally, subcutaneously, or intramuscularly. In addition, the cervical cancer vaccine can be administered together with adjuvants and/or immunomodulators to boost the activity ofthe vaccine and the subject's response. In one embodiment, devices and/or compositions containing the vaccine, suitable for sustained or intermittent release could be, implanted in the body or topically applied thereto for the relatively slow release of such materials into the body. The cervical cancer vaccine can be introduced along with immunomodulatory compounds, which can alter the type of immune response produced in order to produce a response which will be more effective in eliminating the cancer.
In another embodiment, a cervical cancer vaccine comprised of an expression construct ofthe markers of Table 1, may be introduced by injection into muscle or by coating onto microprojectiles and using a device designed for the puφose to fire the projectiles at high speed into the skin. The cells ofthe subject will then express the protein(s) or fragments of proteins ofthe markers of Table 1 and induce an immune response. In addition, the cervical cancer vaccine may be introduced along with expression constructs for immunomodulatory molecules, such as cytokines, which may increase the immune response or modulate the type of immune response produced in order to produce a response which will be more effective in eliminating the cancer.
The marker nucleic acid molecules can be inserted into vectors and used as gene therapy vectors. Gene therapy vectors can be delivered to a subject by, for example, intravenous injection, local administration (U.S. Patent 5,328,470), or by stereotactic injection (see, e.g., Chen et al, 1994, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 91:3054- 3057). The pharmaceutical preparation ofthe gene therapy vector can include the gene therapy vector in an acceptable diluent, or can comprise a slow release matrix in which the gene delivery vehicle is imbedded. Alternatively, where the complete gene delivery vector can be produced intact from recombinant cells, e.g. retroviral vectors, the pharmaceutical preparation can include one or more cells which produce the gene delivery system.
The pharmaceutical compositions can be included in a container, pack, or dispenser together with instructions for administration.
V. Predictive Medicine
The present invention pertains to the field of predictive medicine in which diagnostic assays, prognostic assays, pharmacogenomics, and monitoring clinical trails are used for prognostic (predictive) puφoses to thereby treat an individual prophylactically. Accordingly, one aspect ofthe present invention relates to diagnostic assays for determining the level of expression of one or more marker proteins or nucleic acids, in order to determine whether an individual is at risk of developing cervical cancer. Such assays can be used for prognostic or predictive puφoses to thereby prophylactically treat an individual prior to the onset ofthe cancer. Yet another aspect ofthe invention pertains to monitoring the influence of agents (e.g., drugs or other compounds administered either to inhibit cervical cancer or to treat or prevent any other disorder {i.e. in order to understand any cervical carcinogenic effects that such treatment may have} ) on the expression or activity of a marker ofthe invention in clinical trials. These and other agents are described in further detail in the following sections.
A. Diagnostic Assays
An exemplary method for detecting the presence or absence of a marker protein or nucleic acid in a biological sample involves obtaining a biological sample (e.g. a cervical-associated body fluid) from a test subject and contacting the biological sample with a compound or an agent capable of detecting the polypeptide or nucleic acid (e.g., mRNA, genomic DNA, or cDNA). The detection methods ofthe invention can thus be used to detect mRNA, protein, cDNA, or genomic DNA, for example, in a biological sample in vitro as well as in vivo. For example, in vitro techniques for detection of mRNA include Northern hybridizations and in situ hybridizations. In vitro techniques for detection of a marker protein include enzyme linked immunosorbent assays (ELISAs), Western blots, immunoprecipitations and immunofluorescence. In vitro techniques for detection of genomic DNA include Southern hybridizations. Furthermore, in vivo techniques for detection of a marker protein include introducing into a subject a labeled antibody directed against the protein or fragment thereof. For example, the antibody can be labeled with a radioactive marker whose presence and location in a subject can be detected by standard imaging techniques. A general principle of such diagnostic and prognostic assays involves preparing a sample or reaction mixture that may contain a marker, and a probe, under appropriate conditions and for a time sufficient to allow the marker and probe to interact and bind, thus forming a complex that can be removed and/or detected in the reaction mixture. These assays can be conducted in a variety of ways. For example, one method to conduct such an assay would involve anchoring the marker or probe onto a solid phase support, also refeπed to as a substrate, and detecting target marker/probe complexes anchored on the solid phase at the end of the reaction. In one embodiment of such a method, a sample from a subject, which is to be assayed for presence and/or concentration of marker, can be anchored onto a carrier or solid phase support. In another embodiment, the reverse situation is possible, in which the probe can be anchored to a solid phase and a sample from a subject can be allowed to react as an unanchored component ofthe assay.
There are many established methods for anchoring assay components to a solid phase. These include, without limitation, marker or probe molecules which are immobilized through conjugation of biotin and sfreptavidin. Such biotinylated assay components can be prepared from biotin-NHS (N-hydroxy-succinimide) using techniques known in the art (e.g., biotinylation kit, Pierce Chemicals, Rockford, IL), and immobilized in the wells of streptavidin-coated 96 well plates (Pierce Chemical). In certain embodiments, the surfaces with immobilized assay components can be prepared in advance and stored.
Other suitable carriers or solid phase supports for such assays include any material capable of binding the class of molecule to which the marker or probe belongs. Well-known supports or carriers include, but are not limited to, glass, polystyrene, nylon, polypropylene, nylon, polyethylene, dextran, amylases, natural and modified celluloses, polyacrylamides, gabbros, and magnetite.
In order to conduct assays with the above mentioned approaches, the non-immobilized component is added to the solid phase upon which the second component is anchored. After the reaction is complete, uncomplexed components may be removed (e.g., by washing) under conditions such that any complexes formed will remain immobilized upon the solid phase. The detection of marker/probe complexes anchored to the solid phase can be accomplished in a number of methods outlined herein. In a prefeπed embodiment, the probe, when it is the unanchored assay component, can be labeled for the puφose of detection and readout ofthe assay, either directly or indirectly, with detectable labels discussed herein and which are well-known to one skilled in the art.
It is also possible to directly detect marker/probe complex formation without further manipulation or labeling of either component (marker or probe), for example by utilizing the technique of fluorescence energy transfer (see, for example, Lakowicz et al, U.S. Patent No. 5,631,169; Stavrianopoulos, et al, U.S. Patent No. 4,868,103). A fluorophore label on the first, 'donor' molecule is selected such that, upon excitation with incident light of appropriate wavelength, its emitted fluorescent energy will be absorbed by a fluorescent label on a second 'acceptor' molecule, which in turn is able to fluoresce due to the absorbed energy. Alternately, the 'donor' protein molecule may simply utilize the natural fluorescent energy of tryptophan residues. Labels are chosen that emit different wavelengths of light, such that the 'acceptor' molecule label may be differentiated from that ofthe 'donor'. Since the efficiency of energy transfer between the labels is related to the distance separating the molecules, spatial relationships between the molecules can be assessed. In a situation in which binding occurs between the molecules, the fluorescent emission ofthe 'acceptor' molecule label in the assay should be maximal. An FET binding event can be conveniently measured through standard fluorometric detection means well known in the art (e.g., using a fluorimeter).
In another embodiment, determination ofthe ability of a probe to recognize a marker can be accomplished without labeling either assay component (probe or marker) by utilizing a technology such as real-time Biomolecular Interaction Analysis (BIA) (see, e.g., Sjolander, S. and Urbaniczky, C, 1991, Anal. Chem. 63:2338-2345 and Szabo et al, 1995, Curr. Opin. Struct. Biol. 5:699-705). As used herein, "BIA" or
"surface plasmon resonance" is a technology for studying biospecific interactions in real time, without labeling any ofthe interactants (e.g., BIAcore). Changes in the mass at the binding surface (indicative of a binding event) result in alterations ofthe refractive index of light near the surface (the optical phenomenon of surface plasmon resonance (SPR)), resulting in a detectable signal which can be used as an indication of real-time reactions between biological molecules.
Alternatively, in another embodiment, analogous diagnostic and prognostic assays can be conducted with marker and probe as solutes in a liquid phase. In such an assay, the complexed marker and probe are separated from uncomplexed components by any of a number of standard techniques, including but not limited to: differential centrifugation, chromatography, electrophoresis and immunoprecipitation. In differential centrifugation, marker/probe complexes may be separated from uncomplexed assay components through a series of centrifugal steps, due to the different sedimentation equilibria of complexes based on their different sizes and densities (see, for example, Rivas, G., and Minton, A.P., 1993, Trends Biochem Sci. 18(8):284-7). Standard chromatographic techniques may also be utilized to separate complexed molecules from uncomplexed ones. For example, gel filtration chromatography separates molecules based on size, and through the utilization of an appropriate gel filtration resin in a column format, for example, the relatively larger complex may be separated from the relatively smaller uncomplexed components. Similarly, the relatively different charge properties ofthe marker/probe complex as compared to the uncomplexed components may be exploited to differentiate the complex from uncomplexed components, for example through the utilization of ion-exchange chromatography resins. Such resins and chromatographic techniques are well known to one skilled in the art (see, e.g., Heegaard, N.H., 1998, J. Mol. Recognit. Winter 11(1- 6):141-8; Hage, D.S., and Tweed, S.A. J Chromatogr B Biomed Sci Appl 1997 Oct 10;699(l-2):499-525). Gel electrophoresis may also be employed to separate complexed assay components from unbound components (see, e.g., Ausubel et al, ed., Current Protocols in Molecular Biology, John Wiley & Sons, New York, 1987-1999). In this technique, protein or nucleic acid complexes are separated based on size or charge, for example. In order to maintain the binding interaction during the electrophoretic process, non-denaturing gel matrix materials and conditions in the absence of reducing agent are typically prefeπed. Appropriate conditions to the particular assay and components thereof will be well known to one skilled in the art. In a particular embodiment, the level of marker mRNA can be determined both by in situ and by in vitro formats in a biological sample using methods known in the art. The term "biological sample" is intended to include tissues, cells, biological fluids and isolates thereof, isolated from a subject, as well as tissues, cells and fluids present within a subject. Many expression detection methods use isolated RNA. For in vitro methods, any RNA isolation technique that does not select against the isolation of mRNA can be utilized for the purification of RNA from cervical cells (see, e.g., Ausubel et al, ed., Current Protocols in Molecular Biology, John Wiley & Sons, New York 1987-1999). Additionally, large numbers of tissue samples can readily be processed using techniques well known to those of skill in the art, such as, for example, the single-step RNA isolation process of Chomczynski (1989, U.S. Patent No. 4,843,155).
The isolated mRNA can be used in hybridization or amplification assays that include, but are not limited to, Southern or Northern analyses, polymerase chain reaction analyses and probe aπays. One prefeπed diagnostic method for the detection of mRNA levels involves contacting the isolated mRNA with a nucleic acid molecule (probe) that can hybridize to the mRNA encoded by the gene being detected. The nucleic acid probe can be, for example, a full-length cDNA, or a portion thereof, such as an oligonucleotide of at least 7, 15, 30, 50, 100, 250 or 500 nucleotides in length and sufficient to specifically hybridize under stringent conditions to a mRNA or genomic DNA encoding a marker ofthe present invention. Other suitable probes for use in the diagnostic assays ofthe invention are described herein. Hybridization of an mRNA with the probe indicates that the marker in question is being expressed.
In one format, the mRNA is immobilized on a solid surface and contacted with a probe, for example by running the isolated mRNA on an agarose gel and transferring the mRNA from the gel to a membrane, such as nitrocellulose. In an alternative format, the probe(s) are immobilized on a solid surface and the mRNA is contacted with the probe(s), for example, in an Affymetrix gene chip aπay. A skilled artisan can readily adapt known mRNA detection methods for use in detecting the level of mRNA encoded by the markers of the present invention.
An alternative method for determining the level of mRNA marker in a sample involves the process of nucleic acid amplification, e.g., by rtPCR (the experimental embodiment set forth in Mullis, 1987, U.S. Patent No. 4,683,202), ligase chain reaction (Barany, 1991, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA, 88:189-193), self sustained sequence replication (Guatelli et al, 1990, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 87:1874-1878), transcriptional amplification system (Kwoh et al, 1989, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 86: 1173-1177), Q-Beta Replicase (Lizardi et al, 1988, Bio/Technology 6:1197), rolling circle replication (Lizardi et al, U.S. Patent No. 5,854,033) or any other nucleic acid amplification method, followed by the detection ofthe amplified molecules using techniques well known to those of skill in the art. These detection schemes are especially useful for the detection of nucleic acid molecules if such molecules are present in very low numbers. As used herein, amplification primers are defined as being a pair of nucleic acid molecules that can anneal to 5' or 3' regions of a gene (plus and minus strands, respectively, or vice-versa) and contain a short region in between. In general, amplification primers are from about 10 to 30 nucleotides in length and flank a region from about 50 to 200 nucleotides in length. Under appropriate conditions and with appropriate reagents, such primers permit the amplification of a nucleic acid molecule comprising the nucleotide sequence flanked by the primers.
For in situ methods, mRNA does not need to be isolated from the cervical cells prior to detection. In such methods, a cell or tissue sample is prepared/processed using known histological methods. The sample is then immobilized on a support, typically a glass slide, and then contacted with a probe that can hybridize to mRNA that encodes the marker.
As an alternative to making determinations based on the absolute expression level ofthe marker, determinations may be based on the normalized expression level ofthe marker. Expression levels are normalized by coπecting the absolute expression level of a marker by comparing its expression to the expression of a gene that is not a marker, e.g., a housekeeping gene that is constitutively expressed. Suitable genes for normalization include housekeeping genes such as the actin gene, or epithelial cell-specific genes. This normalization allows the comparison ofthe expression level in one sample, e.g., a patient sample, to another sample, e.g., a non- cervical cancer sample, or between samples from different sources. Alternatively, the expression level can be provided as a relative expression level. To determine a relative expression level of a marker, the level of expression ofthe marker is determined for 10 or more samples of normal versus cancer cell isolates, preferably 50 or more samples, prior to the determination ofthe expression level for the sample in question. The mean expression level of each ofthe genes assayed in the larger number of samples is determined and this is used as a baseline expression level for the marker. The expression level ofthe marker determined for the test sample (absolute level of expression) is then divided by the mean expression value obtained for that marker. This provides a relative expression level.
Preferably, the samples used in the baseline determination will be from cervical cancer or from non-cervical cancer cells of cervical tissue. The choice ofthe cell source is dependent on the use ofthe relative expression level. Using expression found in normal tissues as a mean expression score aids in validating whether the marker assayed is cervical specific (versus normal cells). In addition, as more data is accumulated, the mean expression value can be revised, providing improved relative expression values based on accumulated data. Expression data from cervical cells provides a means for grading the severity ofthe cervical cancer state.
In another embodiment ofthe present invention, a marker protein is detected. A prefeπed agent for detecting marker protein ofthe invention is an antibody capable of binding to such a protein or a fragment thereof, preferably an antibody with a detectable label. Antibodies can be polyclonal, or more preferably, monoclonal. An intact antibody, or a fragment or derivative thereof (e.g. , Fab or F(ab')2) can be used.
The term "labeled", with regard to the probe or antibody, is intended to encompass direct labeling ofthe probe or antibody by coupling (i.e., physically linking) a detectable substance to the probe or antibody, as well as indirect labeling ofthe probe or antibody by reactivity with another reagent that is directly labeled. Examples of indirect labeling include detection of a primary antibody using a fluorescently labeled secondary antibody and end-labeling of a DNA probe with biotin such that it can be detected with fluorescently labeled sfreptavidin.
Proteins from cervical cells can be isolated using techniques that are well known to those of skill in the art. The protein isolation methods employed can, for example, be such as those described in Harlow and Lane (Harlow and Lane, 1988, Antibodies: A Laboratory Manual, Cold Spring Harbor Laboratory Press, Cold Spring Harbor, New York).
A variety of formats can be employed to determine whether a sample contains a protein that binds to a given antibody. Examples of such formats include, but are not limited to, enzyme immunoassay (EIA), radioimmunoassay (RIA), Western blot analysis and enzyme linked immunoabsorbant assay (ELISA). A skilled artisan can readily adapt known protein/antibody detection methods for use in determining whether cervical cells express a marker ofthe present invention.
In one format, antibodies, or antibody fragments or derivatives, can be used in methods such as Western blots or immunofluorescence techniques to detect the expressed proteins. In such uses, it is generally preferable to immobilize either the antibody or proteins on a solid support. Suitable solid phase supports or carriers include any support capable of binding an antigen or an antibody. Well-known supports or carriers include glass, polystyrene, polypropylene, polyethylene, dextran, nylon, amylases, natural and modified celluloses, polyacrylamides, gabbros, and magnetite.
One skilled in the art will know many other suitable carriers for binding antibody or antigen, and will be able to adapt such support for use with the present invention. For example, protein isolated from cervical cells can be run on a polyacrylamide gel electrophoresis and immobilized onto a solid phase support such as nitrocellulose. The support can then be washed with suitable buffers followed by treatment with the detectably labeled antibody. The solid phase support can then be washed with the buffer a second time to remove unbound antibody. The amount of bound label on the solid support can then be detected by conventional means.
The invention also encompasses kits for detecting the presence of a marker protein or nucleic acid in a biological sample (e.g., cervical smear). Such kits can be used to determine if a subject is suffering from or is at increased risk of developing cervical cancer. For example, the kit can comprise a labeled compound or agent capable of detecting a marker protein or nucleic acid in a biological sample and means for determining the amount ofthe protein or mRNA in the sample (e.g., an antibody which binds the protein or a fragment thereof, or an oligonucleotide probe which binds to DNA or mRNA encoding the protein). Kits can also include instructions for inteφreting the results obtained using the kit.
For antibody-based kits, the kit can comprise, for example: (1) a first antibody (e.g., attached to a solid support) which binds to a marker protein; and, optionally, (2) a second, different antibody which binds to either the protein or the first antibody and is conjugated to a detectable label. For oligonucleotide-based kits, the kit can comprise, for example: (1) an oligonucleotide, e.g., a detectably labeled oligonucleotide, which hybridizes to a nucleic acid sequence encoding a marker protein or (2) a pair of primers useful for amplifying a marker nucleic acid molecule. The kit can also comprise, e.g., a buffering agent, a preservative, or a protein stabilizing agent. The kit can further comprise components necessary for detecting the detectable label (e.g., an enzyme or a substrate). The kit can also contain a control sample or a series of control samples which can be assayed and compared to the test sample. Each component ofthe kit can be enclosed within an individual container and all ofthe various containers can be within a single package, along with instructions for inteφreting the results ofthe assays performed using the kit.
B. Pharmacogenomics
The markers ofthe invention are also useful as pharmacogenomic markers. As used herein, a "pharmacogenomic marker" is an objective biochemical marker whose expression level coπelates with a specific clinical drug response or susceptibility in a patient (see, e.g., McLeod et al. (1999) Eur. J. Cancer 35(12): 1650- 1652). The presence or quantity ofthe pharmacogenomic marker expression is related to the predicted response ofthe patient and more particularly the patient's tumor to therapy with a specific drug or class of drugs. By assessing the presence or quantity of the expression of one or more pharmacogenomic markers in a patient, a drug therapy which is most appropriate for the patient, or which is predicted to have a greater degree of success, may be selected. For example, based on the presence or quantity of RNA or protein encoded by specific tumor markers in a patient, a drug or course of treatment may be selected that is optimized for the treatment ofthe specific tumor likely to be present in the patient. The use of pharmacogenomic markers therefore permits selecting or designing the most appropriate treatment for each cancer patient without trying different drugs or regimes.
Another aspect of pharmacogenomics deals with genetic conditions that alters the way the body acts on drugs. These pharmacogenetic conditions can occur either as rare defects or as polymoφhisms. For example, glucose-6-phosphate dehydrogenase (G6PD) deficiency is a common inherited enzymopafhy in which the main clinical complication is hemolysis after ingestion of oxidant drugs (anti-malarials, sulfonamides, analgesics, nitrofurans) and consumption of fava beans. As an illustrative embodiment, the activity of drug metabolizing enzymes is a major determinant of both the intensity and duration of drug action. The discovery of genetic polymoφhisms of drug metabolizing enzymes (e.g., N-acetyltransferase 2 (NAT 2) and cytochrome P450 enzymes CYP2D6 and CYP2C19) has provided an explanation as to why some patients do not obtain the expected drug effects or show exaggerated drug response and serious toxicity after taking the standard and safe dose of a drug. These polymoφhisms are expressed in two phenotypes in the population, the extensive metabolizer (EM) and poor metabolizer (PM). The prevalence of PM is different among different populations. For example, the gene coding for CYP2D6 is highly polymoφhic and several mutations have been identified in PM, which all lead to the absence of functional CYP2D6. Poor metabolizers of CYP2D6 and CYP2C19 quite frequently experience exaggerated drug response and side effects when they receive standard doses. If a metabolite is the active therapeutic moiety, a PM will show no therapeutic response, as demonstrated for the analgesic effect of codeine mediated by its CYP2D6-formed metabolite moφhine. The other extreme are the so called ultra-rapid metabolizers who do not respond to standard doses. Recently, the molecular basis of ultra-rapid metabolism has been identified to be due to CYP2D6 gene amplification.
Thus, the level of expression of a marker ofthe invention in an individual can be determined to thereby select appropriate agent(s) for therapeutic or prophylactic treatment ofthe individual. In addition, pharmacogenetic studies can be used to apply genotyping of polymoφhic alleles encoding drug-metabolizing enzymes to the identification of an individual's drug responsiveness phenotype. This knowledge, when applied to dosing or drug selection, can avoid adverse reactions or therapeutic failure and thus enhance therapeutic or prophylactic efficiency when treating a subject with a modulator of expression of a marker of the invention.
C. Monitoring Clinical Trials
Monitoring the influence of agents (e.g., drug compounds) on the level of expression of a marker ofthe invention can be applied not only in basic drug screening, but also in clinical trials. For example, the effectiveness of an agent to affect marker expression can be monitored in clinical trials of subjects receiving treatment for cervical cancer. In a prefeπed embodiment, the present invention provides a method for monitoring the effectiveness of treatment of a subject with an agent (e.g., an agonist, antagonist, peptidomimetic, protein, peptide, nucleic acid, small molecule, or other drug candidate) comprising the steps of (i) obtaining a pre-administration sample from a subject prior to administration ofthe agent; (ii) detecting the level of expression of one or more selected markers ofthe invention in the pre-administration sample; (iii) obtaining one or more post-administration samples from the subject; (iv) detecting the level of expression ofthe marker(s) in the post-administration samples; (v) comparing the level of expression ofthe marker(s) in the pre-administration sample with the level of expression ofthe marker(s) in the post-administration sample or samples; and (vi) altering the administration ofthe agent to the subject accordingly. For example, increased expression ofthe marker gene(s) during the course of treatment may indicate ineffective dosage and the desirability of increasing the dosage. Conversely, decreased expression ofthe marker gene(s) may indicate efficacious treatment and no need to change dosage.
D. Electronic Apparatus Readable Media and Arrays
Electronic apparatus readable media comprising a marker ofthe present invention is also provided. As used herein, "electronic apparatus readable media" refers to any suitable medium for storing, holding or containing data or information that can be read and accessed directly by an electronic apparatus. Such media can include, but are not limited to: magnetic storage media, such as floppy discs, hard disc storage medium, and magnetic tape; optical storage media such as compact disc; electronic storage media such as RAM, ROM, EPROM, EEPROM and the like; general hard disks and hybrids of these categories such as magnetic/optical storage media. The medium is adapted or configured for having recorded thereon a marker ofthe present invention. As used herein, the term "electronic apparatus" is intended to include any suitable computing or processing apparatus or other device configured or adapted for storing data or information. Examples of electronic apparatus suitable for use with the present invention include stand-alone computing apparatus; networks, including a local area network (LAN), a wide area network (WAN) Internet, Intranet, and Extranet; electronic appliances such as a personal digital assistants (PDAs), cellular phone, pager and the like; and local and distributed processing systems. As used herein, "recorded" refers to a process for storing or encoding information on the electronic apparatus readable medium. Those skilled in the art can readily adopt any ofthe presently known methods for recording information on known media to generate manufactures comprising the markers ofthe present invention. A variety of software programs and formats can be used to store the marker information ofthe present invention on the electronic apparatus readable medium. For example, the marker nucleic acid sequence can be represented in a word processing text file, formatted in commercially-available software such as WordPerfect and MicroSoft Word, or represented in the form of an ASCII file, stored in a database application, such as DB2, Sybase, Oracle, or the like, as well as in other forms. Any number of data processor structuring formats (e.g., text file or database) may be employed in order to obtain or create a medium having recorded thereon the markers of the present invention.
By providing the markers ofthe invention in readable form, one can routinely access the marker sequence information for a variety of piuposes. For example, one skilled in the art can use the nucleotide or amino acid sequences ofthe present invention in readable form to compare a target sequence or target structural motif with the sequence information stored within the data storage means. Search means are used to identify fragments or regions ofthe sequences ofthe invention which match a particular target sequence or target motif.
The present invention therefore provides a medium for holding instructions for performing a method for determining whether a subject has cervical cancer or a pre-disposition to cervical cancer, wherein the method comprises the steps of determining the presence or absence of a marker and based on the presence or absence ofthe marker, determimng whether the subject has cervical cancer or a pre-disposition to cervical cancer and/or recommending a particular treatment for cervical cancer or pre- cervical cancer condition.
The present invention further provides in an electronic system and/or in a network, a method for determimng whether a subject has cervical cancer or a pre- disposition to cervical cancer associated with a marker wherein the method comprises the steps of determining the presence or absence ofthe marker, and based on the presence or absence ofthe marker, determining whether the subject has cervical cancer or a pre-disposition to cervical cancer, and/or recommending a particular treatment for the cervical cancer or pre-cervical cancer condition. The method may further comprise the step of receiving phenotypic information associated with the subject and/or acquiring from a network phenotypic information associated with the subject.
The present invention also provides in a network, a method for determining whether a subject has cervical cancer or a pre-disposition to cervical cancer associated with a marker, said method comprising the steps of receiving information associated with the marker receiving phenotypic information associated with the subject, acquiring information from the network coπesponding to the marker and/or cervical cancer, and based on one or more ofthe phenotypic information, the marker, and the acquired information, determining whether the subject has a cervical cancer or a predisposition to cervical cancer. The method may further comprise the step of recommending a particular treatment for the cervical cancer or pre-cervical cancer condition.
The present invention also provides a business method for determining whether a subject has cervical cancer or a pre-disposition to cervical cancer, said method comprising the steps of receiving information associated with the marker, receiving phenotypic information associated with the subject, acquiring information from the network coπesponding to the marker and/or cervical cancer, and based on one or more ofthe phenotypic information, the marker, and the acquired information, determining whether the subject has cervical cancer or a pre-disposition to cervical cancer. The method may further comprise the step of recommending a particular treatment for the cervical cancer or pre-cervical cancer condition.
The invention also includes an aπay comprising a marker ofthe present invention. The aπay can be used to assay expression of one or more genes in the array. In one embodiment, the aπay can be used to assay gene expression in a tissue to ascertain tissue specificity of genes in the aπay. In this manner, up to about 7600 genes can be simultaneously assayed for expression. This allows a profile to be developed showing a battery of genes specifically expressed in one or more tissues.
In addition to such qualitative determination, the invention allows the quantitation of gene expression. Thus, not only tissue specificity, but also the level of expression of a battery of genes in the tissue is ascertainable. Thus, genes can be grouped on the basis of their tissue expression perse and level of expression in that tissue. This is useful, for example, in ascertaining the relationship of gene expression between or among tissues. Thus, one tissue can be perturbed and the effect on gene expression in a second tissue can be determined. In this context, the effect of one cell type on another cell type in response to a biological stimulus can be determined. Such a determination is useful, for example, to know the effect of cell-cell interaction at the level of gene expression. If an agent is administered therapeutically to treat one cell type but has an undesirable effect on another cell type, the invention provides an assay to determine the molecular basis ofthe undesirable effect and thus provides the opportunity to co-administer a counteracting agent or otherwise treat the undesired effect. Similarly, even within a single cell type, undesirable biological effects can be determined at the molecular level. Thus, the effects of an agent on expression of other than the target gene can be ascertained and counteracted.
In another embodiment, the aπay can be used to monitor the time course of expression of one or more genes in the array. This can occur in various biological contexts, as disclosed herein, for example development of cervical cancer, progression of cervical cancer, and processes, such a cellular transformation associated with cervical cancer.
The aπay is also useful for ascertaining the effect ofthe expression of a gene on the expression of other genes in the same cell or in different cells. This provides, for example, for a selection of alternate molecular targets for therapeutic intervention if the ultimate or downstream target cannot be regulated.
The aπay is also useful for ascertaining differential expression patterns of one or more genes in normal and abnormal cells. This provides a battery of genes that could serve as a molecular target for diagnosis or therapeutic intervention.
E. Suπogate Markers
The markers ofthe invention may serve as surrogate markers for one or more disorders or disease states or for conditions leading up to disease states, and in particular, cervical cancer. As used herein, a "suπogate marker" is an objective biochemical marker which coπelates with the absence or presence of a disease or disorder, or with the progression of a disease or disorder (e.g. , with the presence or absence of a tumor). The presence or quantity of such markers is independent of the disease. Therefore, these markers may serve to indicate whether a particular course of treatment is effective in lessening a disease state or disorder. Suπogate markers are of particular use when the presence or extent of a disease state or disorder is difficult to assess through standard methodologies (e.g., early stage tumors), or when an assessment of disease progression is desired before a potentially dangerous clinical endpoint is reached (e.g., an assessment of cardiovascular disease may be made using cholesterol levels as a suπogate marker, and an analysis of HIN infection may be made using HIN RΝA levels as a suπogate marker, well in advance ofthe undesirable clinical outcomes of myocardial infarction or fully-developed ADDS). Examples ofthe use of suπogate markers in the art include: Koomen et al. (2000) J. Mass. Spectrom. 35: 258-264; and James (1994) AIDS Treatment News Archive 209. The markers ofthe invention are also useful as pharmacodynamic markers. As used herein, a "pharmacodynamic marker" is an objective biochemical marker which coπelates specifically with drug effects. The presence or quantity of a pharmacodynamic marker is not related to the disease state or disorder for which the drug is being administered; therefore, the presence or quantity ofthe marker is indicative ofthe presence or activity ofthe drug in a subject. For example, a pharmacodynamic marker may be indicative ofthe concentration ofthe drug in a biological tissue, in that the marker is either expressed or transcribed or not expressed or transcribed in that tissue in relationship to the level ofthe drug. In this fashion, the distribution or uptake ofthe drug may be monitored by the pharmacodynamic marker. Similarly, the presence or quantity ofthe pharmacodynamic marker may be related to the presence or quantity of the metabolic product of a drug, such that the presence or quantity ofthe marker is indicative ofthe relative breakdown rate ofthe drug in vivo. Pharmacodynamic markers are of particular use in increasing the sensitivity of detection of drug effects, particularly when the drug is administered in low doses. Since even a small amount of a drug may be sufficient to activate multiple rounds of marker transcription or expression, the amplified marker may be in a quantity which is more readily detectable than the drug itself. Also, the marker may be more easily detected due to the nature ofthe marker itself; for example, using the methods described herein, antibodies may be employed in an immune-based detection system for a protein marker, or marker-specific radiolabeled probes may be used to detect a mRΝA marker. Furthermore, the use of a pharmacodynamic marker may offer mechanism-based prediction of risk due to drug treatment beyond the range of possible direct observations. Examples ofthe use of pharmacodynamic markers in the art include: Matsuda et al. US 6,033,862; Hattis et al. (1991) Env. Health Perspect. 90: 229-238; Schentag (1999) Am. J. Health-Syst. Pharm. 56 Suppl. 3: S21-S24; and Nicolau (1999) Am, J. Health-Syst. Pharm. 56 Suppl. 3: S16- S20.
EXAMPLE 1 : IDENTIFICATION OF CERVICAL CANCER MARKERS BY cDNA AND TISSUE MICRO ARRAYS
I. Materials and Methods
Sample collection and RNA preparation Cervical tissues were collected and snap frozen in liquid nitrogen. The histology and cellular composition of tissues were confirmed before RNA extraction was performed. Total RNA was extracted from the frozen tissues using Trizol Reagent (Life Technologies) followed by a secondary clean up step with Qiagen's RNeasy kit to increase RNA probe labeling efficiency (Qiagen, Valencia CA). Only RNA with a 28S/18S ribosomal RNA ratio of at least 1.0, calculated using Agilent Technologies 2100 Bioanalyzer (Palo Alto, CA), was used in this study.
cDNA microarray hybridization cDNA microaπays containing 30,732 Unigene clones from Research
Genetics (Hunstville, AL) were generated on nylon filters. A total of 4-6 ug of total RNA was used as template to generate radioactively labeled cDNA by reverse transcription with 33P-dCTP, oligo dT-30 primer and Superscript II Reverse Transcriptase (Life Technologies). 33P-labeled first strand cDNA was preannealed with cot-1 DNA and poly-dA 40-60 (Pharmacia, Peapack, NJ) to reduce non-specific hybridization. Each filter was hybridized at 65°C for 16 hours with approximately 6xl06 counts of labeled probe in a buffer containing 7% sodium dodecyl sulfate (SDS), 250mM Na3PO4 (pH 7.2), 1 mM EDTA, 0.5% Casein-Hammerstein and O.lmg/ml of denatured salmon sperm DNA. After the filters were washed with 4% and 1% SDS wash buffer (20mM Na3PO4 (pH 7.2), 1 mM EDTA and 4% or 1% SDS), they were exposed to Fuji Phosphoimager screens and scanned using a Fuji scanner BAS 2500. Spots were quantitated using an automated aπay analysis program, Grid Guru vl.0, developed at Millennium Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Marker scoring algorithm and data analysis
To coπect for differences in hybridization efficiency, the digitized data from each microaπay filter was normalized by the median intensity of all spots on that filter. Both aπay-based and gene-based hierarchical clustering was performed and visualized using Stanford's Gene Cluster and Tree View software. Differentially expressed genes were ranked by calculating the Marker Score for each gene.
To compute Marker Score, the samples were divided into control and tester groups. The starting point for the Marker Score is average fold change (ratio) of the tester samples above the control samples. The score was designed to reflect both the degree of change (the expression ratio) and the number of tester samples showing differential expression, while not being dominated by a small fraction of tester samples with very high values. To reduce this "outlier" effect, genes were treated with expression ratios greater than 10 as not meaningfully different from those with ratios of 10. This desired performance from a Marker Score was accomplished by transforming the testerxontrol expression ratio using an asymptotic compression function before taking the average fold-change across tester samples. A Marker Score has a value of 1 when the testers do not appear to be expressed more highly than the controls, and a value greater than 1 otherwise. A Marker Score cannot exceed a value of 10 for any gene. The Marker Score Sg for gene g is therefore computed as the average of compressed testerxontrol ratios:
Sg = ( Σ Sgs)/ Ntester
SgS = C(xgJ/(k+xg e)), where Sgs represents the Marker Score for gene g and the sample s, C(r) is the compression function C(r) = A(l -e"r A) for r > 1 , and C(r) = 1 for r < 1 , A is an upper asymptote on the fold-change value (we used 10), Xgs is the expression value of gene g on sample s, xg δ is the Qth percentile ofthe control samples' expression value; typically Q = 50, k is a constant reflecting the additive noise in the data, i.e., the fixed component of the variance in repeated measurements. A value of 0.25 was derived for this parameter from calibration experiments using microaπay technology.
Ntester The number of tester samples In situ hybridization of tissue microarrays
Formalin-fixed, paraffin embedded cervical tissue microaπays containing tissue cores from normal, low-grade squamous intraepithelial lesions (LSIL), high-grade squamous intraepithelial lesions (HSIL), squamous cell carcinomas (SCC) and adenocarcinomas (ACA) were provided. Prehybridization treatment was performed with an automatic Tissue-Tek DRS 2000 Slide Stainer (Sakura, Toπance, CA) using a previously described protocol (Duncan, L.M., et al, 2001, J. Clin. Oncol. 19(2): 568- 576). The cervical tissues were deparaffinized, rehydrated and postfixed with 4% paraformaldehyde in PBS for 15 minutes. After washing with PBS, the tissue microaπays were digested with 2ug/ml proteinase K at 37°C for 15 minutes and again incubated with 4% paraformaldehyde/PBS for 10 minutes. Tissue sections were subsequently incubated with 0.2N HCL for 10 minutes, 0.25% acetic anhydride/0.1 mol/L triethanolamine for 10 minutes, and dehydrated with graded ethanol. Antisense probes were labeled with S-UTP in an in vitro transcπption reaction (Riboprobe Combination System, Promega, Madison, WI) using 500 ng of linearized plasmid DNA derived from IMAGE clones. Hybridizations were performed at 50°C for 18 hours using probes labeled at 5xl07 cpm/ml in lOmM Tris-HCl (pH 7.6) buffer containing 50% formamide, 10% dextran sulfate, lx Denhardt's solution, 0.6 M NaCl, 10 mM DTT, 0.25% SDS and 200 ug/ml tRNA. After hybridization, slides were washed with 5x standard saline citrate (SSC) at 50°C for 10 minutes, 50% formamide/2x SSC at 50°C for 30 minutes, 10 mM Tris-HCl (pH 7.6)/500 mM NaCl/lmM EDTA (TNE) at 37°C for 10 minutes, incubated in lOug/ml Rnase A in TNE at 37°C for 30 minutes, washed in TNE at 37°C for 10 minutes, incubated once in 2x SSC at 50°C for 20 minutes, twice in 0.2x SSC at 50°C for 20 minutes, and dehydrated with graded ethanol. Localization of mRNA transcripts was determined by dipping slides in Kodak NTB2 photoemulsion (Eastman Kodak, Rochester, NY) and exposing for 14-21 days at 4°C. The slides were counterstained using Myers hematoxylin and alcoholic eosin Y.
II. Results Transcriptional profiling of cervical tissues by cDNA microarrays
12 normal cervical tissues (9 from ectocervix and 3 from endocervix), 5 LSIL, 5 HSIL, 9 SCC and 3 ACA were profiled on cDNA microarrays that contain 30,732 clones (30K microaπay). To assess the power of the data sets to discriminate between diseased and normal tissue, a hierarchical clustering of the 34 sample data sets was performed on the basis of overall similarity in gene expression patterns (Figure 1). The dendrogram shows that 10 of 12 normal cervical tissues and all LSIL samples cluster in one group (designated as "control group"), and 11 of 12 tumor samples and 3 of 5 HSIL samples cluster together in the other group (designated as "diseased group"). This segregation indicates that global gene expression profiles of normal ectocervical epithelium, normal endocervical epithelium and LSIL are very similar, whereas the expression profiles of 3/5 HSIL samples more closely resemble cervical cancers. These findings indicate robust data sets that can distinguish control tissues from diseased tissues despite the fact that samples were taken from patients of different ages and from different clinical sites.
Marker selection
In order to identify gene markers that would differentiate the control tissue group from the diseased group, marker scores were calculated for each clone on the 30K cDNA microaπay from three marker selection paradigms: 9 SCC vs. control group (9 ectocervix, 3 endocervix and 5 LSIL), 5 HSIL vs. control group, and 3 ACA vs. control group. In order to discover new markers associated with the transformation of cervical cells, up-regulated genes related to an immune response (i.e. immunoglobulins, MHCs) were excluded during marker selection. Clones with marker scores ranked in the top 50 from SCC or ACA paradigms, and clones ranked between 50 and 100 that were overexpressed in both SCC and ACA samples were selected as top markers. Scores from the HSIL paradigm were not used independently to select markers because increased expression in tumors was considered essential for good marker performance. Markers were selected and their scores in SCC, ACA and HSIL paradigms are shown in Table 4. It was found that most of the up-regulated genes from SCC samples were also elevated in ACA. While many markers selected from the SCC and/or ACA paradigms have scores >3.0, only a few of the HSIL markers had scores above 2.0, indicating increasing expression as lesions progress from dysplasia to invasive carcinomas. Figure 2 shows two genes from Table 4 that represent typical but distinct types of expression patterns among normal, LSIL, HSIL, SCC and ACA tissues. MCM 6 was overexpressed in HSILs, squamous cell carcinomas and adenocarcinomas, while Claudin 1 was overexpressed only in squamous cell carcinomas. In an attempt to understand the characteristics of these up-regulated genes, hierarchical clustering was performed based on the expression profiles across all clinical samples. These overexpressed genes were clustered into two main groups. One group consists mainly of genes that encode either extracellular matrix (ECM) proteins (collagen, laminin, fibronectin) or proteins responsible for cell-ECM interaction or ECM degradation and remodeling (e.g. osteonectin, matrix metalloproteinase, urokinase). The other cluster contains many genes involved in cell replication and proliferation. Examples include DNA replication licensing factors (MCM 6), topoisomerase 2A, and the oncogene B-Myb.
Marker confirmation by in situ hybridization (ISH)
Markers were also evaluated in clinical tissue samples by ISH. ISH experiments were performed using tissue microaπays to confirm transcriptional profiling results and to determine the cell types responsible for increased mRNA expression. Depending on the level of the paraffin block sectioned, 26-87 normal cervical tissue cores (from ectocervix and endocervix), 2-10 LSIL, 5-33 HSIL and 10-21 cancer cores (including SCC, ACA and poorly differentiated carcinomas) were examined. In general, the ISH signal was detected in cervical epithelial cells (Table 5). Genes that are overexpressed in epithelial cells are responsible for cell growth and cell- ECM interactions. Several genes were differentially expressed by the epithelial cells. This finding suggests coordinated gene regulation between cervical epithelium and its microenvironment during cancer progression.
Photomicrographs of a representative gene, claudin 1 were taken. There was little or no detectable signal from Claudin 1 probes in normal endo-/ectocervical tissues and LSIL. Gene expression was elevated in HSIL and increased further in cervical tumors. Claudin 1 expression was limited to the epithelium and was not significantly elevated in the 5 HSIL and 3 ACA samples that were profiled on cDNA microaπays (Figure 2). Without being limited by theory, the increased sensitivity of ISH in this case could be due to the focal nature ofthe signal. Such focal signals are readily apparent by ISH but can be missed in RNA preparations of whole tissue homogenates. Since cervical screening evaluates moφhological changes of cells exfoliated from cervical epithelium, cells from stroma are unlikely to be present in a Pap test sample. The marker selection was therefore focused on those candidate markers that were differentially expressed in the epithelial cells of cervical dysplasias and invasive tumors. To understand the frequency with which each marker was elevated in different types of cervical lesions and tumors, a frequency calculation was performed using all tissue cores on the microaπay. The calculation was based on a semi-quantitative, arbitrary scoring method. The signal was scored on a scale from 0 to 3: 0 - no signal; 1 - weak, indeterminate signal; 2 - determinate, weak to moderate signal; 3 - strong to very strong signal. Table 6 shows the results of the scoring for markers of the present invention. To be considered positive, a tissue core had to have a signal score of Ξ≤. In cases where the microaπay contained more than one tissue core from a single patient, a positive call required at least 50% of tissue cores to be _=2. To better visualize the results, the selected markers are presented in the order of increasing frequency of positive cores for normal cervical tissues. It was found that the frequency of marker elevation is highly coπelated with the stage of clinical abnormality and varies in a broad range from marker to marker at particular clinical stages. EFI27, for example, had relatively high (>20%) positive cores from normal cervical tissues, whereas markers such as ITGB6 and CLDN1 were relatively lower in normals and started to increase in LSIL and HSIL. The appearance of positive cores for BST2 took place even later in the tumor progression stage, at the transition from high-grade premalignant lesions to invasive disease. These findings demonstrate the existence of markers that identify sequential molecular changes during cervical cancer development.
EXAMPLE 2: GENE EXPRESSION ANALYSIS
RNA Preparation
Total RNA was prepared from various human tissues by a single step extraction method using TRIZOL Reagent according to the manufacturer's instructions (Invitrogen). Each RNA preparation was treated with DNase I (Ambion) at 37°C for 1 hour. DNAse I treatment was determined to be complete if the sample required at least 38 PCR amplification cycles to reach a threshold level of fluorescence using β-2 microglobulin as an internal amplicon reference (or 35 PCR amplification cycles for 18s ribosome gene). The integrity ofthe RNA samples following DNase I treatment was confirmed by agarose gel electrophoresis and ethidium bromide staining. After phenol extraction, cDNA was prepared from the sample using the Taqman Reverse Transcription Reagents following the manufacturer's instructions (Applied Biosytems). A negative control of RNA without reverse transcriptase was mock reverse transcribed for each RNA sample.
TAQMAN®
Gene expression was measured by TAQMAN® quantitative PCR (Applied Biosystems) in cDNA prepared from a variety of normal and diseased (e.g., cancerous) human tissues or cell lines.
Preparation of Probes
Probes were designed by PrimerExpress software (Applied Biosystems) based on the sequence ofthe specific genes and their related transcripts. Each target gene probe was labeled using FAM (6-carboxyfluorescein), and the 18s reference probe was labeled with a different fluorescent dye, VIC. The differential labeling ofthe target gene and internal reference gene thus enabled measurement in the same well. Primer and probes were checked for their sensitivity and specificity for each transcript ofthe specific gene. Forward and reverse primers and the probes for both 18s and the target gene were added to the TAQMAN® Universal PCR Master Mix (Applied Biosystems). Although the final concentration of primer and probe could vary, each was internally consistent within a given experiment. A typical experiment contained lOOnM of forward and reverse primers plus 200nM probe for 18s and 900nM forward and reverse primers plus 250nM probe for the target gene. TAQMAN® matrix experiments were carried out on an ABI PRISM 7700 Sequence Detection System (Applied Biosystems). The thermal cycler conditions were as follows: hold for 2 min at 50°C and 10 min at 95°C, followed by two-step PCR for 40 cycles of 95°C for 15 sec followed by 60°C for 1 min.
The following method was used to quantitatively calculate gene expression in the various tissues relative to 18s expression in the same tissue. The threshold cycle (Ct) value is defined as the cycle at which a statistically significant increase in fluorescence is detected. A lower Ct value is indicative of a higher mRNA concentration. The Ct value ofthe gene is normalized by subtracting the Ct value ofthe 18s ribosome gene to obtain a ΔCt value using the following formula: ΔCt=Ct (target transcript) - Ct (18s). Relative expression is then calculated using the arithmetic formula given by 2-ΔCt. Expression ofthe target gene in each ofthe tissues tested is then numerically represented (Tables 9-13). Tables 9-13 identify the Sample (Sample #), Tissue Stage, and Expression ofthe target gene. The marker (set forth in Table 1) that was assayed is also identified along with the variant, primer and probe (set forth in Table 7), if applicable. For example, in Table 12, the data coπesponding to M30A[1] identifies Marker M30A using the forward 1 (Fl), reverse 1 (Rl) and probe 1 (PI) as identified in Table 7.
Gene Expression analysis by End-point PCR Total RNA from different samples was pooled to be used as template to generate first strand cDNA. The cervical panel consisted of a cervical tumor pool, a cervical normal pool, an 'other normals' pool and an 'other tumors' pool. The pools consisted of equal amounts of each sample.
Figure imgf000095_0001
TheimoScript RT-PCR System (Invitrogen, San Diego, CA) was used to obtain cDNA. 1 μg RNA was denatured at 65°C for 5 min with 1 μl of 50μM oligo (dT) 20 primer in a lOμl volume according to the manufacturer's instructions. The reaction was terminated by incubation at 85°C for 5 min. The final product was diluted with water to a final volume of lOOμl.
Gene specific primers were designed just outside or right at the start ofthe Open Reading Frame (Table 7). The PCR conditions were optimized for the primers and the size ofthe product expected. 2μl of cDNA was used in a 20μl reaction with touchdown cycling conditions. The products were run on an ethidium bromide containing agarose gel. The gel picture was then semi-quantitatively analyzed and scored.
The ethidium bromide agarose gel pictures ofthe end-point PCR on the tissue panel were scored on a scale of 0-5 (Table 8). Each picture was scored independently by 3 people and the results were compiled. The scores were compared to make sure that there was agreement on the relative intensities ofthe bands and modifications were made where needed. The median ofthe 3 scores was then recorded as the final score.
Summary ofthe Data Provided in the Tables Tables 1 identifies markers ofthe invention (SEQ ID NOs: 1-44), which are designated with a name ("Marker"), the name the gene is commonly known by, if applicable ("Gene Name"), the Sequence Listing identifier ofthe cDNA sequence of a nucleotide transcript encoded by or coπesponding to the marker ("SEQ LD NO (nts)"), the Sequence Listing identifier ofthe amino acid sequence of a protein encoded by the nucleotide transcript ("SEQ ID NO (AAs)"), and the location ofthe protein coding sequence within the cDNA sequence ("CDS").
Tables 2 and 3 list newly-identified nucleotide and amino acid sequences, which are designated with a name ("Marker"), the name the gene is commonly known by, if applicable ("Gene Name"), the Sequence Listing identifier ofthe cDNA sequence of a nucleotide transcript encoded by or coπesponding to the marker ("SEQ ID NO (nts)"), the Sequence Listing identifier ofthe amino acid sequence of a protein encoded by the nucleotide transcript ("SEQ LD NO (AAs)"), and the location ofthe protein coding sequence within the cDNA sequence ("CDS").
Table 4 identifies markers ofthe present invention and their marker scores in SCC, ACA and HSLL. The markers of Table 4 are designated with a name ("Marker"), the name the gene is commonly known by, if applicable ("Gene Name"), the marker score from the squamous cell carcinomas paradigm ("Score SCC"), the marker score from the adenocarcinomas paradigm ("Score ACA"), and the marker score from the high-grade squamous intraepithelial lesions paradigm ("Score HSIL"). Table 5 lists markers identified as overexpressed in cervical cancer by in situ hybridization and indicates the location of marker expression. The markers of Table 5 are designated with a name ("Marker"), the name the gene is commonly known by, if applicable ("Gene Name"), the in situ hybridization signal detected in cervical epithelial cells ("Signal Location").
Table 6 sets forth the differential expression ofthe markers in epithelial cells of cervical dysplasias and invasive tumors. The markers of Table 6 are designated with a name ("Marker"), the name the gene is commonly known by, if applicable ("Gene Name"), and for each marker, the frequency of marker elevation ("frequency") and the number of positives to the number of patients ("# positives/# patients") in normal ectocervical and endocervical cells ("Normal (EC + END)"), the frequency of marker elevation ("frequency") and the number of positives to the number of patients ("# positives/# patients") in low-grade squamous intraepithelial lesions ("LSIL"), the frequency of marker elevation ("frequency") and the number of positives to the number of patients ("# positives/# patients") in high-grade squamous intraepithelial lesions ("HSIL"), and the frequency of marker elevation ("frequency") and the number of positives to the number of patients ("# positives/# patients") in squamous cell carcinomas and adenocarcinomas ("Tumor (SCC+ ACA)"), is set forth.
Table 7 sets forth gene specific primers. Table 7 identifies the marker, which are designated with a name ("Marker"), the gene specific primers coπesponding to matching positions for Taqman Primer 1 ("Matching Positions: Taqman Primer 1"), the gene specific primers coπesponding to matching positions for Taqman Primer 2 ("Matching Positions: Taqman Primer 2"), the gene specific primers coπesponding to matching positions for Taqman Probe ("Matching Positions: Taqman Probe"), the gene specific primers coπesponding to matching positions for Endpoint PCR Primer 1 ("Matching Positions: Endpoint PCR Primer 1"), and the gene specific primers coπesponding to matching positions for Endpoint PCR Primer 1 ("Matching Positions: Endpoint PCR Primer 1"). Table 7 identifies primers in the forward 1 direction ("Fl"); the forward 2 direction ("F2"); the reverse 1 direction ("Rl"); the reverse 2 direction ("R2"), as well as the probes ("PI" designates probe 1; and "P2" designates probe 2).
Table 8 sets forth the scoring on a scale of 0-5 of ethidium bromide agarose gel pictures ofthe end-point PCR on the tissue panel. Table 8 identifies markers, which are designated with a name ("Marker"), and the samples used ("Cervical Normal" and "Cervical Tumor"). Tables 9 -13 identify the expression ofthe target gene in each ofthe tissues tested. Tables 9-13 identify the Sample, which is designated with a number ("Sample #"), the tissue stage ofthe sample ("Tissue Stage"), and expression ofthe target gene ("Gene Name"). Tables 9-13 also identify the marker name, coπesponding to the marker names set forth in Table 1, primer and probe (set forth in Table 7), if applicable, that were assayed. For example, in Table 12, the data coπesponding to "M30A[1]" identifies Marker M30A using the forward 1 primer (Fl), reverse 1 primer (Rl) and probe 1 (PI) as identified in Table 7.
The markers obtained using the foregoing protocol should not be construed as limiting. The contents of all references, databases, patents and published patent applications cited throughout this application are expressly incoφorated herein by reference.
Other Embodiments Those skilled in the art will recognize, or be able to ascertain using no more than routine experimentation, many equivalents to the specific embodiments ofthe invention described herein. Such equivalents are intended to be encompassed by the following claims:

Claims

What is claimed:
1. A method of assessing whether a patient is afflicted with cervical cancer or has a pre-malignant condition, the method comprising comparing: a) the level of expression of a marker in a patient sample, wherein the marker is selected from the group consisting ofthe markers listed in Table 1, and b) the level of expression ofthe marker in a normal control cervical cancer sample, wherein a significant difference between the level of expression ofthe marker in the patient sample and the normal level is an indication that the patient is afflicted with cervical cancer or has a pre-malignant condition.
2. The method ofclaim 1, wherein the patient has CIN or SIL.
3. The method ofclaim 1, wherein the marker coπesponds to a secreted protein.
4. The method ofclaim 1, wherein the marker coπesponds to a transcribed polynucleotide or portion thereof, wherein the polynucleotide comprises the marker.
5. The method of claim 1, wherein the sample comprises cells obtained from the patient.
6. The method of claim 5, wherein the sample is a cervical smear.
7. The method ofclaim 5, wherein the cells are in a fluid selected from the group consisting of a fluid collected by peritoneal rinsing, a fluid collected by uterine rinsing, a uterine fluid, a uterine exudate, a pleural fluid, a cystic fluid, and an cervical exudate.
8. The method ofclaim 1, wherein the level of expression ofthe marker in the sample is assessed by detecting the presence in the sample of a protein coπesponding to the marker.
9. The method ofclaim 8, wherein the presence ofthe protein is detected using a reagent which specifically binds with the protein.
10. The method ofclaim 9, wherein the reagent is selected from the group consisting of an antibody, an antibody derivative, and an antibody fragment.
11. The method of claim 1 , wherein the level of expression of the marker in the sample is assessed by detecting the presence in the sample of a transcribed polynucleotide or portion thereof, wherein the transcribed polynucleotide comprises the marker.
12. The method ofclaim 11, wherein the transcribed polynucleotide is an mRNA.
13. The method ofclaim 11, wherein the transcribed polynucleotide is a cDNA.
14. The method ofclaim 11, wherein the step of detecting further comprises amplifying the transcribed polynucleotide.
15. The method ofclaim 1, wherein the level of expression ofthe marker in the sample is assessed by detecting the presence in the sample of a transcribed polynucleotide which anneals with the marker or anneals with a portion of a polynucleotide wherein the polynucleotide comprises the marker, under stringent hybridization conditions.
16. The method ofclaim 1, wherein the level of expression ofthe marker in the sample differs from the normal level of expression ofthe marker in a patient not afflicted with cervical cancer by a factor of at least about 2.
17. The method ofclaim 1, wherein the level of expression ofthe marker in the sample differs from the normal level of expression ofthe marker in a patient not afflicted with cervical cancer by a factor of at least about 5.
18. The method ofclaim 1, comprising comparing: a) the level of expression in the sample of each of a plurality of markers independently selected from the markers listed in Table 1, and b) the level of expression of each ofthe plurality of markers in samples of the same type obtained from normal control human cervical samples, wherein the level of expression of more than one ofthe markers is significantly altered, relative to the coπesponding normal levels of expression ofthe markers, is an indication that the patient is afflicted with cervical cancer or a pre- malignant condition.
19. The method ofclaim 18, wherein the level of expression of each of the markers is significantly altered, relative to the coπesponding noπnal levels of expression ofthe markers, is an indication that the patient is afflicted with cervical cancer.
20. The method ofclaim 18, wherein the plurality comprises at least three ofthe markers.
21. The method ofclaim 18, wherein the plurality comprises at least five ofthe markers.
22. A method for monitoring the progression of cervical cancer or a pre- malignant condition in a patient, the method comprising: a) detecting in a patient sample at a first point in time, the expression of a marker, wherein the marker is selected from the group consisting ofthe markers listed in
Table 1; b) repeating step a) at a subsequent point in time; and c) comparing the level of expression detected in steps a) and b), and therefrom monitoring the progression of cervical cancer or a pre-malignant condition in the patient.
23. The method ofclaim 22, wherein the marker coπesponds to a secreted protein.
24. The method ofclaim 22, wherein marker coπesponds to a transcribed polynucleotide or portion thereof, wherein the polynucleotide comprises the marker.
25. The method ofclaim 22, wherein the sample comprises cells obtained from the patient.
26. The method ofclaim 25, wherein the patient sample is a cervical smear.
27. The method ofclaim 22, wherein between the first point in time and the subsequent point in time, the patient has undergone surgery to remove a tumor.
28. A method of assessing the efficacy of a test compound for inhibiting cervical cancer in a patient, the method comprising comparing: a) expression of a marker in a first sample obtained from the patient and exposed to the test compound, wherein the marker is selected from the group consisting ofthe markers listed in Table 1, and b) expression ofthe marker in a second sample obtained from the patient, wherein the sample is not exposed to the test compound, wherein a significantly lower level of expression ofthe marker in the first sample, relative to the second sample, is an indication that the test compound is efficacious for inhibiting cervical cancer in the patient.
29. The method ofclaim 28, wherein the first and second samples are portions of a single sample obtained from the patient.
30. The method ofclaim 28, wherein the first and second samples are portions of pooled samples obtained from the patient.
31. A method of assessing the efficacy of a therapy for inhibiting cervical cancer in a patient, the method comprising comparing: a) expression of a marker in the first sample obtained from the patient prior to providing at least a portion ofthe therapy to the patient, wherein the marker is selected from the group consisting ofthe markers listed in Table 1, and b) expression ofthe marker in a second sample obtained from the patient following provision ofthe portion ofthe therapy, wherein a significantly lower level of expression ofthe marker in the second sample, relative to the first sample, is an indication that the therapy is efficacious for inhibiting cervical cancer in the patient.
32. A method of selecting a composition for inhibiting cervical cancer in a patient, the method comprising: a) obtaining a sample comprising cancer cells from the patient; b) separately exposing aliquots ofthe sample in the presence of a plurality of test compositions; c) comparing expression of a marker in each ofthe aliquots, wherein the marker is selected from the group consisting ofthe markers listed in Table 1; and d) selecting one ofthe test compositions which induces a lower level of expression ofthe marker in the aliquot containing that test composition, relative to other test compositions.
33. A method of inhibiting cervical cancer in a patient, the method comprising: a) obtaining a sample comprising cancer cells from the patient; b) separately maintaining aliquots ofthe sample in the presence of a plurality of test compositions; c) comparing expression of a marker in each ofthe aliquots, wherein the marker is selected from the group consisting ofthe markers listed in Table 1 ; and d) administering to the patient at least one ofthe test compositions which induces a lower level of expression ofthe marker in the aliquot containing that test composition, relative to other test compositions.
34. A kit for assessing whether a patient is afflicted with cervical cancer or a pre-malignant condition, the kit comprising reagents for assessing expression of a marker selected from the group consisting ofthe markers listed in Table 1.
35. A kit for assessing the presence of cervical cancer cells or pre- malignant cervical cells or lesions, the kit comprising a nucleic acid probe wherein the probe specifically binds with a transcribed polynucleotide coπesponding to a marker selected from the group consisting ofthe markers listed in Table 1.
36. A kit for assessing the suitability of each of a plurality of compounds for inhibiting cervical cancer in a patient, the kit comprising: a) the plurality of compounds; and b) a reagent for assessing expression of a marker selected from the group consisting ofthe markers listed in Table 1.
37. A kit for assessing the presence of human cervical cancer cells or pre-malignant cervical cells or lesions, the kit comprising an antibody, wherein the antibody specifically binds with a protein coπesponding to a marker selected from the group consisting ofthe markers listed in Table 1.
38. A method of assessing the cervical cell carcinogenic potential of a test compound, the method comprising: a) maintaining separate aliquots of cervical cells in the presence and absence ofthe test compound; and b) comparing expression of a marker in each ofthe aliquots, wherein the marker is selected from the group consisting ofthe markers listed in Table 1, wherein a significantly enhanced level of expression ofthe marker in the aliquot maintained in the presence ofthe test compound, relative to the aliquot maintained in the absence ofthe test compound, is an indication that the test compound possesses human cervical cell carcinogenic potential.
39. A kit for assessing the cervical cell carcinogenic potential of a test compound, the kit comprising cervical cells and a reagent for assessing expression of a marker, wherein the marker is selected from the group consisting ofthe markers listed in Table 1.
40. A method of treating a patient afflicted with cervical cancer, the method comprising providing to cells ofthe patient an antisense oligonucleotide complementary to a polynucleotide coπesponding to a marker selected from the markers listed in Table 1.
41. A method of inhibiting cervical cancer in a patient at risk for developing cervical cancer, the method comprising inhibiting expression of a gene coπesponding to a marker selected from the markers listed in Table 1.
42. An isolated nucleic acid molecule comprising a nucleotide sequence selected from the group consisting ofthe nucleotide sequences set forth in Tables 2 and 3.
43. A vector which contains the nucleic acid molecule ofclaim 42.
44. A host cell which contains the nucleic acid molecule ofclaim 42.
45. An isolated polypeptide which is encoded by a nucleic acid molecule comprising a nucleotide sequence selected from the group consisting of
SEQ ID NOs: 1, 7, 9, 11, 17, 19, 21, 23, 25, 27, 33, and 43.
46. An antibody which selectively binds to the polypeptide of claim
45.
47. An isolated polypeptide comprising an amino acid sequence selected from the group consisting ofthe amino acid sequences of SEQ TD NOs: 2, 8, 10, 20, 22, 26, 28, and 44.
48. An antibody which selectively binds to the polypeptide ofclaim 47.
PCT/US2003/026184 2002-08-20 2003-08-20 Compositions, kits, and methods for identification, assessment, prevention, and therapy of cervical cancer WO2004018999A2 (en)

Priority Applications (6)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
AU2003265556A AU2003265556A1 (en) 2002-08-20 2003-08-20 Compositions, kits, and methods for identification, assessment, prevention, and therapy of cervical cancer
EP03793217A EP1565581B1 (en) 2002-08-20 2003-08-20 Compositions, kits, and methods for identification, assessment, prevention, and therapy of cervical cancer
CN03824456XA CN101044247B (en) 2002-08-20 2003-08-20 Compositions, kits, and methods for identification, assessment, prevention, and therapy of cervical cancer
JP2004529772A JP2006514823A (en) 2002-08-20 2003-08-20 Compositions, kits and methods for identifying, evaluating, preventing and treating cervical cancer
AT03793217T ATE519862T1 (en) 2002-08-20 2003-08-20 COMPOSITIONS, KITS AND METHODS FOR THE IDENTIFICATION, ASSESSMENT, PREVENTION AND THERAPY OF CERVICAL CANCER
CA002496272A CA2496272A1 (en) 2002-08-20 2003-08-20 Integrin b6 markers for compositions, kits, and methods for identification, assessment, prevention and therapy of cervical cancer

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US40477002P 2002-08-20 2002-08-20
US60/404,770 2002-08-20

Publications (2)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2004018999A2 true WO2004018999A2 (en) 2004-03-04
WO2004018999A3 WO2004018999A3 (en) 2005-06-30

Family

ID=31946760

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/US2003/026184 WO2004018999A2 (en) 2002-08-20 2003-08-20 Compositions, kits, and methods for identification, assessment, prevention, and therapy of cervical cancer

Country Status (9)

Country Link
US (3) US7361511B2 (en)
EP (6) EP1565581B1 (en)
JP (2) JP2006514823A (en)
KR (1) KR20050058407A (en)
CN (2) CN102220423A (en)
AT (1) ATE519862T1 (en)
AU (1) AU2003265556A1 (en)
CA (1) CA2496272A1 (en)
WO (1) WO2004018999A2 (en)

Cited By (14)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2004018999A3 (en) * 2002-08-20 2005-06-30 Millenium Pharmaceuticals Inc Compositions, kits, and methods for identification, assessment, prevention, and therapy of cervical cancer
WO2006031363A2 (en) * 2004-08-19 2006-03-23 Corixa Corporation Compositions and methods for the therapy and diagnosis of lung cancer
WO2007051218A2 (en) * 2005-10-31 2007-05-10 Bmt Medizinische Forschung Und Entwicklung Gmbh Method using human or mouse isg12 for the development and production of medicaments and single nucleotide polymorphism in the isg12 gene for diagnostic purposes
EP1985715A3 (en) * 2004-07-16 2008-12-31 Oncomethylome Sciences, S.A. ESR1 and cervical cancer
US7626015B2 (en) 2006-06-09 2009-12-01 Quark Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Therapeutic uses of inhibitors of RTP801L
US7723052B2 (en) 2006-05-11 2010-05-25 Quark Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Screening systems utilizing RTP801
US7741299B2 (en) 2004-08-16 2010-06-22 Quark Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Therapeutic uses of inhibitors of RTP801
US7872119B2 (en) 2007-02-26 2011-01-18 Quark Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Inhibitors of RTP801 and their use in disease treatment
US8067570B2 (en) 2006-01-20 2011-11-29 Quark Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Therapeutic uses of inhibitors of RTP801
EP2402758A2 (en) 2005-09-19 2012-01-04 Veridex, LLC Methods and materials for identifying the origin of a carcinoma of unknown primary origin
CN102372773A (en) * 2010-08-11 2012-03-14 中国科学院生物物理研究所 Human bladder cancer tumor marker, antibody thereof and application thereof
US8614311B2 (en) 2007-12-12 2013-12-24 Quark Pharmaceuticals, Inc. RTP801L siRNA compounds and methods of use thereof
WO2016168198A1 (en) * 2015-04-13 2016-10-20 Aduro Biotech, Inc. Epidermal growth factor receptor variant iii-mesothelin fusions and methods of using the same
US9808516B2 (en) 2015-04-13 2017-11-07 Aduro Biotech, Inc. Immunogenic fusion proteins for the treatment of cancer

Families Citing this family (17)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2002101075A2 (en) * 2001-06-13 2002-12-19 Millennium Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Novel genes, compositions, kits, and methods for identification, assessment, prevention, and therapy of cervical cancer
US7482116B2 (en) 2002-06-07 2009-01-27 Dna Genotek Inc. Compositions and methods for obtaining nucleic acids from sputum
AU2003278112A1 (en) * 2002-10-18 2004-05-04 Silence Therapeutics Ag Factor involved in metastasis and uses thereof
US7851145B2 (en) * 2005-12-30 2010-12-14 Ventana Medical Systems, Inc. Na+, K+-ATPase expression in cervical dysplasia and cancer
JP5526378B2 (en) * 2009-03-05 2014-06-18 国立大学法人山口大学 Method for detecting cervical cancer
WO2010104662A1 (en) * 2009-03-09 2010-09-16 University Of Georgia Research Foundation, Inc. Protein markers identification for gastric cancer diagnosis
US8628959B2 (en) * 2009-05-23 2014-01-14 Incube Labs, Llc Methods for cancer treatment using stem cells
US9144586B2 (en) 2010-04-07 2015-09-29 Incube Labs, Llc Method for treating glucose related disorders using stem cell-derived gastro-intestinal cells
AU2012273121B2 (en) 2011-06-19 2016-08-25 Abogen, Inc. Devices, solutions and methods for sample collection
WO2013049398A2 (en) * 2011-09-28 2013-04-04 H. Lee Moffitt Cancer Center & Research Institute, Inc. Protein-protein interaction as biomarkers
WO2013093133A1 (en) 2011-12-23 2013-06-27 Yudigar S.L.U. Uncoupling device and method
JP5876359B2 (en) * 2012-03-30 2016-03-02 シスメックス株式会社 Canceration information providing method and canceration information providing apparatus
EP3030679A4 (en) * 2013-08-08 2017-04-12 The Research Foundation for The State University of New York Keratins as biomarkers for cervical cancer and survival
EP3256849A4 (en) 2015-02-09 2018-12-05 Abogen, Inc. Devices, solutions and methods for sample collection related applications, analysis and diagnosis
US10487365B2 (en) 2016-09-20 2019-11-26 The United States Of America, As Represented By The Secretary, Department Of Health And Human Services Methods for detecting expression of lnc-FANCI-2 in cervical cells
CN109198732A (en) * 2018-08-20 2019-01-15 苏州晞光生物科技有限公司 A kind of clothes and test method of the wearable detection human secretion of intelligence
GB201820867D0 (en) * 2018-12-20 2019-02-06 Arquer Diagnostics Ltd Detection method

Citations (21)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
EP0125023A1 (en) 1983-04-08 1984-11-14 Genentech, Inc. Recombinant immunoglobulin preparations, methods for their preparation, DNA sequences, expression vectors and recombinant host cells therefor
US4522811A (en) 1982-07-08 1985-06-11 Syntex (U.S.A.) Inc. Serial injection of muramyldipeptides and liposomes enhances the anti-infective activity of muramyldipeptides
EP0171496A2 (en) 1984-08-15 1986-02-19 Research Development Corporation of Japan Process for the production of a chimera monoclonal antibody
EP0173494A2 (en) 1984-08-27 1986-03-05 The Board Of Trustees Of The Leland Stanford Junior University Chimeric receptors by DNA splicing and expression
WO1986001533A1 (en) 1984-09-03 1986-03-13 Celltech Limited Production of chimeric antibodies
EP0184187A2 (en) 1984-12-04 1986-06-11 Teijin Limited Mouse-human chimaeric immunoglobulin heavy chain, and chimaeric DNA encoding it
WO1987002671A1 (en) 1985-11-01 1987-05-07 International Genetic Engineering, Inc. Modular assembly of antibody genes, antibodies prepared thereby and use
US4676980A (en) 1985-09-23 1987-06-30 The United States Of America As Represented By The Secretary Of The Department Of Health And Human Services Target specific cross-linked heteroantibodies
WO1988009810A1 (en) 1987-06-11 1988-12-15 Synthetic Genetics Novel amphiphilic nucleic acid conjugates
US4816397A (en) 1983-03-25 1989-03-28 Celltech, Limited Multichain polypeptides or proteins and processes for their production
WO1989010134A1 (en) 1988-04-25 1989-11-02 The Regents Of The University Of California Chimeric peptides for neuropeptide delivery through the blood-brain barrier
US4946778A (en) 1987-09-21 1990-08-07 Genex Corporation Single polypeptide chain binding molecules
US4987071A (en) 1986-12-03 1991-01-22 University Patents, Inc. RNA ribozyme polymerases, dephosphorylases, restriction endoribonucleases and methods
US5116742A (en) 1986-12-03 1992-05-26 University Patents, Inc. RNA ribozyme restriction endoribonucleases and methods
US5328470A (en) 1989-03-31 1994-07-12 The Regents Of The University Of Michigan Treatment of diseases by site-specific instillation of cells or site-specific transformation of cells and kits therefor
US5585089A (en) 1988-12-28 1996-12-17 Protein Design Labs, Inc. Humanized immunoglobulins
US5876930A (en) 1994-11-16 1999-03-02 Perkin-Elmer Corporation Hybridization assay using self-quenching fluorescence probe
US6121424A (en) 1991-11-25 2000-09-19 Enzon, Inc. Multivalent antigen-binding proteins
WO2001042467A2 (en) 1999-12-08 2001-06-14 Millennium Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Genes, compositions, kits, and methods for identification, assessment, prevention, and therapy of cervical cancer
WO2001042792A2 (en) 1999-12-08 2001-06-14 Millennium Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Diagnosis of cervical cancer using marker proteins
US20030138792A1 (en) 2001-05-31 2003-07-24 Millennium Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Compositions, kits, and methods for identification, assessment, prevention and therapy of cervical cancer

Family Cites Families (48)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US4873191A (en) 1981-06-12 1989-10-10 Ohio University Genetic transformation of zygotes
US4870009A (en) 1982-11-22 1989-09-26 The Salk Institute For Biological Studies Method of obtaining gene product through the generation of transgenic animals
US4736866B1 (en) 1984-06-22 1988-04-12 Transgenic non-human mammals
US4683202A (en) 1985-03-28 1987-07-28 Cetus Corporation Process for amplifying nucleic acid sequences
US4868103A (en) 1986-02-19 1989-09-19 Enzo Biochem, Inc. Analyte detection by means of energy transfer
US5225539A (en) 1986-03-27 1993-07-06 Medical Research Council Recombinant altered antibodies and methods of making altered antibodies
DE3751873T2 (en) 1986-04-09 1997-02-13 Genzyme Corp Genetically transformed animals that secrete a desired protein in milk
US4873316A (en) 1987-06-23 1989-10-10 Biogen, Inc. Isolation of exogenous recombinant proteins from the milk of transgenic mammals
US5080891A (en) 1987-08-03 1992-01-14 Ddi Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Conjugates of superoxide dismutase coupled to high molecular weight polyalkylene glycols
US4843155A (en) 1987-11-19 1989-06-27 Piotr Chomczynski Product and process for isolating RNA
AU4308689A (en) 1988-09-02 1990-04-02 Protein Engineering Corporation Generation and selection of recombinant varied binding proteins
US5223409A (en) 1988-09-02 1993-06-29 Protein Engineering Corp. Directed evolution of novel binding proteins
FR2646438B1 (en) 1989-03-20 2007-11-02 Pasteur Institut A METHOD FOR SPECIFIC REPLACEMENT OF A COPY OF A GENE PRESENT IN THE RECEIVER GENOME BY INTEGRATION OF A GENE DIFFERENT FROM THAT OR INTEGRATION
WO1991001140A1 (en) 1989-07-25 1991-02-07 Cell Genesys, Inc. Homologous recombination for universal donor cells and chimeric mammalian hosts
US5427908A (en) 1990-05-01 1995-06-27 Affymax Technologies N.V. Recombinant library screening methods
EP0585287B1 (en) 1990-07-10 1999-10-13 Cambridge Antibody Technology Limited Methods for producing members of specific binding pairs
CA2086741A1 (en) 1990-07-10 1992-01-11 Paul E. Bender Oxamides
GB9015198D0 (en) 1990-07-10 1990-08-29 Brien Caroline J O Binding substance
EP0814159B1 (en) 1990-08-29 2005-07-27 GenPharm International, Inc. Transgenic mice capable of producing heterologous antibodies
US5545806A (en) 1990-08-29 1996-08-13 Genpharm International, Inc. Ransgenic non-human animals for producing heterologous antibodies
US5625126A (en) 1990-08-29 1997-04-29 Genpharm International, Inc. Transgenic non-human animals for producing heterologous antibodies
US5661016A (en) 1990-08-29 1997-08-26 Genpharm International Inc. Transgenic non-human animals capable of producing heterologous antibodies of various isotypes
US5633425A (en) 1990-08-29 1997-05-27 Genpharm International, Inc. Transgenic non-human animals capable of producing heterologous antibodies
ATE164395T1 (en) 1990-12-03 1998-04-15 Genentech Inc METHOD FOR ENRICHMENT OF PROTEIN VARIANTS WITH MODIFIED BINDING PROPERTIES
CA2100352A1 (en) * 1991-01-11 1992-07-12 Dean Sheppard Integrin .beta. subunit and uses thereof
DK1279731T3 (en) 1991-03-01 2007-09-24 Dyax Corp Process for the development of binding mini-proteins
DE69233367T2 (en) 1991-04-10 2005-05-25 The Scripps Research Institute, La Jolla LIBRARIES OF HETERODIMERIC RECEPTORS BY PHAGEMIDES
DE4122599C2 (en) 1991-07-08 1993-11-11 Deutsches Krebsforsch Phagemid for screening antibodies
US5962643A (en) * 1991-07-11 1999-10-05 The Regents Of The University Of California Integrin β subunit and uses thereof
WO1993004169A1 (en) 1991-08-20 1993-03-04 Genpharm International, Inc. Gene targeting in animal cells using isogenic dna constructs
US5621083A (en) 1991-11-04 1997-04-15 Xoma Corporation Immunotoxins comprising ribosome-inactivating proteins
CA2087413A1 (en) 1992-01-17 1993-07-18 Joseph R. Lakowicz Fluorescent energy transfer immunoassay
JP3537141B2 (en) 1992-10-30 2004-06-14 ザ ゼネラル ホスピタル コーポレーション Interaction-based capture system for separation of new proteins
GB9517779D0 (en) 1995-08-31 1995-11-01 Roslin Inst Edinburgh Biological manipulation
GB9517780D0 (en) 1995-08-31 1995-11-01 Roslin Inst Edinburgh Biological manipulation
US5854033A (en) 1995-11-21 1998-12-29 Yale University Rolling circle replication reporter systems
US6033862A (en) 1996-10-30 2000-03-07 Tokuyama Corporation Marker and immunological reagent for dialysis-related amyloidosis, diabetes mellitus and diabetes mellitus complications
AU8901198A (en) * 1997-08-06 1999-03-01 Millennium Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Tango-71, tango-73, tango-74, tango-76, and tango-83 nucleic acid molecules and polypeptides
PT1025444E (en) * 1997-10-21 2005-07-29 Cancer Rec Tech Ltd DETERMINATION OF CELL GROWTH ANOMALY
AU750296B2 (en) * 2000-06-23 2002-07-11 F. Hoffmann-La Roche Ag Antibodies against SEMP1, methods for their production and uses thereof
GB2364921A (en) * 2000-07-18 2002-02-13 Collinson Jones Anthony Golf ball cleaning apparatus
GB0018140D0 (en) * 2000-07-24 2000-09-13 Medical Res Council Screening for abnormalities
AUPQ901700A0 (en) * 2000-07-26 2000-08-17 National Cancer Centre Of Singapore Pte Ltd Molecular markers
EP1339872A2 (en) * 2000-09-19 2003-09-03 Whitehead Institute For Biomedical Research Genetic markers for tumors
WO2002101075A2 (en) * 2001-06-13 2002-12-19 Millennium Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Novel genes, compositions, kits, and methods for identification, assessment, prevention, and therapy of cervical cancer
DE10211088A1 (en) * 2002-03-13 2003-09-25 Ugur Sahin Gene products differentially expressed in tumors and their use
EP1565581B1 (en) 2002-08-20 2011-08-10 Millennium Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Compositions, kits, and methods for identification, assessment, prevention, and therapy of cervical cancer
EP1756577B1 (en) * 2004-03-24 2012-03-14 Tripath Imaging, Inc. Methods and compositions for the detection of cervical disease

Patent Citations (22)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US4522811A (en) 1982-07-08 1985-06-11 Syntex (U.S.A.) Inc. Serial injection of muramyldipeptides and liposomes enhances the anti-infective activity of muramyldipeptides
US4816397A (en) 1983-03-25 1989-03-28 Celltech, Limited Multichain polypeptides or proteins and processes for their production
US4816567A (en) 1983-04-08 1989-03-28 Genentech, Inc. Recombinant immunoglobin preparations
EP0125023A1 (en) 1983-04-08 1984-11-14 Genentech, Inc. Recombinant immunoglobulin preparations, methods for their preparation, DNA sequences, expression vectors and recombinant host cells therefor
EP0171496A2 (en) 1984-08-15 1986-02-19 Research Development Corporation of Japan Process for the production of a chimera monoclonal antibody
EP0173494A2 (en) 1984-08-27 1986-03-05 The Board Of Trustees Of The Leland Stanford Junior University Chimeric receptors by DNA splicing and expression
WO1986001533A1 (en) 1984-09-03 1986-03-13 Celltech Limited Production of chimeric antibodies
EP0184187A2 (en) 1984-12-04 1986-06-11 Teijin Limited Mouse-human chimaeric immunoglobulin heavy chain, and chimaeric DNA encoding it
US4676980A (en) 1985-09-23 1987-06-30 The United States Of America As Represented By The Secretary Of The Department Of Health And Human Services Target specific cross-linked heteroantibodies
WO1987002671A1 (en) 1985-11-01 1987-05-07 International Genetic Engineering, Inc. Modular assembly of antibody genes, antibodies prepared thereby and use
US5116742A (en) 1986-12-03 1992-05-26 University Patents, Inc. RNA ribozyme restriction endoribonucleases and methods
US4987071A (en) 1986-12-03 1991-01-22 University Patents, Inc. RNA ribozyme polymerases, dephosphorylases, restriction endoribonucleases and methods
WO1988009810A1 (en) 1987-06-11 1988-12-15 Synthetic Genetics Novel amphiphilic nucleic acid conjugates
US4946778A (en) 1987-09-21 1990-08-07 Genex Corporation Single polypeptide chain binding molecules
WO1989010134A1 (en) 1988-04-25 1989-11-02 The Regents Of The University Of California Chimeric peptides for neuropeptide delivery through the blood-brain barrier
US5585089A (en) 1988-12-28 1996-12-17 Protein Design Labs, Inc. Humanized immunoglobulins
US5328470A (en) 1989-03-31 1994-07-12 The Regents Of The University Of Michigan Treatment of diseases by site-specific instillation of cells or site-specific transformation of cells and kits therefor
US6121424A (en) 1991-11-25 2000-09-19 Enzon, Inc. Multivalent antigen-binding proteins
US5876930A (en) 1994-11-16 1999-03-02 Perkin-Elmer Corporation Hybridization assay using self-quenching fluorescence probe
WO2001042467A2 (en) 1999-12-08 2001-06-14 Millennium Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Genes, compositions, kits, and methods for identification, assessment, prevention, and therapy of cervical cancer
WO2001042792A2 (en) 1999-12-08 2001-06-14 Millennium Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Diagnosis of cervical cancer using marker proteins
US20030138792A1 (en) 2001-05-31 2003-07-24 Millennium Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Compositions, kits, and methods for identification, assessment, prevention and therapy of cervical cancer

Non-Patent Citations (41)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Title
"Cancer Facts & Figures", 1996, AMERICAN CANCER SOCIETY
"Consensus Development Conference Statement on Cervical Cancer, Apr.I-3,1996", NATIONAL INSTITUTES OF HEALTH
"Current Protocols in Molecular Biology", 1989, JOHN WILEY & SONS
BARTEL; SZOSTAK, SCIENCE, vol. 261, 1993, pages 1411 - 1418
BETTER ET AL., SCIENCE, vol. 240, 1988, pages 1041 - 1043
BIRD ET AL., SCIENCE, vol. 242, 1988, pages 423 - 426
BRITISH JOURNAL OF CANCER, vol. 86, 2002, pages 276 - 278
CANCER RESEARCH, vol. 63, 2003, pages 1927 - 1935
CHEN ET AL., PROC. NATL. ACAD. SCI. USA, vol. 91, 1994, pages 3054 - 3057
CRUIKSHANK ET AL., J. ACQUIRED IMMUNE DEFICIENCY SYNDROMES AND HUMAN RETROVIROLOGY, vol. 14, 1997, pages 193
GAULTIER ET AL., NUCLEIC ACIDS RES., vol. 15, 1987, pages 6625 - 6641
GENOMICS, vol. 74, 2001, pages 71 - 78
GENOMICS, vol. 79, 2002, pages 539 - 546
HASELHOF; GERLACH, NATURE, vol. 334, 1988, pages 585 - 591
HELENE, ANN. N. Y. ACAD. SCI., vol. 660, 1992, pages 27 - 36
HELENE, ANTICANCER DRUG DES., vol. 6, no. 6, 1991, pages 569 - 84
HOLLIGER ET AL., PROC. NATL. ACAD. SCI. USA, vol. 90, 1993, pages 6444 - 6448
HUSTON ET AL., METHODS IN ENZYMOLOGY MOLECULAR DESIGN AND MODELING: CONCEPTS AND APPLICATIONS, vol. 203, 1991, pages 46 - 88
HYRUP ET AL., BIOORGANIC & MEDICINAL CHEMISTRY, vol. 4, no. 1, 1996, pages 5 - 23
HYRUP, NATL. ACAD. SCI. USA, vol. 86, pages 6553 - 6556
IKE ET AL., NUCLEIC ACID RES., vol. 11, 1983, pages 477
INOUE ET AL., FEBS LETT., vol. 215, 1987, pages 327 - 330
INOUE ET AL., NUCLEIC ACIDS RES., vol. 15, 1987, pages 6131 - 6148
ITAKURA ET AL., ANNU. REV. BIOCHEM., vol. 53, 1984, pages 323
ITAKURA ET AL., SCIENCE, vol. 198, 1984, pages 1056
J. BIOL. CHEM., vol. 272, 1997, pages 25576 - 25582
JOURNAL OF PATHOLOGY, vol. 189, 1999, pages 245 - 250
KROL ET AL., BIOLTECHNIQUES, vol. 6, 1988, pages 958 - 976
LEMAITRE ET AL., PROM NATL. ACAD. SCI. USA, vol. 84, 1987, pages 648 - 652
LIU ET AL., J. IMMUNOL., vol. 139, 1987, pages 3521 - 3526
LIU ET AL., PROC. NATL. ACAD. SCI. USA, vol. 84, 1987, pages 3439 - 3443
MAHER, BIOASSAYS, vol. 14, no. 12, 1992, pages 807 - 15
MCLEOD ET AL., EUR. J. CANCER, vol. 35, no. 12, 1999, pages 1650 - 1652
MUNOZ ET AL.: "Human Papillomavirus", 1989, OXFORD PRESS, article "Epidemiology of Cervical Cancer", pages: 9 - 39
NARANG, TETRAHEDRON, vol. 39, 1983, pages 3
RIED, T. ET AL., GENES CHROMOSOMES CANCER, vol. 25, no. 3, 1999, pages 195 - 204
SUN ET AL., PROC. NATL. ACAD. SCI. USA, 1987
WHITLOW ET AL., METHODS IN ENZYMOLOGV, vol. 2, 1991, pages 1 - 9
WHITLOW ET AL., METHODS IN ENZYMOLOGY, vol. 2, 1991, pages 97 - 105
WHITLOW ET AL., PROTEIN ENG., vol. 7, 1994, pages 1017 - 1026
ZON, PHARM. RES., vol. 5, 1988, pages 539 - 549

Cited By (32)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US7579160B2 (en) 1998-03-18 2009-08-25 Corixa Corporation Methods for the detection of cervical cancer
US7585506B2 (en) 1998-03-18 2009-09-08 Corixa Corporation Compositions and methods for the therapy and diagnosis of lung cancer
US7749505B2 (en) 1999-12-17 2010-07-06 Corixa Corporation Compositions and methods for the therapy and diagnosis of lung cancer
WO2004018999A3 (en) * 2002-08-20 2005-06-30 Millenium Pharmaceuticals Inc Compositions, kits, and methods for identification, assessment, prevention, and therapy of cervical cancer
US7361511B2 (en) 2002-08-20 2008-04-22 Millenium Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Compositions, kits, and methods for identification, assessment, prevention, and therapy of cervical cancer
EP1985715A3 (en) * 2004-07-16 2008-12-31 Oncomethylome Sciences, S.A. ESR1 and cervical cancer
US8642571B2 (en) 2004-08-06 2014-02-04 Quark Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Therapeutic uses of inhibitors of RTP801
US8168607B2 (en) 2004-08-06 2012-05-01 Quark Pharmaceuticals Inc. Methods of treating eye diseases in diabetic patients
US8309532B2 (en) 2004-08-16 2012-11-13 Quark Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Therapeutic uses of inhibitors of RTP801
EP2319925A2 (en) 2004-08-16 2011-05-11 Quark Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Therapeutic uses of inhibitors of RTP801
US7741299B2 (en) 2004-08-16 2010-06-22 Quark Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Therapeutic uses of inhibitors of RTP801
JP2008510464A (en) * 2004-08-19 2008-04-10 コリクサ コーポレイション Compositions and methods for the treatment and diagnosis of lung cancer
WO2006031363A3 (en) * 2004-08-19 2006-07-27 Corixa Corp Compositions and methods for the therapy and diagnosis of lung cancer
WO2006031363A2 (en) * 2004-08-19 2006-03-23 Corixa Corporation Compositions and methods for the therapy and diagnosis of lung cancer
EP2402758A2 (en) 2005-09-19 2012-01-04 Veridex, LLC Methods and materials for identifying the origin of a carcinoma of unknown primary origin
WO2007051218A3 (en) * 2005-10-31 2007-09-20 Bmt Medizinische Forschung Und Method using human or mouse isg12 for the development and production of medicaments and single nucleotide polymorphism in the isg12 gene for diagnostic purposes
WO2007051218A2 (en) * 2005-10-31 2007-05-10 Bmt Medizinische Forschung Und Entwicklung Gmbh Method using human or mouse isg12 for the development and production of medicaments and single nucleotide polymorphism in the isg12 gene for diagnostic purposes
US9056903B2 (en) 2006-01-20 2015-06-16 Quark Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Therapeutic uses of inhibitors of RTP801
EP2402443A2 (en) 2006-01-20 2012-01-04 Quark Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Therapeutic uses of inhibitors of rtp801
US8067570B2 (en) 2006-01-20 2011-11-29 Quark Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Therapeutic uses of inhibitors of RTP801
US8344104B2 (en) 2006-05-11 2013-01-01 Quark Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Screening systems utilizing RTP801
US8034575B2 (en) 2006-05-11 2011-10-11 Quark Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Screening systems utilizing RTP801
US7723052B2 (en) 2006-05-11 2010-05-25 Quark Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Screening systems utilizing RTP801
US8017764B2 (en) 2006-06-09 2011-09-13 Quark Pharmaceuticals Inc. Therapeutic uses of inhibitors of RTP801L
US7626015B2 (en) 2006-06-09 2009-12-01 Quark Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Therapeutic uses of inhibitors of RTP801L
US7872119B2 (en) 2007-02-26 2011-01-18 Quark Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Inhibitors of RTP801 and their use in disease treatment
US8614311B2 (en) 2007-12-12 2013-12-24 Quark Pharmaceuticals, Inc. RTP801L siRNA compounds and methods of use thereof
CN102372773A (en) * 2010-08-11 2012-03-14 中国科学院生物物理研究所 Human bladder cancer tumor marker, antibody thereof and application thereof
US9073995B2 (en) 2010-08-11 2015-07-07 Institute Of Biophysics, Chinese Academy Of Sciences Bladder cancer tumor marker, antibody and use thereof
WO2016168198A1 (en) * 2015-04-13 2016-10-20 Aduro Biotech, Inc. Epidermal growth factor receptor variant iii-mesothelin fusions and methods of using the same
US9808516B2 (en) 2015-04-13 2017-11-07 Aduro Biotech, Inc. Immunogenic fusion proteins for the treatment of cancer
US10105427B2 (en) 2015-04-13 2018-10-23 Aduro Biotech, Inc. Epidermal growth factor receptor variant III-mesothelin fusions and methods of using the same

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
CN101044247B (en) 2011-06-22
AU2003265556A1 (en) 2004-03-11
EP1565581B1 (en) 2011-08-10
US20120264625A1 (en) 2012-10-18
CN102220423A (en) 2011-10-19
JP2006514823A (en) 2006-05-18
CN101044247A (en) 2007-09-26
EP2311980A1 (en) 2011-04-20
WO2004018999A3 (en) 2005-06-30
EP2311978A1 (en) 2011-04-20
AU2003265556A8 (en) 2004-03-11
KR20050058407A (en) 2005-06-16
US20050037010A1 (en) 2005-02-17
EP2305836A1 (en) 2011-04-06
CA2496272A1 (en) 2004-03-04
EP2311979A1 (en) 2011-04-20
ATE519862T1 (en) 2011-08-15
US20080286781A1 (en) 2008-11-20
JP2011036247A (en) 2011-02-24
EP1565581A2 (en) 2005-08-24
EP1565581A4 (en) 2008-01-02
US7361511B2 (en) 2008-04-22
EP2314716A1 (en) 2011-04-27

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
EP1565581B1 (en) Compositions, kits, and methods for identification, assessment, prevention, and therapy of cervical cancer
US8323906B2 (en) Compositions, kits, and methods for identification, assessment, prevention and therapy of breast and ovarian cancer
US20100075325A1 (en) Compositions, kits, and methods for identification, assessment, prevention, and therapy of breast cancer
US20100291068A1 (en) Nucleic acid molecules and proteins for the identification, assessment, prevention, and therapy of ovarian cancer
WO2002101075A2 (en) Novel genes, compositions, kits, and methods for identification, assessment, prevention, and therapy of cervical cancer
WO2003004989A2 (en) Compositions, kits, and methods for identification, assessment, prevention, and therapy of breast cancer
WO2002071928A2 (en) Nucleic acid molecules and proteins for the identification, assessment, prevention, and therapy of ovarian cancer
WO2003009814A2 (en) Novel genes, compositions, kits, and methods for identification, assessment, prevention, and therapy of prostate cancer
WO2001070979A9 (en) Genes, compositions, kits, and method for identification, assessment, prevention and therapy of ovarian cancer
JP2012024089A (en) Gene, composition, kit, and method for identification, assessment, prevention, and therapy of human prostate cancer

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
AK Designated states

Kind code of ref document: A2

Designated state(s): AE AG AL AM AT AU AZ BA BB BG BR BY BZ CA CH CN CO CR CU CZ DE DK DM DZ EC EE ES FI GB GD GE GH GM HR HU ID IL IN IS JP KE KG KP KR KZ LC LK LR LS LT LU LV MA MD MG MK MN MW MX MZ NI NO NZ OM PG PH PL PT RO RU SC SD SE SG SK SL SY TJ TM TN TR TT TZ UA UG US UZ VC VN YU ZA ZM ZW

AL Designated countries for regional patents

Kind code of ref document: A2

Designated state(s): GH GM KE LS MW MZ SD SL SZ TZ UG ZM ZW AM AZ BY KG KZ MD RU TJ TM AT BE BG CH CY CZ DE DK EE ES FI FR GB GR HU IE IT LU MC NL PT RO SE SI SK TR BF BJ CF CG CI CM GA GN GQ GW ML MR NE SN TD TG

121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application
ENP Entry into the national phase

Ref document number: 2496272

Country of ref document: CA

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 2004529772

Country of ref document: JP

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 1020057002915

Country of ref document: KR

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 2003793217

Country of ref document: EP

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 2003824456X

Country of ref document: CN

WWP Wipo information: published in national office

Ref document number: 1020057002915

Country of ref document: KR

DFPE Request for preliminary examination filed prior to expiration of 19th month from priority date (pct application filed before 20040101)
WWP Wipo information: published in national office

Ref document number: 2003793217

Country of ref document: EP